Fact File

Compilation of SDI Technical Documents, ANSI/SDI

Standards and Test Methods, and SDI Alerts

Updated July 2013

Please visit the Steel Door Institute website

for the latest version of the Fact File.

www.steeldoor.org/factfile.php

Steel Door Institute

30200 Detroit Road · Westlake, OH · 44145 · TEL 440-899-0010 · FAX 440-892-1404 · info@steeldoor.org
 Steel Door Institute Publications
Summary of Documents Provides a description of each technical document

ANSI/SDI-100-91 See ANSI A250.8-03 (R2008)

SDI-105-98 See ANSI A250.11-2012

SDI-107-84 See ANSI A250.6-2003 (R2009)

SDI-108-10 Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors

SDI-110-09 Standard Steel Doors and Frames for Modular Masonry Construction

SDI-111-09 Recommended Details for Standard Steel Doors, Frames, Accessories and
Related Components
111-A Recommended Standard Steel Door Details

111-B Recommended Standard Details for Dutch Doors

111-C Recommended Louver Details for Standard Steel Doors

111-D Recommended Door, Frame and Hardware Schedule for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames
111-E Recommended Weatherstripping for Standard Steel Doors and Frames

111-F Recommended Existing Wall Anchors for Standard Steel Doors and Frames

111-G Recommended Standard Preparation for Double Type (Interconnected) Locks on

Standard Steel Doors and Frames
111-H High Frequency Hinge Preparations for Frames

SDI-112-08 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors and Frames

SDI-113-1ϯ Standard Practice for Determining the Steady- State Thermal Transmittance of
Steel Door and Frame Assemblies
SDI-117-ϭϯ Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames

SDI-118-12 Basic Fire Door, Fire Door Frame, Transom/Sidelight Frame, and Window Frame
Requirements
SDI-122-07 Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames

SDI-124-98 (R06)* Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors and Frames

SDI-127 Series - Industry Alerts (A through L)

SDI-127-A-06 End Closure

SDI-127-B-06 Door Edge Cutouts

SDI-127-C-06 Frame Cutout Limits

SDI-127-D-06 Electric Strikes in Stud Walls

SDI-127-E-06 Prime Painted Materials Alert

SDI-127-F-02 Butted Frames Rough Opening Sizes

SDI-127-G-06 Environmental Considerations Relating to Factory Painted Steel Doors and

Frames
SDI-127-H-02 Water Penetration

SDI-127-I-04 Grouting Frames in Drywall

SDI-127-J-04 Bituminous Back-Coating of Frames

SDI-127-K-09 Improper Wedges as Hold-Opens

SDI-127-L-09 Buyer Beware: Steel Doors with Lead-Based Primer

SDI-128-09 Guidelines for Acoustical Performance of Standard Steel Doors and Frames

SDI-129- 12 Hinge and Strike Spacing

SDI-130-05 (R10) Electrified Hinge Preparations

SDI-131-10 Accelerated Physical Endurance Test Procedure for Steel Doors

SDI-132 Drywall Slip-On Frames

ANSI/SDI A250.3-2007 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish Coatings for
(R2011) Steel Doors and Frames
ANSI/SDI A250.4-2011 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors,
Frames and Frame Anchors
ANSI/SDI A250.6-2003 Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and
(R2009) Frames
ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames
(R2008)*
ANSI/SDI A250.10-1998 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel
(R2004)* Doors and Frames
ANSI/SDI A250.11-2012 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames

ANSI/SDI A250.13-2008 Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components for Swinging
Door Assemblies

*Document was reviewed by the Steel Door Institute Technical Committee and approved for
reaffirmation; ie., no revision was necessary to previously published document.
 Summary of Documents

SDI – 108 Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors
This document was developed to establish guide criteria for the selection and usage of 1-3/4" and 1-
3/8" standard steel doors in such building types as apartment, dormitory, hotel/motel, hospital/nursing
home, industrial, office and school.

SDI-110 Standard Steel Doors and Frames for Modular Masonry Construction
This document contains information in respect to, as the title indicates, the installation of standard steel
doors and frames in modular masonry construction. The basic module covered in the document as
developed by the industry is 4".

SDI-111 Recommended Details for Standard Steel Doors, Frames, Accessories and Related Components
This document is divided into seven sections, each dealing with a specific area as follows:

111-A covers recommended steel door frame details as they are affected by common wall conditions.
111-B is a document detailing standard dimensions for Dutch doors.
111-C is a document that discusses, explains, and details a variety of louver designs and size available for
standard steel doors.
111-D is a document that contains a suggested door, frame, and hardware schedule form and defines
"handing".
111-E contains details which represent the recommendations of the SDI in respect to weather-stripping
of standard steel doors and frames.
111-F is a guide for architects to aid them in recognizing available options to the traditional sub buck
detail that has been widely used in the past. It illustrates anchoring systems which are available in
regular and labeled frames.
111-G detailed dimensions for standard door and frame preparation for double type (interconnected)
locks.
111-H contains details of how extremely high frequency or high use areas which need to be supplied
with additional reinforcing to eliminate potential door sag.

SDI-112 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors and Frames

This document provides information regarding the galvanized sheet used in standard steel door and
frame construction when a requirement for galvanized doors and frames is specified.

SDI-113 Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal Transmittance of Steel Door and
Frame Assemblies
This document establishes a minimum standard and a method of test for thermal effectiveness of steel
door and frame assemblies under circumstances that might reasonably be considered normal field
applications and conditions.
SDI-117 Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames
This document is intended to furnish users and prospective users of standard steel doors and frames
with practical information regarding mortise and manufacturing tolerances for both doors and frames.

SDI-118 Basic Fire Door, Fire Door Frame, Transom/Sidelight Frame, and Window Requirements
This document contains rules and other information in a condensed simplified manner in respect to
code requirements for the design and use of fire doors.

SDI-122 Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames
This document covers field installation problems most commonly experienced with standard steel door
and frame installations. Most problems encountered are because of inappropriate application of the
products and/or improper installation.

SDI-124 Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors and Frames

This document is intended to serve as a general outline of maintenance activities needed for hollow
metal doors and frames. It should be noted that the door and frame are virtually maintenance free.
Maintenance will be, for the most part, associated with accessories and hardware attached to the door
and frame.

SDI-127 Series - Industry Alerts (A through L)

127-A End Closure
127-B Door Edge Cutouts
127-C Frame Cutout Limits
127-D Electric Strikes in Stud Walls
127-E Prime Painted Materials Alert
127-F Butted Frames Rough Opening Sizes
127-G Environmental Considerations Relating to Factory Painted Steel Doors and Frames
127-H Water Penetration
127-I Grouting Frames in Drywall
127-J Bituminous Back-Coating of Frames
127-K Improper Wedges as Hold-Opens
127-L Buyer Beware: Steel Doors with Lead-Based Primer

SDI-128 Guidelines for Acoustical Performance of Standard Steel Doors and Frames
This document shall provide guidelines for the specifying, designing, installing, and adjusting of standard
steel doors and frames in Sound Control applications.

SDI-129 Hinge and Strike Spacing

A reference of standard locations used in the manufacture of steel door and frames by SDI member
companies for a variety of door sizes.
SDI-130 Electrified Hinge Preparations
Practical information regarding an acceptable method for preparing frames for 4-1/2" electric hinges.
This document will allow frame manufacturers to provide frames prior to having knowledge of the
specific electric hinge being used.

SDI-131 Accelerated Physical Endurance Test Procedure for Steel Doors

This test procedure provides manufacturers with a method of quickly testing the performance of doors.

SDI-132 Drywall Slip-On Frames

This document illustrates step by step how to install drywall frames in less than 10 minutes. It also lists
the many advantages of drywall slip-on frames.

A250.3 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish Coatings for Steel Doors
and Frames
Prescribes the procedure to be followed in the selection of material, chemical preparation, painting,
testing, and evaluation of factory applied finish painted steel surfaces for steel doors and frames.

A250.4 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames and
Frame Anchors
A standard method of testing the performance of a steel door mounted in a pressed steel or channel
iron frame under condition that might be considered an accelerated field operating conditions.

A250.6 Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and Frames
Provides users of standard steel doors and frames with practical information regarding accepted design
methods for reinforcing, and recommended practices for proper field preparation and installation of
builders’ hardware.

A250.8 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames

The basic standard of the industry covers specifications for swinging steel doors and frames. It offers a
number of choices in both regular and fire rated door and frame construction design. The specification
covers sizes, types, materials, general construction requirements, and finishing of 1-3/4 ” and 1-3/8”
steel doors together with frames and accessories.

A250.10 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and
Frames
Procedures for the selection of material, chemical preparation, painting, testing and evaluation of prime
painted steel surfaces for steel doors and frames.

A250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames

This document includes information in respect to storage of frames on the jobsite, grouting and back
painting of frames and assembly of frames. It contains instructions in respect to bracing frames before
wall construction and the installation of frames in masonry, steel stud wall construction, wood stud wall
construction and drywall construction.
A250.13 Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components for Swinging Door Assemblies
This standard provides procedures for testing and establishing load ratings (design load in pounds per
square foot or pounds force) for components of exterior swinging door assemblies. It is the intent of this
document to test the protection of openings during severe windstorm conditions, such as a hurricane,
that produces sustained wind speeds or gusts in a range of 110 to 150 miles per hour as defined by ASCE
7-02. It is not intended to simulate wind forces generated by tornadoes.
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
108 - 10

Recommended
Selection and Usage Guide
for
Standard Steel Doors

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2010 Steel Door Institute
SDI-108
Recommended
Selection and Usage Guide
for Standard Steel Doors

Purpose Usage
To establish guide criteria for the selection and usage Selection of standard steel doors for general usage is
of 1-3/4" and 1-3/8" standard steel doors. made by analyzing criteria such as frequency of use,
including subjection to and degree of possible abuse.
Other criteria to be considered in door selection are:
Selection
conformance to local building codes and fire code
Standard steel doors are classified in four levels: regulations; sound attenuation and/or insulation re-
Level 1 – 1-3/4" and 1-3/8" standard duty, Level 2 – 1-3/4" quirements; and architectural design and appearance.
heavy duty, Level 3 – 1-3/4" extra heavy duty and
Table 2 is a reference aid matching standard duty,
Level 4 – 1-3/4" maximum duty.
heavy duty, extra heavy duty and maximum duty doors
Each of the four levels noted above offer a range of with general usage requirements within the classifica-
construction models and designs to meet architectural tion of buildings. Where optional door levels and models
requirements for preference and appearance. The are indicated, further analysis on an individual job basis
standard steel door construction models are full flush, is recommended.
seamless and, stile and rail.
When unusual or special door usage conditions are
Recommended minimum gauge requirements for the encountered, contact a representative member of the
various levels and models of standard steel doors are Steel Door Institute for consultation and guidance.
indicated in table 1.

Table 1 – Standard steel door grades and models

Full Flush or Seamless
Level Model Construction
MSG No. IP in SI mm
Standard 1 Full Flush
1 20 0.032 0.8
Duty 2 Seamless
Heavy 1 Full Flush
2 18 0.042 1
Duty 2 Seamless
1 Full Flush
Extra
3 Heavy 2 16 0.053 1.3 Seamless
Duty
3 *Stile & Rail
Maximum 1 Full Flush
4 14 0.067 1.6
Duty 2 Seamless
*Stiles and rails are 16 gauge; flush panels, when specified, are 18 gauge.
For complete standard steel door construction specifications and available sizes, refer to ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003
(R2008) (SDI-100), Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames and ANSI/SDI A250.4-
2001 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors and
Hardware Reinforcings.
 Table 2 – Suggested door levels and applications

Standard Steel Door Levels Door Design Nomenclature

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
Building Standard Heavy Extra Maximum
Types Duty Duty Heavy Duty
1-⅜" Duty
1-¾" 1-¾" only 1-¾" only 1-¾" only F G V FG N L
Apartment
Main Entrance • • • • • •
Unit Entrance • • • •
Bedroom • •
Bathroom • • •
Closet • • •
Stairwell • • • •
Dormitory
Main Entrance • • • • • •
Unit Entrance • • •
Bedroom • • •
Bathroom • • • •
Closet • • • •
Stairwell • • • •
Hotel – Motel
Unit Entrance • • •
Bathroom • •
Closet • • •
Stairwell • • • •
Storage & Utility • • • •
Hospital – Nursing Home
Main Entrance • • • •
Patient Room • •
Stairwell • • • •
Operating & Exam. • • •
Bathroom • • • •
Closet • • • •
Recreation • • •
Kitchen • • •
Industrial
Entrance & Exit • • • • •
Office • • • •
Production • •
Toilet • • • •
Tool • • •
Trucking • • •
Monorail • • • •
Office
Entrance • • • •
Individual Office • • •
Closet • • •
Toilet • • •
Stairwell • • • •
Equipment • • •
Boiler • • • •
School
Entrance & Exit • • • • •
Classroom • • •
Toilet • • • •
Gymnasium • • • • •
Cafeteria • • •
Stairwell • • • •
Closet • • • • • •

Note: Table 2 is only a guide. Please consult ANSI A250.8 (SDI-100) and applicable building codes for additional requirements.
 Steel Door Institute Standard Steel Door Design Nomenclature

F T WG E2 E4 E6 E8 EWG D

L LL V VL* N NL* G EG GL*

G2 G2L* G3 G3L* G4 G6 FG FG3 FL

* Note: Design combination is indicated by lite followed by louver.

Consult SDI/ANSI A250.7 for further information on standard design nomenclature for Standard Steel Doors.

Nomenclature Letter Symbols

F – Flush EWG – 6 Panel Embossed and Wood NL – Narrow Lite and Louvered
T – Textured Grain G – Half Glass (options G2, G3,
WG – Wood Grain D – Dutch Door G4 and G6)
E2 – 2 Panel Embossed L – Louvered (top or bottom) EG – Embossed and Half Glass
E4 – 4 Panel Embossed LL – Louvered (top and bottom) GL – Half Glass and Louvered
E6 – 6 Panel Embossed V – Vision Lite FG – Full Glass (option FG3)
E8 – 8 Panel Embossed VL – Vision Lite and Louvered FL – Full Louver
N – Narrow Lite

Louvered door designs are further specified as inserted louver (I), pierced (P), or air condition grille (A).
When ordering, specify design, louver size and/or free area requirements.

For the complete SDI Technical Data Series, contact the Steel Door Institute.

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
440/899-0010 • FAX 440/892-1404
www.steeldoor.org
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
110 - 09

Standard Steel Doors

and Frames
for
Modular Masonry Construction

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2009 Steel Door Institute
SDI 110-09

Standard Steel Doors and Frames

for Modular Masonry Construction

The Module

Definition:
The size of any individual part, taken as a unit of measure for regular proportion. A basic unit of measure adopted
by the Building Industry as 4 inches.

Concept:
The use of a standard modular dimension common to building products such as masonry improves finished
structure by the following:
• Increased accuracy, legibility, and simplicity of working drawings and contract documents.
• Added aesthetic flexibility induced by small unit standardization, allowing freedom of architectural design.
Modular masonry construction meets the architectural need for blending and continuity of components.
Non-modular units interrupt a geometric pattern, or flow, by virtue of the discontinuity of line. As a specific
case, the use of a butted frame (Modular) is extremely important in stack bonded masonry unit construc-
tion. Any interruptions, such as cut units, unit lintels, wrap-arounds, etc, destroy the strong linear function
of such details.
• Increased flexibility of finished structure through lower modification, addition, and renovation costs.
• Reduced overall material and labor costs by facilitating the use of standard practices and definable operat-
ing procedures.
• Interchangeability of materials is facilitated by the ability to substitute modular components.
• Estimating and takeoff simplified.
• Detailing and drawing coordination between trades and specialties simplified by small size standard grid.

Dimensions:
Concrete masonry units (CMU) have been standardized to an 8" high and 16" long module. Also available are
“half blocks” standardized to a 4" high and 16" long module commonly used as a “starter course” shown on
page 4. The availability of loose “TEE” or wire masonry anchors can be an advantage over “fixed” masonry
anchors since they field adjust to masonry joints.
Modular bricks have been standardized to a 2 2/3" high and 8" long module, therefore 6 bricks correspond to the
modular size of CMU. This relationship is clearly shown on pages 3 and 4.
Adjustments have been made in actual sizes to allow for common size mortar joints

2
 SDI 110-09

Wrap Around Frame

6' 8" Door or 8' 0" Door

CL Joint CL Joint
/PUF
5IF
NBTPOSZ
PQFOJOH
GPS
BO
w

NPEVMBS
EJNFOTJPO
PQFOJOH
BOE
EPPS

PQFOJOH
IFJHIU
SFRVJSFT

DPVSTFT
PG

CMPDL
PS

DPVSTFT
PG
CSJDL Modular Modular Modular
Dimension Opening “X” Dimension

"WBJMBCMF
JO

 "$ ,1
.PEVMBS
4UBOEBSE

0QFOJOH
GPS %PPS

i9w 8JEUI

4JOHMF
4XJOH

w 
w

w 
w

w 
w
!
Opening & Door Opening Height 6' 8"

w 
w
%PVCMF
4XJOH

w 
w
Modular Dimension


w 
w "


w 
w

w 
w

w 
w

w 
w

w 
w

.BZ
7BSZ


5ISPBU
PQFOJOH

CMPDL

XJEUI
ow
w

Throat &INISH &LOOR 'RID

Opening **
#, Joint #, Joint
3 ", 5 "
7 ", 11 " 2"* Modular Masonry
2"*
Opening “X”
$ETAIL ,INTEL
AS REQUIRED
7 ", 11 "
Opening **

3 ", 5 "

6ARIES
Throat

$ ,1"
2"*

6ARIES #, *OINT
/PENING
-ODULAR

$ ,1" $ ,1"
Notch masonry for
hardware provisions
if required.

3%#4)/. n ! 3%#4)/. n "

3
SDI 110-09

Wrap Around Frame

7' 0" Door

CL Joint CL Joint

Modular Modular Modular

Dimension Opening “X” Dimension

"WBJMBCMF
JO

 "$ ,1
.PEVMBS
4UBOEBSE

0QFOJOH
GPS %PPS

i9w 8JEUI

4JOHMF
4XJOH

w 
w

w 
w

w 
w !
Opening & Door Opening Height 7' 0"

w 
w
%PVCMF
4XJOH

w 
w
"
Modular Dimension


w 
w

w 
w

w 
w

w 
w

w 
w

w 
w

.BZ
7BSZ


5ISPBU
PQFOJOH

CMPDL

XJEUI
ow
w

Throat  3TARTER #OURSE &INISH &LOOR 'RID

Opening **
#, Joint #, Joint
3 ", 5 "
7 ", 11 " 2"* Modular Masonry
2"*
Opening “X”
$ETAIL ,INTEL
AS REQUIRED
7 ", 11 "
Opening **

3 ", 5 "

6ARIES
Throat

$ ,1"
2"*

6ARIES #, *OINT
/PENING
-ODULAR

$ ,1" $ ,1"
Notch masonry for
hardware provisions
if required.

3%#4)/. n ! 3%#4)/. n "

4
 SDI 110-09

Butt Type Frame

7' 2" and 7' 10" Doors or 7' 0" Door (X) 4" Header

CL Joint CL Joint

Modular Modular Modular

Dimension Opening “X” Dimension

"WBJMBCMF
JO
.PEVMBS
4UBOEBSE

0QFOJOH
GPS %PPS

i9w 8JEUI

-ASONRY /PENING -ODULAR $IMENSION g  AND g 

4JOHMF
4XJOH
!g 
w 
w !
-ASONRY /PENING -ODULAR $IMENSION g 


w 
w

$OOR /PENING (EIGHT g  AND g 


w 
w
%PVCMF
4XJOH
$OOR /PENING (EIGHT g 


w 
w

w 
w
" "

&INISH &LOOR 'RID

-ODULAR -ASONRY
#, *OINT #, *OINT
3 ", 5 " /PENING h8v
7 ", 11 "  
$ ,1 $ ,1
$ ,1 3EC !h

Block
$ ,1 3EC !

$ETAIL ,INTEL
AS REQUIRED
7 ", 11 "
3 ", 5 "

6ARIES

#, *OINT



-ODULAR /PENING

6ARIES
g AND g 
g 

3INGLE 2ABBETED &RAME !CCEPTABLE

3%#4)/. n ! 3%#4)/. n "

5
 MEMBERS OF THE
AVAILABLE PUBLICATIONS STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE
AMWELD INTERNATIONAL, LLC
301 South Northpoint Drive, Suite 400
Specifications
Coppell, TX 75019
ANSI/SDI A250.6 Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcings on Standard (888) 775-2397
Steel Doors and Frames www.amweld.com
ANSI/SDI A250.8 SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors & CECO DOOR PRODUCTS
Frames 9159 Telecom Drive
SDI-108 Recommended Selection & Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors Milan, TN 38358
(731) 686-8345
SDI-109 Hardware for Standard Steel Doors & Frames www.cecodoor.com
SDI-118 Basic Fire Door Requirements CURRIES COMPANY
SDI-128 Guidelines for Acoustical Performance of Standard Steel Doors & P.O. Box 1648
Frames Mason City, IA 50402-1648
(641) 423-1334
SDI-129 Hinge & Strike Spacing www.curries.com

Test Procedures DEANSTEEL MANUFACTURING CO.

111 Merchant Street
ANSI/SDI A250.3 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish San Antonio, TX 78204-1496
Coatings for Steel Doors & Frames (210) 226-8271
ANSI/SDI A250.4 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for www.deansteel.com
Steel Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors & Hardware Reinforcings DOOR COMPONENTS INC.
ANSI/SDI A250.10 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel 7980 Redwood Avenue
Fontana, CA 92336-1638
Surfaces for Steel Doors & Frames
(909) 770-5700
ANSI/SDI A250.13 Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components www.doorcomponents.com
for Swinging Door Assemblies
MESKER DOOR, INC.
SDI-113 Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal 3440 Stanwood Boulevard
Transmittance of Steel Door & Frame Assemblies Huntsville, AL 35811-9021
(256) 851-6670
SDI-131 Accelerated Physical Endurance Test Procedure for Steel Doors, www.meskerdoor.com
Frames and Frame Anchors
METAL PRODUCTS, INC.
Construction Details 319 North Hills Road
Corbin, KY 40701
ANSI/SDI A250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames (606) 523-0173
SDI-110 Standard Steel Doors & Frames for Modular Masonry Construction www.metalproductsinc.com
SDI-111 Recommended Details for Standard Details Steel Doors, Frames, PIONEER INDUSTRIES, INC.
Accessories and Related Components 171 South Newman Street
Hackensack, NJ 07601
SDI-122 Installation & Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors &
(201) 933-1900
Frames www.pioneerindustries.com
SDI Drywall Slip-On Frames
REPUBLIC
155 Republic Drive
Miscellaneous Documents McKenzie, TN 38201-0580
ANSI/SDI A250.7 Nomenclature for Standard Steel Doors & Steel Frames (731) 352-3383
www.republicdoor.com
SDI-106 Recommended Standard Door Type Nomenclature
SDI-112 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors & SECURITY METAL PRODUCTS CORP.
5700 Hannum Avenue, Suite 250
Frames
Culver City, CA 90230
SDI-117 Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors & Frames (310) 641-6690
www.secmet.com
SDI-124 Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors & Frames
SDI-127 Industry Alert Series (A-L) STEELCRAFT
Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies
SDI-130 Electrified Hinge Preparations 9017 Blue Ash Road
SDI What is The SDI? Cincinnati, OH 45242
(513) 745-6400
AUDIO-VISUAL PROGRAMS ON VHS ALSO AVAILABLE www.steelcraft.com

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
440.899.0010 • FAX 440.892.1404
11/9/2009 www.steeldoor.org
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
111-09

Recommended Details for

Standard Steel Doors,
Frames, Accessories
and Related Components

The information that follows represents the Standard Steel Door and Frame
Industry's considered views on a number of details normally encountered in
building plans and specifications.
The Steel Door Institute recommends that they be followed except when very
unusual details necessitate special drawings. The enclosed may be used as a
reference document or added directly to the job drawings.

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2009 Steel Door Institute
SDI 111-2009
Recommended Selection and Usage Guide
for Standard Steel Doors, Frames and Accessories

Table of Contents:
111-A Recommended Standard Steel Door Frame Details
111-B Recommended Standard Details for Dutch Doors
111-C Recommended Louver Details for Standard Steel Doors
111-D Recommended Door, Frame and Hardware Schedule for Standard Steel
Doors and Frames
111-E Recommended Guidelines for the Use of Gasketing and Thresholds for
Standard Steel Doors and Frames
111-F Recommended Existing Wall Anchors for Standard Steel Doors and Frames
111-G Recommended Standard Preparation for Double Type (Interconnected)
Locks on Standard Steel Doors and Frames
111-H High Frequency Hinge Preparations for Frames

Definition of “STANDARD”
We call our products Standard for three reasons:
FIRST, because our products are made to conform to published standards and
established dimensions.
SECOND, our products are manufactured to meet established performance
requirements.
THIRD, the fabrication of our products is controlled by standard manufacturing
procedures which ensure uniform high quality.
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
111-A

Recommended
Standard Steel Door
Frame Details

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2008 Steel Door Institute
SDI 111-A

Hardware Locations

Door Opening Width

Up to 11 ¾"
(298.4 mm)

Center-Line
Equal Deadlock Strike

Door Opening
Height

48"
Equal (1219 mm)

38 - 42"
(965 - 1067 mm)

Up to 13"
(330.2 mm)

Center-Line Hinges Center-Line Lock Strike

& Panic Exit Device Strike

Note: Center Hinge Omitted on 6' 8" (2032mm), 1 ⅜" (34.5mm) Doors, Unless Specified.

Handing Chart

Inside Inside
KS KS KS KS
R.H. Outside L.H. L.H. Outside R.H.
ACTIVE ACTIVE
LHRB RHRB
RHRB Inside LHRB Inside
ACTIVE ACTIVE

Outside Outside
KS KS KS KS
KS indicates keyed side of lockset.

2
 SDI 111-A

Standard Frame Details

Standard Profiles
2"
(50.8mm) Backbend Rabbet
Minimum 1/4" (6.3mm) Face
5/8" (15.8mm) min. Stop
Maximum 3/4" (19.0mm) Backbend
Return

Dimension
"A" Throat Jamb Single
Opening Depth Hardware
Throat Rabbet Throat Jamb
Jamb Rabbet
Opening Double Opening Depth
Depth
Rabbet
Stop May
Cased Soffit be applied
Opening
Minimum 1/4" (6.3mm)
Maximum 3/4" (19.0mm) Double Rabbet Single Rabbet Slip-On Drywall Double Egress
Door Thk. Dim. "A"
1-⅜" (34.9mm) 1-9⁄16" (39.6mm)
1-¾" (44.4mm) 1-15⁄16" (49.2mm)

Drywall
Corners

1" Gypsum Core 1-⅝" Steel or Wood

with ⅝" Gypsum Stud with ½ or ⅝"
Knocked Down Board with ½" or ⅝" Gypsum Board
Knocked Down (Butted) (Mitered) Gypsum Board
May be Horizontal or Vertical
Set Up Arc Welded
and Ground Smooth

2-½" or 3-⅝" Steel Stud

Slip-on Drywall (frame is 2-½" or 3-⅝" Steel or
with Two Layers of ⅝"
installed after the wall has Wood Stud with ½" or
Set Up Spot Welded Gypsum Board Each Side
been erected). Corner may ⅝" Gypsum Board
Mitered and Welded be screwed together, snap
Inside or Outside locked, or a slip fit design.

Common Wall Conditions

2" Solid Plaster with ½"

Gypsum Board Core

3" (78.2 mm) Precast

Stucco — 2 x 4 Wood Gypsum Tile with ⅝"
Butted Masonry, Brick 4" Block and Brick Stud with ¾" Gypsum
Tile or Concrete Block (15.8 mm) Plaster
Combination Board & Plaster

Butted Masonry, Tile or

Concrete Block

2 x 4 Wood Stud with ¾"

4" Block with ½" Plaster 2 x 4 Wood Stud with ¾" Plaster on Metal Lath 2" Corner Tile and 4"
Plaster on Metal Lath Block Combination
Existing Masonry or Concrete

3
SDI 111-A

Special Frame Construction Details and Typical Hardware Preparations

Anchor Details

Masonry Wire Anchor Masonry Tee Anchor Wood Stud Anchor Steel Stud Anchor Existing wall Anchor

Adjustable base Anchor Standard base Anchor Typical Mullion Sections Plaster Partition Anchor
with base Anchor (Ceiling Strut Optional)

Special
Frame Details Hardware Preparations

Surface Hardware Reinforcement.

weld-in Reinforcement Shown,
Loose Reinforcing Sleeve Available
Hospital Stop Rubber Silencers mortise Hinge Strike for Field Installation.

For more information on steel doors and frames, contact any of the following members of the Steel Door Institute:
AmwELD INTERNATIONAL, LLC DEANSTEEL mANUFACTURINg CO. mETAL PRODUCTS, INC. SECURITy mETAL PRODUCTS CORP.
301 South Northpoint Drive, Suite 400 111 Merchant Street 319 North Hills Road 5700 Hannum Avenue, Suite 250
Coppell, TX 75019 San Antonio, TX 78204-1496 Corbin, KY 40701 Culver City, CA 90230
(888) 775-2397 (210) 226-8271 (606) 523-0173 (310) 641-6690
www.amweld.com www.deansteel.com www.metalproductsinc.com www.secmet.com

CECO DOOR PRODUCTS DOOR COmPONENTS INC. PIONEER INDUSTRIES, INC. STEELCRAFT
9159 Telecom Drive 7980 Redwood Avenue 171 South Newman Street Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies
Milan, TN 38358 Fontana, CA 92336-1638 Hackensack, NJ 07601 9017 Blue Ash Road
(731) 686-8345 (909) 770-5700 (201) 933-1900 Cincinnati, OH 45242
www.cecodoor.com www.doorcomponents.com www.pioneerindustries.com (513) 745-6400
www.steelcraft.com
CURRIES COmPANy mESkER DOOR, INC. REPUbLIC
P.O. Box 1648 3440 Stanwood Boulevard 155 Republic Drive
Mason City, IA 50402-1648 Huntsville, AL 35811-9021 McKenzie, TN 38201-0580
(641) 423-1334 (256) 851-6670 (731) 352-3383
www.curries.com www.meskerdoor.com www.republicdoor.com

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
440.899.0010 • FAX 440.892.1404 • www.steeldoor.org

4
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
111-B
Recommended
Standard Details for Dutch Doors
“A”

6'-8" (2032mm), 7'-0" (2134mm), 7'-2" (2184mm),

Steel door Steel door frame

Mortise or 7'-10" (2388mm) & 8'-0" (2438mm)

surface dutch 1 ¾" (44mm)
door bolt Steel door

Steel Shelf
(optional)
L Strike
C

(254mm)
10" Max.
39" Min.
*(991mm)

Lock set
28 ½" Min.
(724mm)

Optional steel
shelf – Fasten
*Location is generally 40˝
but may vary as indicated
w/ S.M.S. in field
by specifier to suit local
*

accessibility codes.

Steel bracket
“A” 39" Min.
*(991mm)
ELEVATION Shelf may be
field installed
NON-FIRE RATED either side

Finished
floor
5 ½" Max. 5 ½" Max.
(140mm) (140mm)

¾" Max.
PLAN (19mm)
SECTION “A” - “A”

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2008 Steel Door Institute
 SDI 111-B

Top door latches

into top of bottom door

Flat astragal Flat astragal

Single point
Shelf latches Shelf
(optional) (optional)

Bottom door latches

into frame strike jamb

ELEVATION ELEVATION
FIRE RATED FIRE RATED

For more information on steel doors and frames, contact any of the following members of the Steel Door Institute

AmwELD INTERNATIONAL, LLC DEANSTEEL mANUFACTURINg CO. mETAL PRODUCTS, INC. SECURITy mETAL PRODUCTS CORP.
301 South Northpoint Drive, Suite 400 111 Merchant Street 319 North Hills Road 5700 Hannum Avenue, Suite 250
Coppell, TX 75019 San Antonio, TX 78204-1496 Corbin, KY 40701 Culver City, CA 90230
(888) 775-2397 (210) 226-8271 (606) 523-0173 (310) 641-6690
www.amweld.com www.deansteel.com www.metalproductsinc.com www.secmet.com

CECO DOOR PRODUCTS DOOR COmPONENTS INC. PIONEER INDUSTRIES, INC. STEELCRAFT
9159 Telecom Drive 7980 Redwood Avenue 171 South Newman Street Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies
Milan, TN 38358 Fontana, CA 92336-1638 Hackensack, NJ 07601 9017 Blue Ash Road
(731) 686-8345 (909) 770-5700 (201) 933-1900 Cincinnati, OH 45242
www.cecodoor.com www.doorcomponents.com www.pioneerindustries.com (513) 745-6400
www.steelcraft.com
CURRIES COmPANy mESkER DOOR, INC. REPUbLIC
P.O. Box 1648 3440 Stanwood Boulevard 155 Republic Drive
Mason City, IA 50402-1648 Huntsville, AL 35811-9021 McKenzie, TN 38201-0580
(641) 423-1334 (256) 851-6670 (731) 352-3383
www.curries.com www.meskerdoor.com www.republicdoor.com

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
440/899-0010 • FAX 440/892-1404
www.steeldoor.org
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
111-C

Recommended
Louver Details
for
Standard Steel Doors

Standard steel doors can be provided with a variety of louver designs and
sizes. This publication contains explanations and details of louver designs
that are most commonly available within the standard door industry.
When specified, doors shall be provided with louvers at the bottom and/or top.
The choice of which to use must be determined by the architect on aesthetic,
functional, and economic grounds.

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD - CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2008 Steel Door Institute
SDI 111-C

Recommended Louver Details

for Standard Steel Doors

Function – Louvers permit free air passage, controlling Fusible link louvers are used in fire doors where flames
the volume by their size or design. They diffuse or control and intense heat passage must be controlled. The link
direction of air flow by blade design. release temperature recommended is 135°F (57°C). These
louvers must be labeled and may not exceed 24˝ x 24˝.
Insert louvers – Louvers commonly used in standard steel
Fusible link louvers are allowed only at the bottom of fire
doors are of the “insert” type designed to be mounted into
doors. Since closing is heat activated, these louvers are
a cutout in the door and an overlapping frame. Inverted
not to be used on smoke control doors.
“V” blade, “Z” blade, inverted “Y” or chevron-type blade,
lightproof, adjustable blade, grille type, and fusible link Pierced louvers, available from some steel door manufac-
self-closing fire door types are available in a wide range of turers, offer a flush condition and may be furnished with
sizes. Also available from some steel door manufacturers is internal insect screens. Louvers are formed by embossing
a pierced louver design. Insert louvers intended for exterior the door face sheets.
doors or other doors where security is a consideration
Louver size determinations – As a guide, the following
should have fasteners or materials specified accordingly.
approximate percentages of louver size may be used to
Note: If a louver door is required to provide security, the determine the free area in a given size louver:
steel door manufacturer should be consulted. • Pierced louver 20%
Bird or insect screens are available with many of the stan- • Inverted “V” inserted louver 50 – 60%
dard design louvers. Where specified, consult steel door • Inverted “Y” (chevron) inserted louver 40 – 60%
manufacturer for availability. • “Z” type inserted louver 40 – 45%
• Adjustable inserted louver 40 – 50%
Weatherproof louvers – True weatherproof designs do • Lightproof inserted louver 20%
not exist. Some louvers are manufactured to provide a • Fusible link inserted louver 45%
certain degree of rain protection.
The above percentages assume there is no air pressure
Louver construction – Standard louver frames are a mini- drop from one side of the door to the other. On air condition
mum 20 gauge steel with louver blades of a minimum 24 grilles an air pressure drop is normal. An average 70% of
gauge steel. The louver blades can be welded or tenoned the grille size can be used in computing free area on doors
to the frame and the entire assembly is generally fastened with air condition grilles.
to the door with moldings. Generally, one molding will be
The percentages noted above are approximates. Consult
an integral part of the louver, while the other molding will
the individual manufacturer’s literature for the specific sizes
be detachable. When louvers are installed, the detachable
and ratings normal to their program.
moldings should be located on the room or non-security
side of the door. Where doors are manufactured as non- Coordination – A combination of glass lites and louvers is
handed, louvers may require reversing during door instal- common in steel door work. Care should be taken to avoid
lation to suit actual handing. specifying too long a narrow lite when a louver or grille oc-
curs in the bottom of the same unit. In addition, handicap
Application:
codes may dictate the location of the louver relative to the
Inverted “V” or “Z” blade types allow maximum free air bottom of the door.
flow with minimum static pressure differential.
Full louver doors – A minimum 5˝ (127.0mm) rail occurs
Inverted “Y” or chevron blade types, while offering less at the top and at the vertical stiles and an 8˝ (203.2mm)
free air flow, offer a higher strength factor for schools and minimum rail occurs at the bottom of these doors (Consult
other areas where vandalism or hard usage may occur. door manufacturer for exact stile/rail dimensions). Stile and
top rail sizes must be coordinated with closer dimensions,
Lightproof louvers are used where light transmission must
lock preparations, and lever handles. Pierced louvers are
be avoided, but provide minimal free air flow.
not available on full louvered doors.
Adjustable blade louvers are used where air flow is varied
Finish – The finish is to be prime painted, except when the
in velocity and control of flow is needed.
louver is used in a factory prefinished door, in which case
Grille type louvers are normally associated with air condi- the louver will be finish painted with a color to match the
tioning, where air must be diffused in random flow, avoiding door. For exterior doors, zinc coated louvers are available
higher velocity air flow patterns. where specified.
 SDI 111-C

Cross Section Details

Operating
lever

Inverted “V” Blade Inverted “Y” Blade Chevron or Hood-Type Fusible Link
Blade

Insect screen
(optional)

Grille Pierced “Z” Blade Lightproof

 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
111-D
Recommended
Door, Frame and
Hardware Schedule for
Standard Steel
Doors and Frames
The purpose of this publication is to establish a guide for architects and those responsible for scheduling doors,
frames, and hardware requirements.
Although primarily designed for steel doors and frames, this suggested schedule is flexible enough to list total
door and frame requirements of a complete job.
Items not specifically covered in the schedule may be listed in the “Remarks” and extra columns near the end.
Typical handing of doors and hardware is to be based on the format below:

Handing Chart

Inside Inside
KS KS KS KS
R.H. Outside L.H. L.H. Outside R.H.
ACTIVE ACTIVE
LHRB RHRB
RHRB Inside LHRB Inside
ACTIVE ACTIVE

Outside Outside
KS KS KS KS
KS indicates keyed side of lockset.

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD - CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2008 Steel Door Institute
SDI 111-D

Door, Frame and Hardware Schedule

LOCATION FRAMES DOORS HARDWARE

DETAILS DOOR OPENING REMARKS

(3) (7)
(2)
HEAD JAMB SILL WIDTH HEIGHT

ITEM NO.
ARCH. NO
FROM
TO
QTY.
HAND
LABEL (1)
GAUGE (4)
ELEV. (6)
DEPTH
ANCHOR/
WALL TYPE
GAUGE (4)
TYPE (5)
HDWE.
GROUP NO.
HINGES
LOCK
CLOSER

General Notes:
(1) If a fire door is required, it is to be designated in the “Label” column of schedule with appropriate hourly rating. Also, note in the “Remarks” column whether
door is to have an Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL) Factory Mutual (FM), or Warnock Hersey (WHI) label.
(2) Thresholds, when required, are to be noted in “Hardware” column of schedule.
(3) Any special item not listed in schedule for doors, frames, or hardware is to be shown in the “Remarks” column.
(4) Indicate gauge of material for steel. When materials other than steel are used, indicate AL for aluminum or WD for wood.
(5) Refer to SDI-106 for Recommended Standard Door Design Nomenclature.
(6) When frame elevations are indicated, supplemental drawings must be attached.
(7) Doors provided with 3/4" undercut unless otherwise specified.
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
111-E
Recommended
Guidelines for the Use of
Gasketing and Thresholds
for Standard Steel
Doors and Frames
The following details represent the recommendation of The Steel Door Institute in this important corollary
area. This document should in no way be considered an endorsement of any manufacturer nor does it imply
that any materials not shown should be considered inferior weatherstripping.
The criteria employed in the selection of these details included:
1. The experience of the Institute with the details shown.
2. The adaptability of the material shown to standard steel doors and frames.
3. The ability to maintain gasketing at the door and frame during periods of
normal thermal movement to the balance of the building structure.
4. The availability of the material from normal commercial sources.
5. Ease of maintenance.

Disclaimer/Source Reference
Since the members of the STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE do not manufacture gasketing, it is strongly suggest
that the BHMA Members’ catalogs and BHMA documents be consulted to establish “fit and function” criteria
for specifying of any gasketing. BHMA Documents are available from:
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
355 Lexington Avenue, 15th Floor
New York, NY 10017
Phone: (212) 297-2122
Fax: (212) 370-9047
www.buildershardware.com

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD - CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2009 Steel Door Institute
SDI 111-E

Recommended Guidelines for the

Use of Gasketing and Threholds
for Standard Steel Doors and Frames

General
Gasketing and thresholds are used to control the flow of air, smoke, heat or cold, water, sound or other environ-
mental factors through the door opening. The location or intended use of the door assembly, the environment to
which it is exposed, and the performance expected will dictate the selection of gasketing and threshold products.
The variety of materials, their composition, profiles, and performance are virtually limitless. These are described
in ANSI/BHMA A156.21 or A156.22. Generally, gasket materials are sponge neoprene, rubber, vinyl, brushes, or
magnets. Retainers are generally steel, aluminum, brass, bronze, vinyl, or other non-ferrous materials. Informa-
tion in catalogs published by BHMA members aid in the selection of perimeter sealing “ systems” to meet the
applicable performance criteria of the door assembly.

Perimeter Seals
Sealing of gaps between door edges and the header or jambs generally has the greatest effect on performance
of the door opening. The available options are as varied as their applications and their mounting surfaces e.g.
steel, structural steel, or wood. Care should be taken to select materials that will assure performance under
specific job requirements as well as meeting the mounting surface criteria.

brush

HEAD & Gasketing products should never impede the opera-

LATCH SIDE
tion, opening or closing of the door assembly. Simple
contact is all that is required for some products. Other
JAMB DOOR products for more severe installations require a slight
compression. A simple test for gasket compression
may be conducted by inserting a sheet of letterhead
paper into the gap and closing the door. The paper
JAMB DOOR should be held in place by the gasketing.
Gasketing or weather-stripping, of any kind, should be
furnished and installed in accordance with manufactur-
HINGE SIDE
ers instructions.
 SDI 111-E

Door Bottom Seals

In most instances, sealing of gaps between the bottom of doors and flooring or thresholds is accomplished with
door bottoms or overlapping strips in metal retainers. These may be of a design that extends beyond the bottom
of the door mechanically, or of a fixed protruding or overlapping design.
Door bottom gaskets must compress against a solid object to affect a proper seal. Carpeting by its pliant nature
does not provide a proper seal.

brush

Automatic Door Bottom

Astragal Seals
Sealing of door edges at meeting stiles, in lieu of or in addition to factory mounted astragals is accomplished
by supplemental gasketing. This gasketing may be closely abutting fixed members or by overlapping strips in
metal retainers.
Overlapping gasketing is normally used to avoid interference with edge mounted hardware such as locksets
or flush bolts. Closely abutting gasketing is commonly used where both doors must operate simultaneously or
independently as in egress doors.

brush

Thresholds
Thresholds may be used in addition to or in lieu of door bottom seals. They may incorporate gaskets or other
formed profiles to allow for exit device latching or may be prepared for flush bolt latching. Thresholds should be
provided under the door and between the frame to allow for a smooth transition between floor coverings of dif-
ferent heights or materials. Special consideration should be given to threshold designs used in means of egress
or in handicap accessible situations. The latter limitations are covered in ANSI/ICC A117.1.

bumper insert available

*

* bumper insert available

SDI 111-E

Fire Door Considerations

When supplying products to be used on fire rated openings, care should be taken to maintain the proper
clearances around the perimeter of the door assembly in accordance with NFPA 80. Gasketing materials
must be investigated or “Listed” to determine that their installation does not adversely affect the fire resis-
tance performance of the assembly. For example, the performance of gasketing is observed during the fire
test to ensure that flaming does not occur on the exposed surface of door assemblies. It is important to
note, however, that the ANSI/UL 10B, ANSI/UL 10C and ANSI/NFPA 252 standard fire tests do not include
evaluation of the door assembly relative to preventing the passing of smoke or other products of combus-
tion through or around the assembly. Openings that require a smoke seal must be tested in accordance
with NFPA 105, UL 1784 or UBC 7-2 Part 11, 1997. In fire door applications it is VITAL that gasketing does
not inhibit the ability of the door assembly to close and latch.

Performance Testing Criteria

Gasketing products are covered under ANSI/BHMA A156.22.
Included in that standard are:
• Closing Force test
• Heat Test
• Cold Test
• Air Infiltration Test
Thresholds are covered under ANSI/BHMA A156.21.
Included in that standard are:
• Weight bearing test

For more information on steel doors and frames, contact any of the following members of the Steel Door Institute

AmwELD INTERNATIONAL, LLC DEANSTEEL mANUFACTURINg CO. mETAL PRODUCTS, INC. SECURITy mETAL PRODUCTS CORP.
301 South Northpoint Drive, Suite 400 111 Merchant Street 319 North Hills Road 5700 Hannum Avenue, Suite 250
Coppell, TX 75019 San Antonio, TX 78204-1496 Corbin, KY 40701 Culver City, CA 90230
(888) 775-2397 (210) 226-8271 (606) 523-0173 (310) 641-6690
www.amweld.com www.deansteel.com www.metalproductsinc.com www.secmet.com

CECO DOOR PRODUCTS DOOR COmPONENTS INC. PIONEER INDUSTRIES, INC. STEELCRAFT
9159 Telecom Drive 7980 Redwood Avenue 171 South Newman Street Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies
Milan, TN 38358 Fontana, CA 92336-1638 Hackensack, NJ 07601 9017 Blue Ash Road
(731) 686-8345 (909) 770-5700 (201) 933-1900 Cincinnati, OH 45242
www.cecodoor.com www.doorcomponents.com www.pioneerindustries.com (513) 745-6400
www.steelcraft.com
CURRIES COmPANy mESkER DOOR, INC. REPUbLIC
P.O. Box 1648 3440 Stanwood Boulevard 155 Republic Drive
Mason City, IA 50402-1648 Huntsville, AL 35811-9021 McKenzie, TN 38201-0580
(641) 423-1334 (256) 851-6670 (731) 352-3383
www.curries.com www.meskerdoor.com www.republicdoor.com

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145-1967
440.899.0010 • FAX 440.892.1404
www.steeldoor.org
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
111-F

Recommended
Existing Wall Anchors
for
Standard Steel Doors
and Frames

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD - CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2008 Steel Door Institute
SDI 111-F

Recommended Existing Wall Anchors

for Standard Steel Doors and Frames

This standard is a guide for architects to help them

recognize available options to the traditional sub
buck detail widely used in the past. The anchoring
systems shown are available in regular and labeled
frames.
NOTE A
The details shown are typical of those employed
Drill and form
by members of the Steel Door Institute, but all of countersink at
the details are not made by all of the members of center of frame
the Institute. A general reference to this document soffit for ¼˝ x 4 ¾˝
in your specifications should result in all of the FHMS or RHMS*
members of the SDI and most of the non-members
being able to bid on the job without a multitude of
exceptions.
In order to make the installation successful, care-
ful consideration shall be given to all tolerances
involved and that sufficient clearance is figured to
allow for them.
It has been “customary” to allow ¼˝ clearance
around the frame perimeter when establishing
rough opening sizes or when figuring non-standard Adjustable Anchor
overall frame sizes. Although this dimensional re-
quirement does not appear in Industry publications,
it is based on the following:
NOTE B
• Both SDI 117-00 and ANSI/NAAMM HMMA Either bolt type
861-00 recognize a + tolerance in opening is available for
width and height. all anchors.

• Both of these documents recognize a ± toler-

ance in frame face dimensions.
• Both ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 861-00 and
SDI 117-00 recognize a ± installation tolerance
See note “A”
for vertical plumb.
Frames will “fit and function” if made to these dimen-
sional tolerances and installed within tolerances.
There is, however, relatively no assurance that the
substrate (walls) will be of suitable size or align-
ment.
We therefore recommend that the rough openings
for these cases be no less than 3⁄16˝ larger on all 3
sides than the “intended” overall frame size. (Exam-
ple: 3070 standard frame = 3´-4 ⅜˝ x 7´-2 3⁄16˝). The
installer carries the responsibility for shimming and
aligning as necessary. Gaps are normally sealed as Lock-in "A" Anchor
part of the installation or caulking/painting process.
Architectural Specifications are to be consulted to
determine the appropriate sealant material to be
used at fire door or smoke control frames.
 Weld to frame return SDI 111-F

See note “A”

Weld to frame return

See note “A”

Hat Anchor

Pipe Anchor

Hole plug
Lock-in "B" Anchor
Weld to frame soffit

See note “A”

NOTE C
The head of the bolt may be filled in field
with appropriate filler.

NOTE D
Up to 7´6˝ (2286 mm) height minimum
four (4) anchor required per jamb

* Fire rated frames require ⅜˝ (9.5 mm)

diameter bolts. Steel expansion shields
must be used instead of lead shields.

"C" Anchor
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
111-G
Recommended
Standard Preparation for
Double Type (Interconnected) Locks on
Standard Steel Doors and Frames
1" (25.4mm)
Sq. or Dia.
Clear Hole #8-32 Tap CL Door
2 ⅛" Dia.
(53.9mm) CL Door 2 Holes
5⁄32"
(3.9mm)

2 ⅛"
Lock 1 ⅝" (53.9mm)
CL (41.2mm) CL 1" 1 ⅜"
Strike (25.4mm) (34.9mm)
2 ¼" 2 ¾"
(57.1mm) (69.8mm)
Recommended Dimension

5⁄16"
(23.8mm) 1 ⅛" 5⁄16"
5 ½" (139.7mm)

(28.5mm) (23.8mm)
2 ¾" Backset 1" 1 ⅜" Door
(69.8mm) (25.4mm) (34.9mm)
2 ⅛" Dia. 1 ⅛" 1 ¾" Door
(53.9mm) (28.5mm) (44.4mm) ⅝" 1 ⅛"
(28.5mm)
(15.8mm)

2 ⅛"
Lock 1 ⅝" (53.9mm)
CL (41.2mm) 1 ⅜"
CL (34.9mm) 1" 1 ⅜"
Strike (25.4mm) (34.9mm)
2 ¼" 2 ¾"
40 5⁄16" (57.1mm) (69.8mm)
(1023.9mm)
Above Floor
5⁄32" CL Door 5⁄16"
(3.9mm) (23.8mm)
CL Door
5⁄16"
(23.8mm)
1" (25.4mm)
Sq. or Dia. #8-32 Tap
Clear Hole 2 Holes
DOOR FACE DOOR EDGE FRAME RABBET
Note: Minimum size of cutout as noted is subject to manufacturer’s standard clearance tolerances.

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD - CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2008 Steel Door Institute
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
111-H
High Frequency Hinge Preparations for Frames
Door Door
frame frame

Weld (3) places

as shown
16 gage min.
auxiliary
reinforcement

Hinge
Reinforcement Weld (3) places
as shown

12 gage min.
auxiliary
reinforcement

Hinge
Reinforcement

Example “A”* Example “B”*

Background:
There are occasions where steel frames used in extremely high frequency or high use areas need to be supplied with
additional reinforcing to eliminate potential door sag. These types of openings would include: main entrances to schools,
rear exits where severe wind abuse could be a factor, auditoriums, gymnasiums, and the like. When these types of in-
stallations are required, there is a method in which this can be handled, efficiently and economically, through providing
auxiliary reinforcing to standard door frames. The specification for this is as follows:
Specification:
When a high frequency preparation is required, the top hinge of the door frame shall be provided with an auxiliary rein-
forcement as shown in example ‘A’ or ‘B.’ For additional strength, the center and bottom hinge reinforcement may also be
provided with additional reinforcements.

* High frequency hinge preparations may vary between manufacturers.

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD - CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2008 Steel Door Institute
 mEmbERS OF THE
AVAILAbLE PUbLICATIONS STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE
AmwELD INTERNATIONAL, LLC
301 South Northpoint Drive, Suite 400
Specifications
Coppell, TX 75019
ANSI/SDI A250.6 Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcings on Standard (888) 775-2397
Steel Doors and Frames www.amweld.com
ANSI/SDI A250.8 SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors & CECO DOOR PRODUCTS
Frames 9159 Telecom Drive
SDI-108 Recommended Selection & Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors Milan, TN 38358
(731) 686-8345
SDI-109 Hardware for Standard Steel Doors & Frames www.cecodoor.com
SDI-118 Basic Fire Door Requirements CURRIES COmPANy
SDI-128 Guidelines for Acoustical Performance of Standard Steel Doors & P.O. Box 1648
Frames Mason City, IA 50402-1648
(641) 423-1334
SDI-129 Hinge & Strike Spacing www.curries.com

Test Procedures DEANSTEEL mANUFACTURINg CO.

111 Merchant Street
ANSI/SDI A250.3 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish San Antonio, TX 78204-1496
Coatings for Steel Doors & Frames (210) 226-8271
ANSI/SDI A250.4 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for www.deansteel.com
Steel Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors & Hardware Reinforcings DOOR COmPONENTS INC.
ANSI/SDI A250.10 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel 7980 Redwood Avenue
Fontana, CA 92336-1638
Surfaces for Steel Doors & Frames
(909) 770-5700
ANSI/SDI A250.13 Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components www.doorcomponents.com
for Swinging Door Assemblies
mESkER DOOR, INC.
SDI-113 Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal 3440 Stanwood Boulevard
Transmittance of Steel Door & Frame Assemblies Huntsville, AL 35811-9021
(256) 851-6670
SDI-131 Accelerated Physical Endurance Test Procedure for Steel Doors, www.meskerdoor.com
Frames and Frame Anchors
mETAL PRODUCTS, INC.
Construction Details 319 North Hills Road
Corbin, KY 40701
ANSI/SDI A250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames (606) 523-0173
SDI-110 Standard Steel Doors & Frames for Modular Masonry Construction www.metalproductsinc.com
SDI-111 Recommended Details for Standard Details Steel Doors, Frames, PIONEER INDUSTRIES, INC.
Accessories and Related Components 171 South Newman Street
Hackensack, NJ 07601
SDI-122 Installation & Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors &
(201) 933-1900
Frames www.pioneerindustries.com
SDI Drywall Slip-On Frames
REPUbLIC
155 Republic Drive
Miscellaneous Documents McKenzie, TN 38201-0580
ANSI/SDI A250.7 Nomenclature for Standard Steel Doors & Steel Frames (731) 352-3383
www.republicdoor.com
SDI-106 Recommended Standard Door Type Nomenclature
SDI-112 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors & SECURITy mETAL PRODUCTS CORP.
5700 Hannum Avenue, Suite 250
Frames
Culver City, CA 90230
SDI-117 Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors & Frames (310) 641-6690
www.secmet.com
SDI-124 Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors & Frames
SDI-127 Industry Alert Series (A-L) STEELCRAFT
Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies
SDI-130 Electrified Hinge Preparations 9017 Blue Ash Road
SDI What is The SDI? Cincinnati, OH 45242
(513) 745-6400
AUDIO-VISUAL PROgRAmS ON VHS ALSO AVAILAbLE www.steelcraft.com

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
440.899.0010 • FAX 440.892.1404
11/9/2009 www.steeldoor.org
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
112 - 08

Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized/Galvannealed)
Steel Doors and Frames

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2010 Steel Door Institute
SDI 112-2008

Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Steel Doors and Frames

Purpose Galvannealed steel doors and frames are fabricated

from carbon steel sheet that has been coated by
It is the intent of this document to provide information
the continuous hot-dip process and further treated
regarding the zinc-coated sheet used in steel door and
to convert the zinc coating into a zinc-iron alloy. The
frame construction when a requirement for zinc-coated
zinc coated sheet receives an in-line heat treatment
doors and frames is specified. It should be noted that
immediately as the strip exits the molten zinc bath to
doors and frames of cold rolled or hot rolled steel are
convert the entire coating layer to a zinc-iron alloy by
normally protected with a satisfactorily applied coat of
diffusion of iron from the sheet into the zinc coating.
rust inhibiting paint, and that zinc-coated doors and
The galvannealed surface has a non-spangled matte
frames need only be specified when they are to be
finish with a nominal composition of 90% zinc and
exposed to corrosive atmospheric conditions.
10% iron. This type of coating is referred to with an “A”
designation (or “ZF” in SI Units).
Applicable standards The galvannealed coating has several advantages
compared to the galvanized coating: 1) improved paint
ASTM A 924 / A 924M – Standard Specification for Gen- adhesion; 2) the coated surface accepts paint very
eral Requirements For Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by readily without a pretreatment (a pretreatment will en-
the Hot-Dip Process. hance the performance); 3) the zinc-iron alloy coating
ASTM A 653 / A 653M – Standard Specifications for can be welded more easily; and 4) the coating is harder
Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron and more resistant to manufacturing processes.
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

Coating designations
Types of zinc coatings Coating designations are written to represent the coat-
Galvanized steel doors and frames are fabricated from ing type, either G or A (Z or ZF in SI Units), and the
carbon steel sheet that has been coated with zinc on coating weight. The coating weight is the amount of
two sides by the continuous hot-dip process. The pro- zinc on the steel surface and is expressed to represent
cess results in a layer of zinc on each side of the steel the ounces per square foot of zinc as the total weight
sheet that is tightly adhered to the steel sheet through on both surfaces of the steel sheet.
the formation of an iron-zinc alloy bonding layer that
is formed by a diffusion process while the heated steel
strip is in contact with the molten zinc. The relatively Minimum coating weights
pure zinc coating exhibits a bright metallic color with
There are two coating weights used to specify zinc-
a pronounced “spangled” appearance. These coatings
coated steel doors and frames. In a coating weight
have a free zinc spangled surface and may be pro-
of 40 there are 0.4 ounces of zinc per square foot of
cessed in a manner that reduces spangle and results in
steel, and in 60 there are 0.6 ounces of zinc per square
a smooth dull-gray appearance. This type of coating is
foot of steel.
referenced with a “G” designation (or “Z” in SI Units).

2
 SDI 112-2008

Average coating thickness Painting

The average coating thickness specified in table 1 is Painting zinc-coated steel is recommended. In the fac-
based on the conversion factor of one ounce of zinc tory, steel is first chemically treated to ensure proper
coating per square foot of surface corresponding to an paint adhesion; then a factory applied coating of rust
average coating thickness of 0.0017" (0.043 mm). inhibiting primer is applied to the fabricated doors and
frames. When additional priming is required, care must
This coating thickness is not significant enough to make
be taken to ensure compatibility with the factory-applied
an appreciable difference in the measurable thickness
zinc surface.
of coated or uncoated steel of the same gage.
Refer to table 1 showing the coating designations,
minimum coating weights, and average coating thick- NOTES:
ness.
• Zinc-coating after fabrication is not available due
Corrosion resistance is directly proportionate to coating to thermal distortion of the product.
weight. The heavier the coating weight the more zinc is
• Although sometimes specified, the G Type zinc-
present and the more corrosion protection it will provide.
coating designation is not recommended for door
Therefore, under normal atmospheric conditions a 60
and frame construction.
designation will provide 50% more corrosion protection
than a 40 designation coating.

Table 1 – Coating designations, minimum coating weights, and average coating thickness

Coating Weight
Coating Average Coating
Designation Minimum Check Minimum Check Thickness / Side
Type
Limit Triple Spot Test Limit Single Spot Test

in-lb SI oz/ft2 * g/m2 * oz/ft2 * g/m2 * inches mm

G60 Z180 0.60 180 0.50 150 .0005 .013
Galvanized
G40 Z120 0.40 120 0.30 90 .0003 .009

A60 ZF180 0.60 180 0.50 150 .0005 .013

Galvannealed
A40 ZF120 0.40 120 0.30 90 .0003 .009

* NOTE: The weight of coating refers to the total coating on both surfaces.

3
 MEMBERS OF THE
AVAILABLE PUBLICATIONS STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE
AMWELD INTERNATIONAL, LLC
301 South Northpoint Drive, Suite 400
Specifications
Coppell, TX 75019
ANSI/SDI A250.6 Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcings on Standard (888) 775-2397
Steel Doors and Frames www.amweld.com
ANSI/SDI A250.8 SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors & CECO DOOR PRODUCTS
Frames 9159 Telecom Drive
SDI-108 Recommended Selection & Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors Milan, TN 38358
(731) 686-8345
SDI-109 Hardware for Standard Steel Doors & Frames www.cecodoor.com
SDI-118 Basic Fire Door Requirements CURRIES COMPANY
SDI-128 Guidelines for Acoustical Performance of Standard Steel Doors & P.O. Box 1648
Frames Mason City, IA 50402-1648
(641) 423-1334
SDI-129 Hinge & Strike Spacing www.curries.com

Test Procedures DEANSTEEL MANUFACTURING CO.

111 Merchant Street
ANSI/SDI A250.3 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish San Antonio, TX 78204-1496
Coatings for Steel Doors & Frames (210) 226-8271
ANSI/SDI A250.4 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for www.deansteel.com
Steel Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors & Hardware Reinforcings DOOR COMPONENTS INC.
ANSI/SDI A250.10 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel 7980 Redwood Avenue
Fontana, CA 92336-1638
Surfaces for Steel Doors & Frames
(909) 770-5700
ANSI/SDI A250.13 Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components www.doorcomponents.com
for Swinging Door Assemblies
MESKER DOOR, INC.
SDI-113 Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal 3440 Stanwood Boulevard
Transmittance of Steel Door & Frame Assemblies Huntsville, AL 35811-9021
(256) 851-6670
SDI-131 Accelerated Physical Endurance Test Procedure for Steel Doors, www.meskerdoor.com
Frames and Frame Anchors
METAL PRODUCTS, INC.
Construction Details 319 North Hills Road
Corbin, KY 40701
ANSI/SDI A250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames (606) 523-0173
SDI-110 Standard Steel Doors & Frames for Modular Masonry Construction www.metalproductsinc.com
SDI-111 Recommended Details for Standard Details Steel Doors, Frames, PIONEER INDUSTRIES, INC.
Accessories and Related Components 171 South Newman Street
Hackensack, NJ 07601
SDI-122 Installation & Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors &
(201) 933-1900
Frames www.pioneerindustries.com
SDI Drywall Slip-On Frames
REPUBLIC
155 Republic Drive
Miscellaneous Documents McKenzie, TN 38201-0580
ANSI/SDI A250.7 Nomenclature for Standard Steel Doors & Steel Frames (731) 352-3383
www.republicdoor.com
SDI-106 Recommended Standard Door Type Nomenclature
SDI-112 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors & SECURITY METAL PRODUCTS CORP.
5700 Hannum Avenue, Suite 250
Frames
Culver City, CA 90230
SDI-117 Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors & Frames (310) 641-6690
www.secmet.com
SDI-124 Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors & Frames
SDI-127 Industry Alert Series (A-L) STEELCRAFT
Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies
SDI-130 Electrified Hinge Preparations 9017 Blue Ash Road
SDI What is The SDI? Cincinnati, OH 45242
(513) 745-6400
AUDIO-VISUAL PROGRAMS ON VHS ALSO AVAILABLE www.steelcraft.com

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
440.899.0010 • FAX 440.892.1404
11/9/2009 www.steeldoor.org
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
INDUSTRY ALERT 113 - 13

Standard Practice
for
Determining the
Steady-State Thermal
Transmittance
of
Steel Door
and Frame Assemblies

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2013 Steel Door Institute
SDI 113-13

Standard Practice for Determining the Steady-State

Thermal Transmittance of Steel Door and Frame Assemblies

1 Purpose 5 Performance Ratings

1.1 The purpose of this practice is to establish a
Table 1
standard test specimen size, test conditions
and a rating system for determining the thermal U-Value < ½ Light > ½ Light Rating
transmittance of operable steel door and frame
assemblies. > 0.46 >0.52 > 0.57 0

1.2 This practice refers to the standardized thermal ≤ 0.45 ≤ 0.51 ≤ 0.56 1
transmittance; Ust of an operable steel door and ≤ 0.43 ≤ 0.49 ≤ 0.54 2
frame assembly installed vertically in the absence
of solar and air leakage effects. ≤ 0.41 ≤ 0.47 ≤ 0.52 3

1.3 This practice employs the use of ASTM C1363-05, ≤ 0.39 ≤ 0.45 ≤ 0.50 4
Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance ≤ 0.37 ≤ 0.43 ≤ 0.48 5
of Building Materials and Envelope Assemblies
by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus, ASTM C1199- ≤ 0.35 ≤ 0.41 ≤ 0.46 6
09e1, Standard Test Method for Measuring the ≤ 0.33 ≤ 0.39 ≤ 0.44 7
Steady-State Thermal Transmittance of Fenestra-
tion Systems Using Hot Box Methods and ASTM ≤ 0.31 ≤ 0.37 ≤ 0.42 8
E1423-06 Practice for Determining Steady State ≤ 0.29 ≤ 0.35 ≤ 0.40 9
Thermal Transmittance of Fenestration Systems.
≤ 0.27 ≤ 0.33 ≤ 0.38 10
2 Test Specimen
2.1 Single doors and pairs of doors shall be tested as 6 Report
nominal 3′0″ (914mm) wide x 7′0″ (2134mm) high 6.1 The report shall contain the following information:
and 6′0″ (1828mm) wide x 7′0″ (2134mm) high
openings, respectively. 6.2 A detailed description of the test specimen com-
ponents, i.e. Door, frame, hardware, glazing and
2.2 The test specimens shall consist of door, frame, weather-strip that includes model or series num-
weather-stripping system, glazing (if included) and bers.
hardware and be fully operable prior to the sealing
of the assembly. 6.3 If the test specimen is of a size other than that
specified in Section 2.1, the reason for the devia-
Note: ASTM E1423 requires sealing of the test
tion should be noted.
specimen to prevent air leakage.
6.4 All of the information specified in Section 9 of test
3 Experimental Procedure method ASTM C1199.
3.1 The specimen shall be tested in accordance with 6.5 A statement affirming that the test was conducted
ASTM C1199, C1363 and E1423. in accordance with this standardized procedure.
4 Calculation 6.6 A rating as defined in Table 1.
4.1 The standardized Thermal Transmittance (Ust)
shall be calculated per the CTS method described
in ASTM C1199.

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
440/899-0010 • FAX 440/892-1404
www.steeldoor.org
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
117 - 13

Manufacturing Tolerances
for
Standard Steel Doors
and Frames

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2013 Steel Door Institute
 SDI 117-2013

Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames

1 Introduction NFPA 80, Standard for Fire Doors and Other Open-
It is the intent of this publication to provide users of ing Protectives, 2007 Edition (National Fire Protection
standard steel doors and frames with definitive infor- Association, 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269;
mation regarding manufacturing tolerances. It is also www.nfpa.org)
intended to provide installation contractor(s) of the SDI 122, Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for
tolerances to be considered to assure proper operation Standard Steel Doors and Frames
of the complete opening. This document is intended for
in-plant inspections. It may be used for on-site inspec-
tions where there is no evidence of damage to material 3 Materials and Finishes
or improper installation.
The information contained herein pertains to doors 3.1 Steel Thickness
and frames manufactured in accordance with ANSI Manufacturers no longer order sheet and coil to a
A250.8, Recommended Specifications for Standard specific gage, but rather to a minimum decimal thick-
Steel Doors and Frames. It is not intended to reference ness. This thickness is the lowest of the range for a
to special or unusual door and frame conditions. specific gage. The steel supplier is therefore permitted
to exceed, but not be less than the specified decimal
thickness. These minimum values meet the stringent
2 Reference Documents: requirements of both Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
ANSI/SDI A250.8 SDI 100 Recommended Specifica- and ITS/Warnock Hersey. Examples of minimum al-
tions for Standard Steel Doors & Frames lowable steel thickness:
ANSI/SDI A250.6 Recommended Practice for Hard- Gage (MSG) Minimum
ware Reinforcings on Standard Steel Doors and
20 0.032˝
Frames
18 0.042˝
ANSI/SDI A250.7 Nomenclature for Standard Steel
16 0.053˝
Doors & Steel Frames
14 0.067˝
ANSI/SDI A250.3 Test Procedure & Acceptance 12 0.093˝
Criteria for Factory Applied Finish Coatings for Steel
10 0.123˝
Doors & Frames
7 0.167˝
ANSI/SDI A250.10 Test Procedure & Acceptance Cri-
Gage (MSG) are for reference purposes only.
teria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors
& Frames
ANSI/SDI A250.11 Recommended Erection Instruc- 3.2 Steel Coatings
tions for Steel Frames
Thickness of metallic coatings (generally zinc) are
ANSI/BHMA A115 Specifications for Steel Door and defined by ASTM A924, Standard Specification for
Frame Preparation for Hardware (A115.1 – A115.18) General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated
by the Hot-Dip Process and A653, Standard Specifi-
ASTM A568 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet,
cation for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galva­nized) or
Carbon, Structural, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip
Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for
Process. The two most commonly used designations
ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, are A40 and A60. Minimum requirements for these
Zinc-Coated (Galva­nized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated designations are:
(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
A40 = 0.40 oz/ft2 total both sides.
ASTM A924 Standard Specification for General Re- A60 = 0.60 oz/ft2 total both sides.
quirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the
For reference, 1 oz/ft2 = 1.7 mils thickness.
Hot-Dip Process

1
SDI 117-2013

3.3 Factory Applied Coatings 4.2 Frame Opening & Vertical Locations

Since factory applied coatings (primer, finish paint, etc.)
are subject to performance standards rather than thick-
ness, the dry film thickness is irrelevant. Such coatings
must comply with performance criteria of: ±⅓2˝
ANSI/SDI A250.3 – Test Procedure and Acceptance C
L Hinge
Criteria for Factory Applied Finished Painted Steel
Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames
±⅙4˝
OR Opening
Height
ANSI/SDI A250.10 – Test Procedure and Acceptance +1⁄16˝ –⅓2˝
Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel ±⅙4˝
Doors and Frames. CL
Strike

4 Frame Tolerances
±⅓2˝

4.1 Frame Cross Section Profile

Permissible tolerances in frame profile surfaces are
as shown below:

Opening Width
+1⁄16˝ –⅓2˝
Face
±⅓2˝
Stop Figure B – Opening Tolerances
±⅓2˝

Rabbet
±⅓2˝ 4.3 Bow or Twist of Jambs or Header
Realizing that frames are somewhat “pliable”, and
Throat
Frame require bracing and alignment during installation,
Depth Opening
±3⁄32˝ allowable deformation (bow, twist, etc.) of jambs or
±1⁄16˝
header of frame prior to installation shall not result
in a reduction of opening sizes more than 1/16˝ beyond
those shown in Figure “B” when measured at any point.

Figure A – Profile Tolerances

2
 SDI 117-2013

4.4 Horizontal Alignment of Door Within 5 Door Tolerances

Rabbet
Hinge and strike backsets shall allow the horizontal 5.1 Door Size, Thickness, and Vertical
centerline of the door to be in line with the horizontal Locations
centerline of the frame rabbet ± 1/32˝ prior to installa-
tion. Figure “C” is an example based on a 1 3/4˝ door
in a 1 15/16˝ rabbet. Door Width
±3⁄64˝ Door
Thickness
±⅓2˝
±1⁄16˝
C
L Hinge

±⅙4˝
Door
1˝ or 3⅓2˝ ± ⅓2˝ Height
±3⁄64˝
±⅙4˝ C
L Lock

Centerline of door
Lock
Height
±⅓2˝
1 ¾˝ door

Figure C – Horizontal Alignment

Figure E – Doors

4.5 Frames with Lights or Panels

Opening sizes (width or height) for side or transom
lights or panels and for borrowed light frames shall be
subject to a tolerance of ± 1/16˝ for each individual light or
5.2 Door Squareness
panel. These tolerances shall be non-accumulative so
that the overall frame opening sizes are not increased When measured diagonally from corner to corner along
by more than 1/8˝. the same face, the measurements shall be within 1/16˝
of each other.

± ⅛˝
± 1⁄16˝ ± 1⁄16˝ ± 1⁄16˝

± 1⁄16˝

± ⅛˝

± 1⁄16˝ Figure F – Squareness

Figure D – Frames with Lights or Panels

3
SDI 117-2013

5.3 Door Perimeter Flatness

When a suitable straightedge is laid against the door
face at or within 1/4˝ of the top, bottom, hinge edge,
and lock edge on both faces any deviation between
the face and the straightedge shall not allow a 0.0625˝
rod or block to pass.
Note: The straightedge shall be allowed to “rest” natu-
rally on the door surface, not pulled down at one end to
meet the door.
Straightedge

⅛˝ max

Straightedge
Door

Figure H – Flatness

1⁄16˝ max

5.5 Door Twist
The door is laid onto a suitable, flat fixture or surface
1⁄16˝ max that is free of any warp, bow, or twist. Support blocks of
identical heights shall be inserted between the fixture
and the door face at all four corners of the door. Any
deviation between the face and the support blocks shall
Straightedge
not allow a 0.0625˝ rod or block to pass.
Note: The door shall be allowed to “rest” naturally on
Figure G – Flatness the support blocks, not pulled down at any corner to
meet the blocks.

5.4 Door Face Bow or Crown

When a suitable straightedge is laid diagonally against
the door face at least 1/2˝ from corners any deviation
between the face and the straightedge shall not allow Flat
a 0.125˝ rod or block to pass. Surface
Door Surface
Note: The straightedge shall be allowed to “rest” natu-
rally on the door surface, not pulled down at one end to
meet the door.

1⁄16˝ max.

Figure I – Door Twist

4
 SDI 117-2013

5.6 Doors with Lights or Panels 7 Frame Installation and Door Adjustments

Opening sizes (width or height) for lights or panels cut
into doors shall be subject to a tolerance of ± 1/16˝ for 7.1 Adjusting Pivot Point by Shimming
each individual light or panel. Providing extra depth along door or frame faces allows
for hinge knuckles to be offset, thus changing the pivot
6 Hardware Preparations point of the opening. Shims are usually thin strips of 1/4˝
wide material approximately equal to the hinge height.
6.1 Vertical Locations 7.1.1 Figure “J” shows how to relocate the pivot point
Tolerances for vertical locations are as noted in Para- toward the jamb.
graphs 4.2 and 5.1.

C
L Hinge
6.2 Horizontal Alignment Barrel Shim B
Hinge
Tolerances for horizontal alignment of door and rabbet Jamb Hinge
are as noted in Paragraph 4.4. Reinf.

6.3 Mortise Depth
The depth of hardware items mortised into edges of
doors (such as hinges, strikes, lock fronts, flushbolts)
shall be as defined on manufacturer’s templates and/ Door Shim A
or ANSI A156.115 documents subject to an additional “X”
tolerance of ± 1/64˝.

6.3.1 Cutout Depth at Frame or Door Faces

In order to allow for field adjustment, usually ac-
complished by shimming, hardware cutouts (such as
• Using shim "A" only, door will be relocated in the direc-
hinges) that extend from door edges around to faces
tion of arrow "X".
or from frame rabbet around to faces are allowed to
exceed mortise depth by 1/16˝. See Paragraph 7 for • Using shim "B" only, will move both door and centerline
examples of common hinge shimming procedures. of hinge barrel in direction of Arrow "X".
• Using both shims "A" and "B" will relocate the door
in direction of Arrow "E" by a greater amount than by
6.3.2 Depth for Recessed or Concealed using shim "B" alone.
Hardware
The depth for hardware items recessed into top or bot- Figure J – Hinge Bind, Shims A and B
tom of doors or edges of doors (such as pocket pivots,
floor closers, top pivots, concealed closers or holders,
etc) shall be as defined on manufacturer’s templates
subject to an additional tolerance of +1/16˝ –0˝. Notches
in door faces shall have similar tolerances.

5
SDI 117-2013

7.1.2 Figure “K” shows how to relocate the pivot point 7.2 Frame Installation Tolerances
away from the jamb. While this document is mainly concerned with toler-
ances relating to the manufacturing process, openings
will not function properly if the frame is not installed
C
L Hinge within recognized tolerances.
Barrel Hinge Figures “L-M-N-O” show examples of the accuracy to
Jamb Shim D Hinge
Reinf.
be maintained while setting frames. Instructions for
installation may be found in ANSI A250.11.

1⁄16˝ (1.58 mm)

Shim C
Door Strike
Hinge Jamb
“Y”
Jamb

1⁄16˝ (1.58 mm)

• Using shim "C" only, door will be relocated in direction
of Arrow "Y".
• Using "D" only, both door and centerline of hinge barrel Strike
Hinge Jamb
will move in the direction of Arrow "F".
Jamb
• Using both shims "C" and "D" will relocate the door
in direction of Arrow "F" by a greater amount than by
using either "C" or "D" alone. The centerline of hinge
barrel will be relocated the same as by using shim Maximum 1/16” allowable tolerance on total opening.
"D" alone.

Figure K – Hinge Bind, Shims C and D Figure L – Squareness

Head Level Head Level

1⁄16˝
(1.58 mm)

Hinge or Hinge or
Strike Jamb Strike Jamb

Bottom Bottom
1⁄16˝
(1.58 mm)

Figure M – Plumbness

6
 SDI 117-2013

1⁄16˝ (1.58 mm)

Figure N – Alignment

1⁄16˝ (1.58 mm)

Figure O – Twist

7.3 Troubleshooting
Further information regarding corrective actions for
door & frame openings may be found in SDI-122.

7
 MEMBERS OF THE
AVAILABLE PUBLICATIONS STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE
Black Mountain Door
Specifications 310 Flint Drive
Mt. Sterling, KY 40353
ANSI/SDI A250.6 Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcings on Standard
(859) 274-0411
Steel Doors and Frames www.blackmountaindoor.com
ANSI/SDI A250.8 SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors & Ceco Door
Frames 9159 Telecom Drive
SDI-108 Recommended Selection & Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors Milan, TN 38358
(731) 686-8345
SDI-118 Basic Fire Door, Fire Door Frame, Transom/Sidelight Frame, and www.cecodoor.com
Window Frame Requirements
Curries
SDI-128 Guidelines for Acoustical Performance of Standard Steel Doors & P.O. Box 1648
Frames Mason City, IA 50402-1648
(641) 423-1334
SDI-129 Hinge & Strike Spacing
www.curries.com

Test Procedures Deansteel Manufacturing Co.

111 Merchant Street
ANSI/SDI A250.3 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish San Antonio, TX 78204-1496
Coatings for Steel Doors & Frames (210) 226-8271
www.deansteel.com
ANSI/SDI A250.4 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for
Steel Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors DOOR COMPONENTS INC.
7980 Redwood Avenue
ANSI/SDI A250.10 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Fontana, CA 92336-1638
Surfaces for Steel Doors & Frames (909) 770-5700
www.doorcomponents.com
ANSI/SDI A250.13 Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components
for Swinging Door Assemblies Mesker Door, Inc.
3440 Stanwood Boulevard
SDI-113 Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal
Huntsville, AL 35811-9021
Transmittance of Steel Door & Frame Assemblies (256) 851-6670
SDI-131 Accelerated Physical Endurance Test Procedure for Steel Doors, www.meskerdoor.com
Frames and Frame Anchors MPI
319 North Hills Road
Construction Details Corbin, KY 40701
(606) 523-0173
ANSI/SDI A250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames www.metalproductsinc.com
SDI-110 Standard Steel Doors & Frames for Modular Masonry Construction Pioneer Industries, Inc.
SDI-111 Recommended Details for Standard Details Steel Doors, Frames, 171 South Newman Street
Accessories and Related Components Hackensack, NJ 07601
(201) 933-1900
SDI-122 Installation & Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors & www.pioneerindustries.com
Frames
Republic Doors & Frames
SDI-132 Drywall Slip-On Frames 155 Republic Drive
McKenzie, TN 38201-0580
(731) 352-3383
Miscellaneous Documents www.republicdoor.com
ANSI/SDI A250.7 Nomenclature for Standard Steel Doors & Steel Frames Security Metal Products
SDI-112 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors & 5700 Hannum Avenue, Suite 250
Frames Culver City, CA 90230
(310) 641-6690
SDI-117 Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors & Frames www.secmet.com
SDI-124 Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors & Frames Steelcraft
SDI-127 Industry Alert Series (A-L) Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies
9017 Blue Ash Road
SDI-130 Electrified Hinge Preparations Cincinnati, OH 45242
(513) 745-6400
AUDIO-VISUAL PROGRAMS ON VHS ALSO AVAILABLE www.steelcraft.com

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
440.899.0010 • FAX 440.892.1404
8/30/2012 www.steeldoor.org
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
118 - 12

Basic Fire Door,

Fire Door Frame,
Transom/Sidelight Frame,
and Window Frame
Requirements

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2013 Steel Door Institute
Technical Data Series SDI 118-2012

Basic Fire Door, Fire Door Frame, Transom/Sidelight

Frame, and Window Frame Requirements
1 Introduction 2.1 Hourly ratings

Fire testing of doors, door frames, transom/ Steel fire doors are “rated” by time (in minutes
sidelight frames, window frames, glazing, and or hours) that a door can withstand exposure
hardware and the resulting labeling programs to fire test conditions. Hourly ratings include
1-1/2-hours, 1-hour, 3/4-hour, and 1/3-hour, with
granted by third-party testing agencies are
the maximum rating required of any swinging
complex subjects better understood when basic
type fire door being three hours.
rules and guidelines are applied.
2.2 Three-hour (180-minute) doors
2 Doors A door with a three-hour fire protection rating is
The fire rating classification of the wall into usually required in walls that separate buildings
or that divide a large building into smaller fire
which the door is installed dictates the required
areas. The wall rating is four hours.
fire rating of the door. The location of the wall
in the building and prevailing building codes 2.3 1-1/2-hour (90-minute) doors
establish the fire rating requirements for the Doors rated for 1-1/2 hours are required in 2-hour
wall. The associated door ratings are shown rated walls. These doors are commonly located
in Table 1 below. in stairwells, or other enclosures of vertical

Table 1 – Fire door openings

Wall Door and

Opening Description and Use
Rating Frame Rating

3 Hour These openings are in walls that separate buildings or

4 Hour
(180 minutes) divide a single building into designated fire areas.

Openings of this type are used in enclosures of vertical

1-1/2 Hour communication or egress through buildings. Examples
2 Hour
(90 minute) of these types of openings include stairwells and eleva-
tor shafts.

1 Hour These door and frame assemblies divide occupancies

1 Hour
(60 minute) in a building.

3/4 Hour For use where there are openings in corridors or room
1 Hour
(45 minute) partitions.

1-1/2 Hour This opening is in a wall where there is the potential for
2 Hour
(90 minute) severe fire exposure from the exterior of the building.

This opening is in an exterior wall that has the potential

1 Hour
3/4 Hour to be exposed to moderate to light fire from the exterior
(45 minute) of the building.

1/3 Hour These openings are in corridors where smoke and draft
1 Hour
(20 minute) control is required. The minimum wall rating is 1/2 hour.

1
SDI 118-2012

passage through a building. They also occur used in a 1-1/2-­­h our opening. All requirements
in boiler rooms and in exterior walls that have for the 3-hour rating, such as maximum glazing
the potential for severe fire exposure from the materials size, door size, and other restrictions
outside of the building. for the higher rated door must be met.
2.4 One-hour (60 minute) doors
3 Glazing Materials
One-hour rated doors are used in occupancy
separation walls, which are also one-hour rated. A wide variety of glazing materials and glazing
compounds are available for use in fire doors
2.5 3/4-hour (45 minute) doors and frames. Wired glass that is 1/4″ thick and
Doors with 3/4-hour fire protection ratings are ceramic glass are the most common types of
used in one-hour walls. A 3/4-hour rated door glazing used in fire rated doors. The hourly rat-
is required in walls of corridors and room ing of the door dictates the number and maxi-
partitions. A door with this rating may also be mum size of the vision lights used in the door.
located in the exterior wall of a building subject
For 1/4″ thick wired glass, the maximum ex-
to moderate fire exposure from the outside of
posed area for a transom light shall not ex-
the building.
ceed 1296 square inches with no dimension of
2.6 1/3-hour (20 minute) doors exposed wired glass greater than 54″ in width
or 48″ in height, unless otherwise indicated in
One-third-hour or 20 minute doors are used in
one-hour walls. These doors are used for corri- the individual glazing manufacturer’s published
dor applications and in other applications where listings. Wired glass, 1/4″ thick is rated for 3/4-
smoke and draft control is a primary concern. hour for an exposed area not exceeding 1296
square inches.
2.7 Twenty-minute doors tested without
hose stream For glazing materials other than 1/4″ thick wired
glass and for 1/4″ thick wired glass in sizes larger
Doors and frames may also be rated as 20 than those described above, the maximum ex-
minutes without a hose stream. These doors posed area per individual light, the minimum
have successfully passed a 20-minute fire test, groove depth, glazing compound and the rating
with the omission of the hose stream test, and
shall be as indicated in the individual glazing
bear a label that specifically states “Twenty-
manufacturer’s published listings. Consult with
Minute-Rating Tested Without Hose Stream.”
the door and glazing manufacturers for the
These doors may be provided with vision lights
limitations of size, area and number of vision
only limited in size by the door manufacturer’s
lights in a door. The approved listings for fire
fire labeling procedure authority.
door, transom/sidelight frame, window frame,
Assemblies identified as “Twenty-Minute-Rating and glazing manufacturers may be obtained
Tested Without Hose Stream” should not be through the listing agencies as follows:
confused with 1/3-hour fire rated doors, which
have been tested in accordance with the stan- Underwriters Laboratories
dard fire test procedure that includes the hose Use the following hyperlink to access the Under-
stream test. writers Laboratories “Online Certifications Direc-
2.8 Summary tory”. Enter the “UL Category Code” indicated
below for a listing of approved manufacturers.
Doors are rated for three-fourths of the rating
of the surrounding wall: A 3-hour door is used http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/
LISEXT/1FRAME/index.htm (link valid as of
in a 4-hour rated wall; a 1-1/2-hour fire door is 9/30/2013)
used in a 2-hour rated wall; and a 3/4-hour door
is used in a one-hour rated wall. The notable
Fire Door Manufacturers – GSYX or GSZN
exception is that 1/3-hour rated doors are also
used with one-hour rated walls.
Fire Door and Window Frame Manufactur-
However, a door with a higher fire rating than ers – GVTV
the opening requires may also be specified.
For example, a door rated for 3 hours may be Glazing Manufacturers – KCMZ or CCET

2
SDI 118-2012

Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey) designed to restrict the transmission of heat
and are referred to as temperature rise doors.
Use the following link to access the Intertek
“Listed Product Directories”. Enter keywords In addition to the hourly rating, the fire door
such as glass, glazing, fire door, fire door label will also state the temperature rise rating
frame, fire window, or transom frame for a list of the door. Temperature rise ratings are 250°F,
of approved manufacturers. 450°F, and 650°F, and indicate the maximum
https://whdirectory.intertek.com/Pages/DLP_ rise in temperature above ambient temperature
Search.aspx (link valid as of 9/30/2013) measured on the unexposed surface (non-fire
Vision lights are not allowed in 3-hour rated side) of the door during the first 30 minutes of
fire doors, unless allowed by the local author- the standard fire test. The 250°F temperature
ity having jurisdiction. The vision light kit or rise designation is the most stringent rating of
window frame must be approved for use in a the three, since it requires the most limiting rise
fire rated door. in temperature. A 250°F temperature rise door
meets the requirements of specifications calling
Two categories of glazing used in doors, door
for a 450°F or 650°F temperature rise rating.
frames, transom/sidelight frames, and borrowed
light frames are available as follows:
5 Louvers
Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing – This glaz- Listed louvers are permitted in 1-1/2-hour and 3/4-
ing is evaluated for fire protection ratings hour fire doors and the louver must be installed
measured in minutes or hours in doors in in accordance with the manufacturer’s listing.
accordance with UL 10c and NFPA 252 Louvers may not be used in 1/3-hour (20‑minute)
and frames in accordance with UL 9 and rated doors, or doors of other hourly ratings that
NFPA 257. may be part of a smoke and draft assembly.
Doors with glass lights, or doors equipped with
Fire-Resistance-Rated Glazing – Fire-re-
fire exit devices may not have louvers unless
sistance-rated glazing is designed to limit
permitted by local building codes.
the temperature rise on the unexposed
surface in accordance with UL 263 and
6 Fire door frames
ASTM E119. Performance is rated in terms
of temperature rise on the unexposed face Fire door frames are not affected by the expo-
at increments of time (minutes or hours). sure ratings and opening classifications that
This glazing may be used in Temperature apply to doors. There are no hourly ratings for
Rise Doors which are explained in the a basic fire door frame unless the labeling on
next section. the frame specifically states that the frame is
Fire protection and fire resistance glazing in- rated less than 3 hours. Some state and local
stalled in fire doors and fire windows that are building codes require hourly ratings up to
subject to human impact shall meet applicable and including 3 hours for a door frame. If a
impact safety standards (e.g. – 16 CFR 1201, frame bears a recognized label qualifying it as
U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission, a fire door frame, it may support a 3-hour, a
“Standard for Architectural Glazing”). 1-1/2-hour, a 3/4-hour, or a 1/3-hour door. Frames
used in masonry walls may be used with a
4 Temperature rise doors maximum 3-hour fire door, while frames used
In certain applications, fire doors are required in drywall stud walls are intended to be used
to minimize the transmission of heat from one with a maximum 1-1/2-hour fire door. Consult
side of the door to the other, as in the stairwell with individual fire door frame manufacturers
of a high-rise building or in horizontal exits. If listings for fire door frames that can be used
the door can limit the transmission of heat for a in drywall stud walls with a maximum 3-hour
period of time, people can safely pass below the rating. Grout is not required for fire rated frames
floor of fire origin in a burning building. These installed in either drywall or masonry walls at
doors are built with a core that is specifically any hourly rating.

3
SDI 118-2012

7 Transom and sidelight assemblies 9 Fire doors with Builders Hardware

Labeled door frames are available with tran- Fire doors with Builder’s Hardware serve four
som areas, sidelight areas, or a combination main purposes:
of both. The transom and sidelight areas can 1) To function as a door at all times; 2) to provide
be assembled with listed panel assemblies or ready egress; 3) to keep fire from spreading
listed glazing material. Frames with solid tran- throughout the building; and 4) to protect life
som panel and/or side panels may be used in and property.
openings rated up to and including 3 hours.
To adequately perform these functions, a fire
Transom and sidelight frames with labeled glaz-
door must be equipped with labeled hardware
ing material may be used in openings rated up
for dependable operation. Proper hardware
to 1-1/2 hours. The maximum hourly rating, overall
selections can be verified by consulting the
frame size, panel construction, and individual current editions of the “Fire Resistance Direc-
glazing material exposed areas for frame and tory” published by Underwriters Laboratories
glazing manufacturers may be obtained through Inc. and “Directory of Listed Products” published
the listing agencies as indicated in Section 3. by Intertek Testing. These directories identify
The overall size of transom and sidelight hardware and other products that may be used
frames is limited to the maximum size that a in fire-rated assemblies. The information can
manufacturer has successfully fire tested. Since also be accessed at the following links:
the size may vary, it is important to consult the Underwriters Laboratories
manufacturer when writing specifications. http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/
LISEXT/1FRAME/index.htm (link valid as of
Some testing agencies require that the label 9/30/2013)
applied to transom or sidelight assemblies shall
state whether panels or glazing materials are Use UL Category Codes GXHX or GYJT.
to be used in the frame. If the frame contains
both panels and glazing materials, the label Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey)
for the glazing materials is used since it is the https://whdirectory.intertek.com/Pages/DLP_
Search.aspx (link valid as of 9/30/2013)
most limiting rating.
NFPA 80 provides guidance for installing fire
8 Fire window frames (borrowed light) doors, frames, and hardware in the building
openings.
Fire window frames are labeled hollow metal
glass light frames that are not attached to a 9.1 Hinges
door frame and are tested in accordance with A labeled fire door must be hung on steel ball-
NFPA 257 or UL 9 and shall be provided in bearing-type or listed hinges. NFPA 80 allows
accordance with the manufacturer’s listing. the use of steel hinges with steel ball-bearings
Individual glazing material exposed areas are without a listing. Steel hinges that meet the
not to exceed 1296 square inches and the di- criteria of NFPA 80 have been proven to be
mension for width or height shall not exceed 54 adequate during a fire. There are certain hinge
inches unless otherwise tested. The maximum designs made of non-ferrous metals which may
hourly rating, overall window size, and individual be used on fire doors in accordance with the
glazing material exposed areas for frame and listing information for the particular hinge but
glazing manufacturers may be obtained through may result in a lower fire rating.
the listing agencies as indicated in Section 3. Hinges with ball bearings are required in order
Fire window frames are typically used in cor- to provide smooth operation and to minimize
ridor walls and may be provided for masonry or wear throughout the lifetime of the opening.
drywall construction. Consult the frame manu- Remember, a fire door must close in the event
facturer as to the ability to supply fire window of a fire. Worn hinges will cause the door to
frames for drywall walls. Grout is not required sag, effectively preventing the door from closing.
for fire rated frames installed in either drywall Exception: Some manufacturers may provide
or masonry walls at any hourly rating. doors with hinges that use other antifriction

4
SDI 118-2012

bearing surfaces if they meet the requirements capability of the door to allow the hardware to
of ANSI/BHMA A156.1. operate in a panic situation.
NFPA 80 allows the use of standard weight Care must be taken when selecting exit devices
(0.134 inch leaf thickness) 4-1/2″ steel hinges for use on fire-rated doors, as some devices
as a minimum on 1-3/4″ doors up to 4′-0″ in have been tested for panic loading only, and
width and 8′-0″ in height. Doors over 8′-0″ in not fire tested. In addition, exit devices have
height shall have heavy weight (.180 inch leaf size and hourly rating restrictions, and must
thickness) 4-1/2″ hinges as a minimum. Some
be properly labeled and identified as fire exit
manufacturers have the capability of providing
hardware.
lighter weight hinges on doors over 8′-0″ in
height as part of a listed assembly. (Consid- 9.4 Closing devices
eration should be given to larger hinge sizes
A properly sized closing device is the last of the
for frequently used or heavy doors.)
“basic” fire door hardware requirements. A fire
9.2 Latching devices door must be in a closed and latched position
Every swinging fire door must have a labeled to serve as a protective barrier in the event
self-latching device. Dead bolts may be provided of a fire. For this reason, either listed spring
in addition to the latch bolt, except on doors hinges or a listed door closer is required to
in a means of egress, in which case intercon- ensure that the door will close properly.
nected locks may be used which retract the
Note: Per NFPA 80, the authority having juris-
dead bolt with the latch bolt. Dead bolts may diction may allow the closer to be omitted from
not be used in place of latch bolts. the inactive leaf of a pair of doors for equipment
rooms to allow the movement of equipment.
When selecting latching devices, it is impor-
tant to use the correct length of latch bolt, a 9.5 Hold open devices
requirement that can vary with the door con-
struction and the manufacturer’s fire testing Tests and investigations have proven that smoke
program. It is common for a pair of doors to and toxic gases are the main cause of death in
require a longer latch bolt throw than a single fires. Listed closers with closer arms that are
door. The minimum latch bolt length that must equipped with a fusible link or a listed combi-
be used for any given door is indicated on the nation closer/holder shall be used. Mechanical
fire door label. hold-open only devices and hold-open only
arms are not permitted on self-closing doors.
An exception to latching for fire rated open-
Doors with surface closers equipped with a
ings is allowed by the IBC for double egress
doors in corridors that are in a smoke barrier. listed hold open device (e.g. electromagnetic
The omission of positive latching devices must release) also prevent the passage of the toxic
be included in the door manufacturer’s listing. gases and smoke. These devices are activated
State and local building code authorities may by electronic detectors that sense smoke and/
also allow latching to be omitted in certain or the products of combustion.
openings. Consult individual manufacturers for
labeling capabilities. 10 Hardware – pairs of doors
9.3 Fire exit hardware Pairs of doors for rated openings have some
unique hardware requirements.
Fire exit hardware devices may be used on
labeled doors provided the door labeling spe- 10.1 Hinges and closing devices
cifically states “Fire Door To Be Equipped With
Fire Exit Hardware.” This label indicates that the Pairs of doors for labeled openings require steel,
door has been properly reinforced for fire exit ball-bearing-type hinges or a listed continuous
devices. Fire exit hardware used on doors that hinge. Closing devices are required on both
bear this label must pass a panic loading test leaves of a pair of doors except on mechanical
in accordance with UL 305 and ANSI/BHMA equipment rooms where the closing device may
A156.3 in addition to the standard fire test. be omitted from the inactive leaf, if acceptable
The panic load test measures the structural with the authority having jurisdiction.

5
SDI 118-2012

10.2 Latching hardware 11 Product labeling

10.2.1 Active leaf of pairs of doors There are several materials and attachment
methods for fire labels that are approved by
An active leaf of a pair of doors may require
recognized labeling agencies. These include
labeled fire‑exit hardware, or any labeled latch
steel, brass, aluminum, and non-metallic ma-
that shall be opened by one obvious operation
terials such as foil and mylar. Metal labels are
from the egress side.
attached with welds, rivets, drive screws, or
10.2.2 Inactive leaf of pairs of doors adhesive. Non-metallic labels are either die-slit
or tamper proof with an adhesive back. Once
Local codes may allow manual flush or surface
applied, if any attempt is made to remove the
mounted bolts to be used to secure the inactive
label it will tear apart indicating tampering. Em-
leaf of pairs of doors being used as entrances
bossed metal labels and embossments directly
to equipment rooms or similar situations. The applied to doors and frames may be painted as
IBC requires that the inactive leaf have no knob long as the listing agency mark and all listing
or other visible hardware that implies means information is legible.
of egress.
The mark of a labeling agency shall be provided
Labeled fire exit devices are mandatory for exits on all labels applied to fire-rated doors and
unless local authorities give specific approval for frames. The agency mark or manufacturer isn’t
the use of labeled self-unlatching and latching required to be the same on the door, frame, and
devices, such as automatic flush bolts on the hardware. Labels are located on the edge of a
inactive leaf. The self-unlatching feature must door between the top and middle hinges. Labels
work only when the active leaf is opened. are located on the frame rabbet between the
10.3 Double egress pairs top and middle hinges. Labels may be located
on the top of the door or head of the frame if
Double egress pairs of doors should only be there is interference with hardware (e.g. electric
provided with vertical rod fire-exit hardware power transfer, continuous hinge, smoke seals)
devices on both leaves. The vertical rod devices that would obscure the label.
may be either surface mounted or concealed.
Fire labels on doors and frames are not intended
10.4 Astragals to survive a fire. The label is there to indicate
that the opening is protected by a properly
The application of astragals on pairs of doors
constructed steel door and frame.
depend upon the individual door manufac-
turer’s published listings. Pairs of doors that
12 Fire test methods
do require an astragal shall have at least one
that projects a minimum of 3/4-inch beyond the There are two primary fire test methods that
edge of the door to which the astragal is at- are used to establish the fire ratings of doors.
tached. Pairs of doors that are in a required The first is ANSI/UL 10B and is referred to as
means of egress may not be equipped with an neutral pressure; the second is ANSI/UL 10C,
astragal that inhibits the free use of either leaf. and is referred to as positive pressure.
An overlapping astragal may not be used on The difference between the two test methods
pairs of doors swinging in the same direction concerns the location of a neutral pressure
with vertical rod exit devices on both leaves plane in the test furnace. In the late 1990’s, the
of the pair. test method required in building codes changed
In some situations a coordinator may be needed to a positive pressure test method. This change
to allow the inactive leaf to close before the was adopted by the International Building Code
active leaf. This ensures proper latching of pairs (IBC) for swinging-type fire doors.
of doors. Some manufacturers are able to sup- Fire doors required to be tested to either method
ply labeled pairs of doors with an open-back may be specified by calling out the test method
strike without an astragal, which eliminates the or by indicating that the product must meet a
need for a coordinator. specific section of a model building code.

6
SDI 118-2012

13 Smoke and draft control to inspect all components of the opening and
Doors that open into corridors that are used for document the results. Adjustments and compo-
a means of egress may be required to have a nent replacement are required if the opening
smoke and draft control rating. Smoke and draft does not comply with the code requirements.
control assemblies are tested for air leakage
per UL 1784 and NFPA 105 and fire protection 17 References
ratings as previously discussed.
ANSI/BHMA A156.1-2006 “American National
13.1 Gaskets
Standard for Butts and Hinges”
Gaskets are required for doors to pass a smoke
and draft control test. The requirement for a ANSI/BHMA A156.3-2008, “American National
gasket also includes the meeting edges of a Standard for Exit Devices”
pair of doors. The gaskets used in a smoke and
draft control assembly must be fire rated and ASTM E119-11 “Standard Test Methods for Fire
be listed for use in a smoke and draft control Tests of Building Construction and Materials”
assembly. A bottom seal is not required for
smoke and draft control assemblies. NFPA 80-2010 “Standard for Fire Doors and
Other Opening Protectives”
13.2 Marking
The IBC requires smoke and draft control as- NFPA 105-2010, “Standard for the Installation
semblies to have an identification mark of “S” of Smoke Door Assemblies and Other Opening
which appears on the door label following the Protectives”
hourly rating. The frame doesn’t require the
“S” mark. NFPA 252-2008 “Standard Methods of Fire
Tests of Door Assemblies”
14 Smoke barrier doors
NFPA 257-2007 “Standard Methods of Fire Tests
The IBC includes a requirement for smoke bar-
of Window Assemblies”
rier doors. These doors need to provide smoke
and fire protection as previously described in Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Safety
this document. The IBC includes an exception
ANSI/UL 9 “Fire Tests of Window Assemblies”
for double egress doors that require that these
doors have the same characteristics of a fire Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Safety
door except a fire protection rating and self
ANSI/UL 10B “Fire Tests of Door Assemblies”
latching are not required. Double egress doors
used in a smoke barrier are used in cross cor- Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Safety
ridor applications. ANSI/UL 10C “Positive Pressure Fire Tests of
15 Field modifications Door Assemblies”

Clarifications for field modifications were added Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Safety
to NFPA 80 in 2007. If the product or compo- ANSI/UL 263, “Fire Tests of Building Construc-
nent requires a field modification, the agency tion and Materials”, 13th Edition, April 4, 2003,
that the product or component was listed with
revisions up to and including October 24, 2007
shall be provided with the description of the
modification. The agency will not have to con- Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Safety
duct a field inspection if they determine that ANSI/UL 305, “Standard for Panic Hardware”,
the modification does not affect the integrity
and fire protection capabilities of the opening. 2007

Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Safety

16 Fire door inspections
ANSI/UL 1784, “Air Leakage Tests of Door As-
NFPA 80 incorporated a requirement for an- semblies”, 2001
nual fire door inspections in the 2007 version
of the standard. Building owners are required International Building Code 2009

7
 MEMBERS OF THE
AVAILABLE PUBLICATIONS STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE
Black Mountain Door
Specifications 310 Flint Drive
Mt. Sterling, KY 40353
ANSI/SDI A250.6 Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcings on Standard
(859) 274-0411
Steel Doors and Frames www.blackmountaindoor.com
ANSI/SDI A250.8 SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors & Ceco Door
Frames 9159 Telecom Drive
SDI-108 Recommended Selection & Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors Milan, TN 38358
(731) 686-8345
SDI-118 Basic Fire Door, Fire Door Frame, Transom/Sidelight Frame, and www.cecodoor.com
Window Frame Requirements
Curries
SDI-128 Guidelines for Acoustical Performance of Standard Steel Doors & P.O. Box 1648
Frames Mason City, IA 50402-1648
(641) 423-1334
SDI-129 Hinge & Strike Spacing
www.curries.com

Test Procedures Deansteel Manufacturing Co.

111 Merchant Street
ANSI/SDI A250.3 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish San Antonio, TX 78204-1496
Coatings for Steel Doors & Frames (210) 226-8271
www.deansteel.com
ANSI/SDI A250.4 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for
Steel Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors DOOR COMPONENTS INC.
7980 Redwood Avenue
ANSI/SDI A250.10 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Fontana, CA 92336-1638
Surfaces for Steel Doors & Frames (909) 770-5700
www.doorcomponents.com
ANSI/SDI A250.13 Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components
for Swinging Door Assemblies Mesker Door, Inc.
3440 Stanwood Boulevard
SDI-113 Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal
Huntsville, AL 35811-9021
Transmittance of Steel Door & Frame Assemblies (256) 851-6670
SDI-131 Accelerated Physical Endurance Test Procedure for Steel Doors, www.meskerdoor.com
Frames and Frame Anchors MPI
319 North Hills Road
Construction Details Corbin, KY 40701
(606) 523-0173
ANSI/SDI A250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames www.metalproductsinc.com
SDI-110 Standard Steel Doors & Frames for Modular Masonry Construction Pioneer Industries, Inc.
SDI-111 Recommended Details for Standard Details Steel Doors, Frames, 171 South Newman Street
Accessories and Related Components Hackensack, NJ 07601
(201) 933-1900
SDI-122 Installation & Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors & www.pioneerindustries.com
Frames
Republic Doors & Frames
SDI-132 Drywall Slip-On Frames 155 Republic Drive
McKenzie, TN 38201-0580
(731) 352-3383
Miscellaneous Documents www.republicdoor.com
ANSI/SDI A250.7 Nomenclature for Standard Steel Doors & Steel Frames Security Metal Products
SDI-112 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors & 5700 Hannum Avenue, Suite 250
Frames Culver City, CA 90230
(310) 641-6690
SDI-117 Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors & Frames www.secmet.com
SDI-124 Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors & Frames Steelcraft
SDI-127 Industry Alert Series (A-L) Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies
9017 Blue Ash Road
SDI-130 Electrified Hinge Preparations Cincinnati, OH 45242
(513) 745-6400
AUDIO-VISUAL PROGRAMS ON VHS ALSO AVAILABLE www.steelcraft.com

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
440.899.0010 • FAX 440.892.1404
8/30/2012 www.steeldoor.org
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
122 - 07

Installation
and
Troubleshooting Guide
for
Standard
Steel Doors and Frames

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD · CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2007 Steel Door Institute
CONTENTS

Foreword.......................................................................................................................................................................... ii

Purpose ............................................................................................................................................................................ ii

Improper Door / Frame Clearance ............................................................................................................................ 1

Hinge Bind Against Rabbet......................................................................................................................................... 6

Hinge Bind Against Stops............................................................................................................................................ 7

Twisted Door................................................................................................................................................................... 8

Twisted Door Adjustments.......................................................................................................................................... 9

Twisted Frame .............................................................................................................................................................. 11

Frame Set out of Square ............................................................................................................................................ 12

Frame with Rabbets Toed In or Out........................................................................................................................ 16

Mutes .............................................................................................................................................................................. 18

Lock Fits Loose on Strike ........................................................................................................................................... 19

Lock Fits Too Tight in Strike ...................................................................................................................................... 20

Lockset Off Location on Door or Strike Off Location in Frame in Wall ......................................................... 21

Miter Not Closed on Frame....................................................................................................................................... 22

Clearance at Bottom of Door Too Small ................................................................................................................ 23

Frame and Door Hinge Misalignment .................................................................................................................... 24

Frame Loose on Drywall ............................................................................................................................................ 26

Glazed Window Units ................................................................................................................................................. 30

Label Missing from Fire-Rated Frame..................................................................................................................... 31

Label Missing from Fire-Rated Door....................................................................................................................... 32

Paint Problems ............................................................................................................................................................. 33

Water Stain Damage ................................................................................................................................................... 34

Thermal Bow ................................................................................................................................................................. 35

FOREWORD
The material contained in this document has been developed under the auspices of the Technical Committee of
the Steel Door Institute.
The Steel Door Institute does not condone or encourage repair methods which would adversely affect product
performance or violate and/or void product warranties.
The user of this document assumes all responsibility associated with but not limited to product performance and
violation of product warranties for any product associated with the installation and suggested repair methods in
this document.

PURPOSE
The intent of this document is to cover field installation problems most commonly experienced with standard
steel door and frame installations. It should be understood that most problems encountered are because of
inappropriate application of the products and/or improper installation.
The suggested method of repairs requires only basic hand tools and relatively little time. It should be understood
that more complex problems or compound problems could exist which warrant extensive field repairs and
modification to products. These types of field installation problems are not intended to be covered in this
document and should not be made without first consulting the manufacturer.
Technical Data Series SDI 122-2007

SDI-122
Installation and Troubleshooting Guide
for Standard Steel Doors and Frames

IMPROPER DOOR / FRAME CLEARANCE

To insure proper door and frame function, the clearance between the door and frame must be properly
maintained. All standard steel door and frame manufacturers closely hold tolerances that result in a nominal
clearance between the door and frame of 1⁄8 inch. If this clearance is not maintained, interference and hardware
misalignment will occur.
Proper installation is extremely important in establishing clearances and preventing a multitude of potential
problems.
The Steel Door Institute has many publications which were developed to establish industry standards and
assist in specifying as well as installing standard steel doors and frames. One publication, ANSI/SDI 250.11,
Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames, will be of assistance regarding the erection and installation of
standard steel frames.

&7&/ %VEN CLEARANCE 6/&7&/

  BETWEEN DOOR AND
FRAME n ALL AROUND n
 NOMINAL v
BETWEEN EDGE OF
DOOR AND RABBET

6/&7&/
&7&/
6/&7&/
&7&/

$0/4*45"/5
6/%&3$65 */$0/4*45"/5
6/%&3$65

&WFO
$MFBSBODFT 6OFWFO
$MFBSBODFT

1
SDI 122-2007

IMPROPER DOOR / FRAME CLEARANCE (continued)

Is door sagging?
If sag cannot be corrected and door and frames
returned to plumb relationship, repositioning or
shimming the strike may relieve this condition.
Additional filing maybe required (refer to page 20,
“Lock Fits Too Tight in Strike”)

Is the door binding?

Frames which are out of plumb are frequently the
causes of faulty operation of locksets and binding of
bolts in the strike. Check carefully.

Are hinges loose?

If hinge screw does not remain tight, the screw can be
held in place by the use of a “locktite” type product which
prevents the screw from loosening. Additionally, “Nyloc”
type fasteners can be used to replace the normal machine
screws.

Are hinges worn?

If excessive wear has occurred on hinge knuckles, the door
will not be held tightly. Replace hinges.

Are hinges properly swaged?

The hinge manufacturer’s specifications
should be checked to determine what the
proper hinge swage should be.
Standard swaging of
Swaging is a slight offset of the hinge leaf at standard-weight and
the barrel which permits the leaves to come heavy-weight full mortise
together. hinges, when closed to the
parallel position, provides
a 1⁄16” clearance between
leaves.

2
 SDI 122-2007

IMPROPER DOOR / FRAME CLEARANCE (continued)

Remove top hinge filler for non-handed

doors
The improper clearance condition may be
improved by removing the top hinge leaf
attached to the door and taking out the
filler (hinge filler) from behind the leaf. Once
completed, reattach hinge leaf to door. A hinge
filler is used on all non-handed doors.

Add shims to bottom and/or middle

hinge
On handed or non-handed doors, the lower half
of the door can be shifted upward and toward the
strike jamb. Remove the screws which attach the
middle and/or bottom hinge(s) to the door. Insert
shims between the hinge leaf and door. Reattach
hinge leaf to door.

Standard-weight to heavy-weight hinge modifications

Although styles and types vary, many manufacturers offer built-in features that allow hinge pockets on doors
and frames to be modified from standard-weight to heavy-weight. Examples of the different methods are:
grinding or flattening down raised embossments in shim plates or reinforcements; removing or breaking off
hinge filler shim plates; adjusting set screws; and removing wire shims. These options all involve removing
material from the pocket to allow for heavy-weight depth to be achieved. As always, check with individual
manufacturers to determine the type of modifications offered.

3
SDI 122-2007

IMPROPER DOOR / FRAME CLEARANCE (continued)

HEADER
Reswaging hinges
The following example shows how a hinge leaf
can be reswaged to correct minor improper door/
frame clearances. This particular method allows
HINGE the reswaging to be accomplished while the door
PIN remains in the opening and the hinge leaves remain
on the door and frame. The example shows a top
hinge reswaged to correct a sag-type condition.
HINGE JAMB However, any of the hinges can be reswaged in this
manner to compensate for conditions opposite to
that of a sag condition.

1. Remove top hinge pin.

DOOR LOCK
EDGE

STRIKE JAMB

CLEARANCE

2. Use a screwdriver to set the clearance between

the lock edge of the door and strike jamb.

HINGE LEAF
KNUCKLE ON FRAME

HINGE LEAF
KNUCKLE ON DOOR

3. Hinge knuckle will now be misaligned.

4
 SDI 122-2007

IMPROPER DOOR / FRAME CLEARANCE (continued)

Reswaging hinges (continued)

As shown, the hinge leaf knuckles on the door move
to a new location once the clearance at the strike jamb
is set. The hinge leaf knuckles on the frame must now
be reswaged (bent) to align with the new location of
the hinge leaf knuckles on the door. The simplest way
to do this is to use a 5⁄8” – 11⁄16” tube wrench (a crescent
wrench will do as a second choice). Simply slip the tube
wrench down around the 1st knuckle and align it with the
new location. Once the first knuckle has been aligned,
the wrench will now slip down to the 2nd knuckle for
alignment. Repeat the process on the third knuckle. 5/8

1ST
2ND
3RD

4. Reswage and align hinge knuckles.

HINGE PIN

5. Re-insert the hinge pin and remove the screwdriver.

NOTE: As always, caution should be exercised when the hinge

leaves are not removed. Excessive pressure could damage doors/
frames. As an alternate reswaging method, the hinge can be
removed and clamped in a vise for reswaging.

5
SDI 122-2007

HINGE BIND AGAINST RABBET

Normally, hinge bind is found between the door and rabbet. There are several ways of shimming which will
move the door in different directions. The following guidelines should be used in shim applications.

$- )*/(& */$3&"4&%
("1
#"33&- 4)*.
)*/(& )*/(&
3&*/'
+".#

1. A shim can be placed between the frame /05
'-64)

hinge reinforcement and the hinge leaf. This
%003
will move the door towards the strike jamb.
However, the hinge notch face gap will be
increased and the hinge leaf surface will not be
flush with the rabbet surface.

$- )*/(&
#"33&-
)*/(&
+".#
)*/(&
3&*/'

/05
'-64)

2. A shim can be placed between the door and

%003 the hinge leaf. This will also move the door
*/$3&"4&% towards the strike jamb. However, an increased
("1 4)*.
gap will be created by the shim and the hinge
leaf surface will not be flush with the backset
surface on the door.

$- )*/(&
#"33&- 4)*.
)*/(& )*/(&
3&*/'
+".#

3. To minimize the gaps and the allow the hinge %003

leaf surfaces to remain flush with the rabbet
and backset surfaces, two shims, each half the 4)*.

thickness of those used above, could be used.

6
 SDI 122-2007

HINGE BIND AGAINST STOPS

Hinge bind against the frame stops is another item to consider. There are several ways of shimming which will
move the door in the desired direction. The following guideline should be used in shim application.

$- )*/(& $- )*/(&
#"33&- )*/(& 4)*.
# #"33&- )*/(&
+".# )*/(& +".# 4)*.
% )*/(&
3&*/' 3&*/'

%003
%003 4)*.
$
4)*.
"
9
:

4IJNT
"
BOE
# 4IJNT
$
BOE
%

Adjustment of Clearance Between the Door and the Frame

May be Accomplished by the Following:
1. Using Shim “A” only, door will be relocated in direction of Arrow “X”.
2. Using Shim “B” only, will move both door and centerline of hinge barrel in direction of Arrow “X”.
3. Using both Shims “A” and “B” will relocate the door in direction of Arrow “X” by a greater amount than by using
Shim “B” alone.
4. Using Shim “C” only, door will be relocated in direction of Arrow “Y”.
5. Using Shim “D” only, both door and centerline of hinge barrel will move in direction of Arrow “Y”.
6. Using both Shims “C” and “D” will relocate the door in direction of Arrow “Y” by a greater amount than by using
either “C” or “D” alone. The centerline of hinge barrel will be relocated the same as by using Shim “D” alone.

7
SDI 122-2007

TWISTED DOOR
Normal installation results in the plane of the door face being parallel
with the plane of the frame face. If the frame is square and plumb, all face
surfaces of the frame will be in the same plane. A twisted door will “break
through” the frame’s face plane surface. BE SURE the frame is square and
plumb. If it is not, the problem is probably with the frame installation and
NOT the door. %003
+".#

'"$&
0'
%003

4)06-%
#&

1"3"--&-
8*5)

*."(*/"3:
1-"/&

"$3044
'"$&4
0'

'3".&

+".#

*."(*/"3:
1-"/&
"$3044
'"$&4
0'
'3".&4

%PPS
i#SFBL5ISPVHIw
PS
i5XJTUw
DBO
CF
GPVOE
JO

EJõFSFOU
MPDBUJPOT
PO
EJõFSFOU
EPPST
6TVBMMZ
JU

JT
GPVOE
EJBHPOBMMZ
CFUXFFO
PQQPTJUF
MPXFS

BOE
VQQFS
DPSOFST

8
 SDI 122-2007

TWISTED DOOR ADJUSTMENTS

When required, it is possible to “spring” the door back to (or much closer to) its ideal position of being parallel
with the imaginary plane across the faces of the frame. This can usually be done with the door remaining in the
frame. A piece of wood blocking must be placed between the door and frame. Pressure is then applied at the
twisted area to “spring” the door. However, caution should be exercised on drywall installations since the frame
could possibly work lose from the wall, particularly with slip-on drywall type frames.

Twisted at Top
When the top lock area of a door is “breaking-through”
the imaginary plane, place a wood block on floor,
between door and frame as shown. Apply pressure to
the top lock area as shown to “spring” door back into
position. Remove wood block, close door and check
condition. Repeat if necessary.

7//$
",/#+

7//$
",/#+

Twisted at Bottom
When the bottom lock area of door is “breaking-
through” the imaginary plane, place a wood block
between frame head and door as shown. Apply
pressure to the bottom lock area as shown to “spring”
door back into position. Remove wood, close door and
check condition. Repeat if necessary.

9
SDI 122-2007

TWISTED DOOR ADJUSTMENTS (continued)

An alternate method can also be used which will allow the door to remain in the opening. This method might be
appropriate in drywall installations as previously mentioned. Although the example shown deflects the top half
of the door, this method could be used on the bottom half of the door as well.

40-*%
800%

41"$&3
£

16--
%08/

508"3%
56#*/(
$-".1 8*5)
$-".1

-0$"5&
$-".1
$-".1 +645
#&-08
10*/5
0'
#08

40-*%
800%
$-".1 41"$&3
£

56#*/(
46$)
"4

9

9
ž
8"--
4536$563&
%003

10
 SDI 122-2007

TWISTED FRAME
Wall conditions and anchoring methods can cause the frame to be “twisted” in the opening. The two jamb
(hinge and strike) faces are not in the same imaginary plane as discussed in the twisted door section. This can be
checked by using a level and/or plumb bob. Frames do not have adjustments when it comes to “twist”.
The “twist” condition is generally caused by the wall conditions. The frame jamb faces are prevented from being
set in the same plane because the walls are out of plane to begin with.
The options available to correct this problem depend, to a large extent, on the wall construction.

-&7&-

+".#

¡

¡
$)&$,

8*5)
-&7&-

5IJT
KBNC
JT
OPU
MFWFM
6TJOH
B

MFWFM
PS
QMVNC
CPC
XJMM
TIPX

XIJDI
XBZ
UIF
CPUUPN
PG
UIF

GSBNF
NVTU
NPWF

1-6.#
#0#

11
SDI 122-2007

FRAME SET OUT OF SQUARE

Proper frame installation cannot be overemphasized. In the majority
of wall constructions, (“slip-on” drywall type frames being the
major exception) “quick” or “easy” field fixes are limited. Improperly
set frames that are drastically out of square will cause severe door
and hardware problems. These types of situations would require
extensive field repair and may result in having to remove frames
from walls to gain access to frame anchoring.
If the “out of square” condition is slight, some adjustment can be
made by shimming and/or adjusting anchors, particularly if the
frame being worked on is a slip-on drywall type.
The most versatile frame to work with in correcting these types Corner Clip
of conditions is the “slip-on” drywall frame. The manufacturers’ Header to jamb connection
instructions should be referenced, but generally most “slip-on”
drywall frames have a sill anchor at the bottom of the jamb and a
compression anchor between the top hinge and the header. Also,
most jambs have corner clips that have a hole to accept a screw. The
corner clip and hole align with a hole in the header. The adjustment
of slip-on drywall frames can be made using these anchors or corner
clips.

¡ ¡

"

Compression Anchor
(Cut-away view)

PROPERLY SET FRAME

All corners are 90º. The dimension taken
at Point “A” is equal to the dimension
checked at Point “B”. Both hinge and
strike jambs are plumb and level.
Sill Anchors
Snap-in type or screw type

12
 SDI 122-2007

FRAME SET OUT OF SQUARE (continued)

The following examples illustrate how a frame can be set out of square.

¡ ¡ IMPROPERLY SET FRAME (A)

One corner is greater than 90º and one corner is less than 90º. The miters
do not properly align with one another and “gaps” are created in the miters
which are opposites of one another. The dimension taken at point “A” would
" remain the same when checked at point “B” if the 90º corners are out of
square an equal number of degrees.
This condition can be corrected by adjusting the compression anchors in
and/or out of each jamb as required. Loosen the corner clip screws if the
frame is so equipped before making adjustments; retighten when finished.
The compression anchors must be adjusted (turned) in opposite directions
# to allow the jambs to move.
For the illustration shown, the strike jamb compression anchor screw
must be turned counterclockwise to retract the compression anchor
and give room for the frame to be adjusted back into position using the
hinge jamb compression anchor. The hinge jamb compression anchor
screw is then turned clockwise to advance the anchor and push the
frame towards the room made at the strike jamb. The frame should
be brought into square
with the header and the hinge jamb compression anchor. Once this
is done, the strike jamb compression anchor screw can be turned
clockwise, advancing the anchor snug against the stud. The corner
slip screws should then be retightened.

13
SDI 122-2007

FRAME SET OUT OF SQUARE (continued)

IMPROPERLY SET FRAME (B)

¡ ¡
The corners are both greater than or less than 90º. The miters
do not properly align with one another. When the corner is
less than 90º the miter will have a gap which increases as it
goes towards the return. When the corner is greater than 90º
the miter will have a gap, which increases as it goes towards
" the rabbet. Dimensions taken at point “A” and “B” will not
be equal. This condition will always result in dimension “B”
being either greater than or less than the nominal opening
dimension which would be obtained if checked between
jambs along the header.

95° 95°

Jambs Toed In at Sill

A

To correct this condition, the sill anchors must be

loosened to allow the bottom of each jamb to be
moved in and/or out. In the case of the snap-in type
sill anchor, the baseboard trim might have to be B
removed to gain access to the anchors. This type of
anchor is generally used because it can be hidden by
covering it with the baseboard trim.
If the jambs are toed in at the sills, the compression
anchors might have to be retracted slightly so the
sill (base) of the jambs can be pushed out. The jambs
should be plumbed, squared with the header and
leveled as they are pushed out into their proper Jambs Toed Out at Sill
position. The sill anchors should be reset, the
compression anchors adjusted and retightened. The
baseboard trim should be reattached to the wall if it had been removed.
A similar procedure should be used if the jambs are toed out at the sills. The
sill (base) of the jambs should be pushed in towards the opening. The jambs
should be plumbed, squared with the header and leveled as they are pushed
into their proper position. The sill anchors should be reset, the compression
anchors adjusted (extended) and retightened. The baseboard trim should be
reattached to the wall if it had been removed.

14
 SDI 122-2007

FRAME SET OUT OF SQUARE (continued)

IMPROPERLY SET FRAME (C) 90° 95°

One corner is properly set at 90º while the other
corner is greater or less than 90º. The dimension
taken at point “A” will constantly change when
checked at various points going towards point “B.”
The corner miter will not properly align between the A

header and jamb which is not set at 90º

The jamb which is not 90º to the header must be
moved. To correct this condition, the sill anchor must
be loosened to allow the bottom of the jamb to be
moved in or out as required. In the case of the snap- B

in type sill anchor, the baseboard trim may have to

be removed to gain access to the anchor. This type of
anchor is generally used because it can be hidden by
covering it with the baseboard trim.

One Jamb Toed Out

¡ ¡

If the jamb is toed in at the sill, the compression

"
anchor may have to be retracted slightly so the sill
(base) of the jamb can be pushed out. The jamb
should be plumbed, squared with the header and
leveled as it is being pushed out into its proper
position. The sill anchor should be reset, the
compression anchor adjusted and retightened. The
baseboard trim should be reattached to the wall if it
had been removed.
#
A similar procedure should be used when the jamb
is toed out at the sill. The sill (base) of the jamb
should be pushed in towards the opening. The jamb
should be plumbed, squared with the header and
leveled as it is pushed into its proper position. The
sill anchor should be reset, the compression anchor
adjusted (fastened) and retightened. The baseboard
One Jamb Toed In trim should be reattached to the wall if it had been
removed.

15
SDI 122-2007

FRAME WITH RABBETS TOED IN OR OUT

The importance of proper initial frame installation is evident in this condition. In the majority of wall
constructions, except for the “slip-on” drywall type frames, “quick,” “easy” field fixes are limited. Improperly set
frames which have the rabbets drastically toed in or out would require extensive field repair and in most cases
require that the wall be entered to gain access to frame anchoring.
The toed in or out condition is worse near the floor. The header prevents the upper portion of the jambs from
toeing in or out but as you move away from the header towards the floor, the jambs have greater potential to be
toed in our out during installation.
The only frame with this condition which can be corrected with little difficulty is the “slip-on” drywall frame. Since
the “slip-on” drywall frame uses only compression anchors near the head and sill anchors near the bottom of the
jambs, this condition is easily corrected.

".06/5
0' 1-"/&
0'
8"--
50&
065 ¡
Note that the rabbet surfaces are not
90° to the plane of the wall. This can
be checked by placing a straight edge
across the face of both jambs.
The straight edge should set flat
across both faces at the same time. If
¡ the jambs are twisted, a “gap” will be
".06/5
0' 1-"/&
0'
8"--
50&
065 created as shown in the figure to the
1"3"--&-
50
1-"/&
0'
8"-- left.

Typical toed-in or out condition

The figures to the right show the two typical !

types of sill anchors used on the “slip-on”
drywall frame.
“A” shows an anchor which will be covered
up by the baseboard trim. To gain access to
this anchor the baseboard trim must first be
removed. Next, the nails or screws holding the
anchors to the wall must be removed. This will
loosen the jamb and allow it to be squared in
the opening.
“B” illustrates a screw going through the face of
the frame into the wall. This holds the sill of the
frame in position. This screw is exposed and "
is readily accessible. Removing the screw will
loosen the jamb and allow it to be “squared-
up” in the opening. If both jambs are toed in/
out, they both should be “squared-up.” This can
be checked by taking measurements as shown below. Both the “A” and “B” dimensions will be the same when the
frames are properly set. However, the frame jambs must be plumb, level, and square with the head of the frame.

16
 SDI 122-2007

FRAME WITH RABBETS TOED IN OR OUT (continued)

%*.
"

%*.
#

If both jambs are toed in/out, they both should be “squared-up.” This can be checked by taking measurements as
shown above. Both the “A” and “B” dimensions will be the same when the frames are properly set.
The below figure shows a condition which can give the impression that the frame is properly installed. Both
dimensions “A” and “B” will be equal but the frame will not be square in the opening. Both jambs can be twisted
to create a parallelogram. This can be checked by placing a straight edge across the face of both jambs (the
straight edge is represented by the dotted line shown below. The straight edge should set flat across both faces
at the same time. If the jambs are twisted, a “gap” will be created as shown in the illustration. The “gaps” will be
to the same side if a parallelogram was created. The gaps could also be to opposite sides as shown in the Typical
Toed In or Out Condition figure on the previous page.
This condition can be corrected as outlined for the other “toe out” or “toe in” examples.

%*.
"

("1
("1
¡
¡
%*.
#

1"3"--&-
50

1-"/&
0'
8"--

17
SDI 122-2007

MUTES
Some manufacturers provide a mute hole in the frame stop to accept a push-in mute. A “stick-on” mute is also
available for application to frames without the mute hole. The mute acts as a “rubber bumper” which evenly
holds the door off the stop at a constant distance. If the door is held off of the stop rather than being allowed to
move slightly towards the stop, the latch tube will fit tighter into the strike. Three mutes are placed on the strike
jamb, one toward the top of the jamb (nearer the header) and one toward the bottom of the jamb (nearer the
sill) and the third near the strike preparation.

18
 SDI 122-2007

LOCK FITS LOOSE ON STRIKE

This condition cannot be caused by an improperly set door and/or frame. If the lockset on the door was not
properly aligned with the strike on the frame, interference would occur or the latch bolt would bind in the strike.
Since this is not the case; the cause is something other than improper installation. The following should be
checked:

PROPER STRIKE
Is the proper strike plate attached to the frame?

RIM EXIT DEVICES

An adjustable strike plate is provided. Is the strike plate
properly adjusted to prove positive and secure latching?

19
SDI 122-2007

LOCK FITS TOO TIGHT IN STRIKE

Proper installation of the door and frame are essential. If the door and frame are not properly aligned, the latch
bolt could bind in the strike. The following items should be checked:

IMPROPER CLEARANCE/DOOR SAG

For various conditions, refer to page 4.

HINGE BIND
For various conditions of hinge bind, refer to page 6.

TWISTED DOOR
For various conditions of twisted doors, refer to page 8.

TWISTED FRAMES
For various conditions of twisted frames, refer to page 11.

FRAME SET OUT OF SQUARE

For various conditions of frames set out of square,
refer to page 12.

PROPER STRIKE
Is the proper strike plate attached to the frame?

The previously mentioned items

should be checked and any problems
&
corrected. If the latch continues to
'*- tightly engage the strike, additional
clearance can be created by filing the
strike or bending the latch bolt lip as
shown. However, this should only be
done as a final option.
#&/%

20
 SDI 122-2007

LOCKSET OFF LOCATION ON DOOR OR

STRIKE OFF LOCATION IN FRAME IN WALL
Minor location adjustments usually can be accomplished by altering the strike plate. The strike plate alteration
would “extend” the opening to allow the latch tube to properly engage the strike. This is similar to the section
“Lock Fits Too Tight in Strike” except that the amount of material removed from the strike is greater. This could
compensate for minor mislocation of the strike plate on the frame and/or location of the lockset on the door.
These general steps should be followed for modifying the strike plate.

MARK AREA
TO BE REMOVED

• Mark the area on the strike plate which must

be removed.
• Remove strike plate from frame.
• Center punch corners of area to be removed
and drill a 1⁄8” diameter hole in each corner.
• Use a saber saw and cut from the existing
opening up to the 1⁄8” diameter holes. The
remaining material between the two 1⁄8” holes
should be filed away.
• Dress off all rough edges and corners with
a file. This must be done since any irregular
edges or edges with burrs could cause the
latch tube to “drag” or “hang up” in the strike
plate. DRILL HOLES

• Reassemble strike plate to frame and check

alignment with lockset on door as well as latch
tube function in and out of strike plate.

CUT

21
SDI 122-2007

MITER NOT CLOSED ON FRAME

The major cause of miters not properly lining up and “closing” is incorrect installation. The effects of improper
installation on miter seams are covered under the previous section of “Frame Set Out of Square.” This section
should be referenced for detailed explanations of conditions which could occur, and solutions for correcting the
problems.
This condition could also be caused by conditions as explained in the “Frame Loose on Drywall” section—figures
on page 28.

22
 SDI 122-2007

CLEARANCE AT BOTTOM OF DOOR TOO SMALL

The available options for correcting this problem are limited. Frames which are permanently anchored to the
wall construction (such as masonry or steel stud) leave few alternatives. The only available “fix” is to trim the
bottom of the door, if the door’s construction will permit trimming. As shown in the figure below, the nominal
“sill clearance” should be ¾ of an inch. The sill clearance is the dimension from the bottom of the door to the
bottom of the frame jambs, and ¾” is a standard industry wide dimension.
The frame jambs should be set at
floor level which then results in ¾ of
an inch between the bottom of the
door and floor.
The ¾ “ also provides enough room
to allow the installation of a “raised
sill” which is a type of flat threshold.
If a raised sill is used, the ¾ inch
clearance is decreased to 3⁄8 inch.
Before any alterations are made the
door height dimensions should be %*.
# %*.
"
checked.
The door height is determined by
taking a measurement represented
by dimension “A” in the figure. If
the door height is “oversize” the
clearance at the bottom will be too
small.
The frame jamb height (which £ '-003

-*/&
is the same as the opening
height) is determined by taking
a measurement represented by
dimension “B”. If the jam height is
“undersize,” the clearance at the
bottom will be too small.
The bottom of the frame jams should be set “on” the floor not “in” the floor. In some special cases the jambs can
be set “in” the floor but this requires special design consideration and adjustments in door height and jamb
heights. If this was not compensated for in the designed heights, the clearance at the bottom could be too small.
By taking these basic dimensions, you can confirm what element of the opening is in error. If trimming the
bottom of the door is considered, you must make sure that the door’s design will allow such a modification to
be made. It is best to contact the distributor or the manufacturer to determine if and how much the door can be
trimmed. These types of trimming modifications can be relatively simple or more extensive depending on door
design.

UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHOULD MODIFICATIONS BE MADE TO FIRE-RATED-LABELED DOORS

AND FRAMES.

23
SDI 122-2007

FRAME AND DOOR HINGE MISALIGNMENT

Frame and door hinge misalignment can cause a variety of problems. When misalignment occurs, either the
door’s hinge locations or frame’s hinge locations are slightly off. This can apply to retrofitting existing openings
where either the door or frame is being replaced, but not both. When new doors and frames are provided from a
single manufacturer, this problem does not exist.
The example shown on the following page reflects the dropping of the hinge leaf which attaches to the door
from its relationship to the hinge leaf on the frame. However, by removing material from the opposite end of
the knuckles, the door hinge leaf could be raised as well. The frame hinge leaf can also be relocated in similar
fashion.

)*/(&
-&"'
0/
'3".&

.*4"-*(/.&/5
)*/(&
-&"'
0/
%003

o
.645
.07&
%08/

1301&3

$-&"3"/$&

24
 SDI 122-2007

FRAME AND DOOR HINGE MISALIGNMENT (continued)

Hinge leaf Hinge leaf on door
on frame (must move down)

Since the hinge leaf on the door must

move down, material must be taken
off of he knuckles as shown. Mark the
amount to be removed equal to the
misalignment.

Hinge pin

Hinge leaf on frame Hinge leaf on door

Disassemble hinge.
Remove material on
knuckles equal to the
misalignment.

Hinge leaf Hinge leaf

on frame on door

Reassemble hinge leaves and insert hinge pin.

Note: Gaps will now exist between the
knuckles in the areas shown. Proper thickness
and diameter flat washers can be placed in
these areas during hinge assembly.

25
SDI 122-2007

FRAME LOOSE ON DRYWALL

Frame manufacturers closely control the dimensions to which their frames are manufactured. Since automated
equipment is used these dimensions are easily repeated from piece to piece. The majority of cases where frames
are loose on drywall will reveal that the overall wall thickness has not been properly maintained. Wall thickness
conditions can vary from undersize to oversize. The thickness should be checked, if possible, to verify the wall’s
compliance with the job specification.
Frames installed in drywall walls can use two different anchoring methods:

WELDED/SNAP-IN STEEL, OR WOOD STUD ANCHORS

Some frames use welded or snapped-in steel or wood stud anchors. These frames are installed prior to the
drywall material being attached to the studs. The drywall can either be “butted-up” against the return of the
frame or be “tucked in” behind the return of the frame. Only in the installation where the drywall is “tucked in”
behind the return can there be a condition where the frame is loose on the drywall. This gap could be uniform
along the entire length (height) of the jamb or could be only in certain areas. Since the frame cannot be
removed, the only available options are to caulk the gap or cover it with trim.

%SZXBMM
iUVDLFE
JOw

CFIJOE
GSBNF
SFUVSO

$BVMLJOH
PS
USJN

("1

26
 SDI 122-2007

FRAME LOOSE ON DRYWALL (continued)

DRYWALL FRAMES WITH COMPRESSION ANCHORS

These frames are intended to be installed after the wall construction is complete. The anchoring methods that
this type of frame uses allows the removal of the frame if so desired. The manufacturers’ installation instructions
should be followed anytime the frame is removed and reinstalled. Three conditions could exist for drywall slip-on
frames which are “loose on the wall.”
1) The first condition is a uniform gap along the entire length (height) of the frame jambs. The frame should be
removed from the opening and the wall thickness checked at numerous places around the opening. These
measurements should be compared to the job specifications. If the wall thickness is undersize, two options
are available.
a) If the gap is relatively small, the use of caulking or trim can be considered to cover the gap when the
frame is installed.
b) If the gap is larger, the use of “spacers” can offset the lacking wall thickness. The use of spacers requires
that the frame be removed from the opening, the spacer(s) attached, and the frame reinstalled. The
spacers can be used on either one or both of the frame returns which would result in spacers on either
one side or both sides of the wall. Spacers are available from the frame manufacturer.

SPACERS ARE NOT TO BE USED ON LABELED FIRE DOOR FRAMES.

6TF
TQBDFS
PO
6TF
TQBDFS
PO

POF
SFUVSO CPUI
SFUVSOT

4QBDFS

Check wall thickness

27
SDI 122-2007

FRAME LOOSE ON DRYWALL (continued)

2) The second condition would be a gap that

changes along the length (height) of the
jamb. This condition is generally found
in steel stud construction and results in
“over thick” walls in the upper corners
of the opening, refer to Figure 5. This is
usually a direct result of how the steel
stud headers were attached to the vertical
steel studs to form the opening. When the
wall is oversize (in this area) it will force
the header and jamb miters to spread
apart and actually open up the throat
dimensions to accept the oversize wall.
This will cause the corners of the frame to
be extremely tight on the wall and as you
progress down the jamb, a gap will begin
to develop and then gradually disappear
closer to the floor, see figure on following
page. Areas where wall thickness
may be over-thick in steel-
stud construction.

*;&
&34
--
07
8"

)&"%

+".#

Frame spreads apart with oversize wall.

28
 SDI 122-2007

FRAME LOOSE ON DRYWALL (continued)

)&"%
This condition should be reported to the appropriate
jobsite personnel. The condition can be corrected by
putting a bearing plate on each side of the corner
and compressing the internal steel studs with a
clamp. However, the responsibility for correcting this
condition belongs to the sub-contractor responsible )5
for the actual wall construction. 5*(
+".#
4&
$ 3&"
1
*/
("
4&
$ 3&"
1
*/
("

"4&
& $3&
1
%
("
&
$3 &"4
1
%&
("
$-".1
'*5
1 &3

130

Gap produced by oversized wall.

Correct oversized wall

condition by compressing
internal steel studs.

3) The third condition is different from the first two which address the “fit” of the frame over the wall thickness.
The cause of this condition is compression anchors which have not been tightened. The drywall frame would
then be loose across the width of the opening and move from side to side against the rough opening.
The frame should be plumbed, squared and secured in the opening by properly adjusting the compression
anchors following the manufacturers’ instructions.

29
SDI 122-2007

GLAZED WINDOW UNITS

Hollow metal borrowed lite, transom, and combination sidelite frames are an excellent choice for exterior
openings due to their design flexibility, thermal performance, and security. These types of frames are not factory
sealed to prevent water infiltration; the contractor/installer must seal all joints that are exposed to the elements
after the frame assembly is installed.
Whenever possible it is strongly recommended that the glass and glazing be installed on the exterior rabbet of
the frame. This will act as a deterrent to water penetration.
Manufacturers cannot control the workmanship associated with the installation of these types of frames,
therefore, this work must be specified in the installation/glazing/caulking section of specifications.

30
 SDI 122-2007

LABEL MISSING FROM FIRE-RATED FRAME

Like doors, fire-rated frames are an important element of compliance with building codes and fire protection
standards. Consequently, proper control of the labels which are attached to the frame is top priority for the
manufacturer, code official and labeling agency. (The manufacturer must account for every label used and
the label can only be applied at the manufacturer’s facility or at an authorized labeling distributor of the
manufacturer.) Once the product is in the field, whether it is installed or not, no one, including the manufacturer
is permitted to attach labels unless a representative of the manufacturer’s labeling agency has inspected the
product for compliance with the manufacturer’s procedures. Only authorized individuals can be in possession of
and attach labels to fire rated products in the field. Anything else is ILLEGAL!
All labels on fire rated frames are located on the hinge jamb between the top and middle hinge (see figure
below). It should be noted that some frames have an embossed label, rather than a surface-attached label. The
embossed label is stamped into the frame rabbet and can be painted over.
If the label or embossment is not present, the frame distributor should be contacted.

501
)*/(&

-"#&-

Special Notes:
• Borrowed light frames may have .*%%-&
)*/(&
labels applied to soffit of frame
due to glass and glazing bead
location.
• Frames incorporating continuous
hinges may have labels applied to
soffit or frame head.
• See manufacturer’s procedures.

31
SDI 122-2007

LABEL MISSING FROM FIRE-RATED DOOR

Fire-rated doors are an important element of compliance with building codes and fire protection standards.
Consequently, proper control of the labels is top priority for the manufacturer, code official and labeling agency.
(The manufacturer must account for every label used and the label can only be applied at the manufacturer’s
facility or at an authorized labeling distributor of the manufacturer.) Once the product is in the field, whether
it’s installed or not, no one, including the manufacturer is permitted to attach labels unless a representative of
the manufacturer’s labeling agency has inspected the product for compliance with the manufacturer’s labeling
procedures. Only authorized individuals may be in possession of and attach labels to fire rated products in the
field. Anything else is ILLEGAL!
Labels on fire-rated doors are located in one of two places, either between the top and middle hinge, or on the
top channel (see figure). Be sure you are looking for the label in the correct location.
If the label is not present, the door distributor should be contacted.

501
$)"//&-

Special Notes:
501
)*/(&
• Labeled doors incorporating continu-
ous hinges may have labels placed on
the top channel of the door. Check
with the individual manufacturer to
-"#&- determine location of label.
• Labeled hollow metal transom panels
may need to be removed to verify
labeling if fully enclosed by a fixed
hollow metal frame.
• See manufacturer’s procedures.
.*%%-&
)*/(&

#0550.
)*/(&

32
 SDI 122-2007

PAINT PROBLEMS

PAINT PEELING TO BARE METAL

Two conditions exist that must be considered when evaluating paint peeling to bare metal.

1. Prime Paint Only

If the product is only prime painted, and peeling has occurred, then poor adhesion between the primer and bare
metal has occurred. This can usually be attributed to inadequate surface preparation before prime painting. The
bare metal must be adequately prepared to ensure good prime paint adhesion.
The door should be completely sanded, washed with solvent and re-primed. The sanding and washing
operations provide an adequate surface to assure good primer adhesion.

2. Prime Paint and Top (Finish) Coat

The failure could be caused by either poor surface preparation before prime painting or the use of a non-
compatible finish paint that has reacted with the primer and lifted all paint from bare metal. In either case the
corrective measure would be the same. The door should be completely sanded and washed with an appropriate
solvent. The door should then be re-primed. Lightly sand the prime coat, wipe and finish-paint with a compatible
top coat.
Whenever the door is being prepared for top or finish-coat painting the surface should be cleaned. Use the same
solvent that will be used to thin the topcoat paint and thoroughly clean all surfaces to be painted.

PAINT IN TAPPED HOLES

Both hollow metal doors and frames have various holes that are drilled and tapped. These holes are in various
components such as reinforcements. All of the components are brought together as an assembly prior to the
painting operation.
There are a variety of painting methods manufacturers can use. Some of these methods can result in paint build-
up in the tapped holes of the reinforcements. This build-up can make installation of screws difficult. The build-up
should be removed to make screw installation easier and assure that the screws are properly seated.
The best method of cleaning the tapped holes is to use an actual thread tap which matches the screw thread.
The tap will easily cut though and clean paint build-up and by running it in and out of the hole. If the build-up is
not as great and extra screws are available (or can be obtained) a screw can be run in and out of the hole to clean
minor build-up prior to final screw installation.

33
SDI 122-2007

WATER STAIN DAMAGE

Water stain damage is a direct result of improper storage. If the product is still in prime paint (no finish coat has
been applied) the condition is easily detectable as follows:
• Initially, the water stain appears as a discoloration or variance in sheen or gloss in
the primer. Damaged areas will look and possibly feel different from the rest of the
product.
• If the water stain has existed for a considerable length of time and was caused by
large amounts of water, rust will start to appear through the discolored areas.
If the product has had a finish coat of paint applied, water stain damage can cause failure of the finish coat as
well:
• Water stain damage can be detected by random areas of finish paint failure on the
door as well as the appearance of uniform rust development on those areas. In some
cases the finish paint will show good adhesion in water damaged areas but will also
show a uniform layer of rust developing through the finish paint.

To correct water stain damage, use the following guidelines:

• For products that are prime painted only, the affected areas should be adequately
sanded. If necessary, the area should be sanded to bare metal. The entire door/frame
surface should then be lightly sanded and “feathered” into any heavily sanded areas.
The entire surface should then be re-prime painted.
• For products that are finish painted, the affected areas should be adequately sanded.
If necessary the area should be sanded to bare metal. The entire remaining finish-
painted area should then be lightly sanded and “feathered” into any heavily sanded
areas. If bare metal is showing, these areas should be re-prime painted and lightly
sanded to “feather” into the lightly sanded finish-painted areas. The product should
then be re-finish painted.
• When the door is being prepared for top or finish coat painting, the surface should
first be cleaned. Use the same solvent that will be used to thin the topcoat paint
and thoroughly clean all surfaces to be painted.

34
 SDI 122-2007

THERMAL BOW
Installers need to be aware of a condition known as Thermal Bow. Thermal Bow is a temporary condition which
may occur in metal doors due to the inside-outside temperature differential. This is more common when the
direct rays of the sun are on a door surface. This condition is temporary, and to a great extent depends on the
door color, door construction, length of exposure, temperature, etc. This condition can often be alleviated by
painting the exposed surface a light color. Thermal bow can occur in reverse under extremely cold conditions.
Typical symptoms of thermal bow are hardware latching difficulty and door clearance issues.

35
 MEMBERS OF THE
AVAILABLE PUBLICATIONS STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE
AMWELD INTERNATIONAL, LLC
301 South Northpoint Drive, Suite 400
Specifications
Coppell, TX 75019
ANSI/SDI A250.6 Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcings on Standard (888) 775-2397
Steel Doors and Frames www.amweld.com
ANSI/SDI A250.8 SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors & CECO DOOR PRODUCTS
Frames 9159 Telecom Drive
SDI-108 Recommended Selection & Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors Milan, TN 38358
(731) 686-8345
SDI-109 Hardware for Standard Steel Doors & Frames www.cecodoor.com
SDI-118 Basic Fire Door Requirements CURRIES COMPANY
SDI-128 Guidelines for Acoustical Performance of Standard Steel Doors & P.O. Box 1648
Frames Mason City, IA 50402-1648
(641) 423-1334
SDI-129 Hinge & Strike Spacing www.curries.com

Test Procedures DEANSTEEL MANUFACTURING CO.

111 Merchant Street
ANSI/SDI A250.3 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish San Antonio, TX 78204-1496
Coatings for Steel Doors & Frames (210) 226-8271
ANSI/SDI A250.4 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for www.deansteel.com
Steel Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors & Hardware Reinforcings DOOR COMPONENTS INC.
ANSI/SDI A250.10 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel 7980 Redwood Avenue
Fontana, CA 92336-1638
Surfaces for Steel Doors & Frames
(909) 770-5700
ANSI/SDI A250.13 Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components www.doorcomponents.com
for Swinging Door Assemblies
MESKER DOOR, INC.
SDI-113 Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal 3440 Stanwood Boulevard
Transmittance of Steel Door & Frame Assemblies Huntsville, AL 35811-9021
(256) 851-6670
SDI-131 Accelerated Physical Endurance Test Procedure for Steel Doors, www.meskerdoor.com
Frames and Frame Anchors
METAL PRODUCTS, INC.
Construction Details 319 North Hills Road
Corbin, KY 40701
ANSI/SDI A250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames (606) 523-0173
SDI-110 Standard Steel Doors & Frames for Modular Masonry Construction www.metalproductsinc.com
SDI-111 Recommended Details for Standard Details Steel Doors, Frames, PIONEER INDUSTRIES, INC.
Accessories and Related Components 171 South Newman Street
Hackensack, NJ 07601
SDI-122 Installation & Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors &
(201) 933-1900
Frames www.pioneerindustries.com
SDI Drywall Slip-On Frames
REPUBLIC
155 Republic Drive
Miscellaneous Documents McKenzie, TN 38201-0580
ANSI/SDI A250.7 Nomenclature for Standard Steel Doors & Steel Frames (731) 352-3383
www.republicdoor.com
SDI-106 Recommended Standard Door Type Nomenclature
SDI-112 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors & SECURITY METAL PRODUCTS CORP.
5700 Hannum Avenue, Suite 250
Frames
Culver City, CA 90230
SDI-117 Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors & Frames (310) 641-6690
www.secmet.com
SDI-124 Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors & Frames
SDI-127 Industry Alert Series (A-L) STEELCRAFT
Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies
SDI-130 Electrified Hinge Preparations 9017 Blue Ash Road
SDI What is The SDI? Cincinnati, OH 45242
(513) 745-6400
AUDIO-VISUAL PROGRAMS ON VHS ALSO AVAILABLE www.steelcraft.com

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
440.899.0010 • FAX 440.892.1404
11/9/2009 www.steeldoor.org
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
124 - 11

Maintenance
of
Standard Steel Doors
and Frames

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2011 Steel Door Institute
SDI 124-11

Maintenance of
Standard Steel Doors and Frames

1 Introduction always latch freely and smoothly without obstruction.

Self latching devices should always function freely and
This document is intended to serve as a general outline smoothly as the door swings into the closed position.
of maintenance activities needed for standard steel Additional force should not be needed to achieve
doors and frames. However, it should be noted that latching. Mutes (silencers) should be replaced when
the door and frame are virtually maintenance free. latch operation is compromised by wear.
Maintenance will be, for the most part, associated
with the accessories and hardware attached to the Strike plate
door and frame.
The strike plate should be firmly attached to the frame
Maintenance of any product is important and nec- or inactive leaf of a pair of doors. Check for loose
essary to obtain the maximum benefits of product screw and/or other notable defects. Service or remove
service and longevity. Steel door and frame assemblies and replace per the manufacturer’s instructions.
are not different. In fact, in some cases where the door
and frame assembly is used as a “fire rated” barrier or Closing devices
a “leakage rated” smoke barrier, proper maintenance
is crucial. Basic maintenance to ensure the proper Check all closing devices for loose attaching screws,
functioning of the assembly is imperative and well linkage arm and pin wear, fluid leakage or other no-
worth the effort to provide for human life safety. table defects. Service the device or remove defective
parts and replace following the manufacturer’s rec-
ommendations. The primary and secondary closing
2 Areas to be inspected
speed adjustments should also be set and maintained
The following items should be periodically checked. in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommenda-
The frequency with which these checks are performed tions. The device should allow the door to operate
must be established at the discretion of the building freely and smoothly throughout its entire swing range
owner, insurance company, labeling authority (as ap- and positively latch (if so equipped) or remain in the
plicable), and maintenance service. Since doors in closed position.
different areas of a building access service different
traffic, the frequency of periodic inspections would Flush bolts
occur respectively.
Check all flush bolts for loose attaching screws, rod
bolt adjustment and strike plate (on both door and
Hinges
frame if so equipped) attachment. Service the de-
Check all hinges for loose attaching screws, hinge vices or remove defective parts and replace following
pin wear or other notable defects. Service the hinges the manufacturer’s recommendations. The rod bolts
or remove defective parts and replace per the manu- should retract, extend and engage the strike or keeper
facturer’s recommendations. The door should always hole freely and smoothly for both manual and/or au-
swing freely and smoothly without obstruction from tomatic flush bolts.
the opened to latched (when latching device is used)
position. Glass lights
The glazing material should be checked for cracks
Locksets, panic devices, fire exit hardware
and/or missing pieces of glazing. The glazing mount-
Check all locksets for loose attaching screws, latch ing frame should be checked to assure all attaching
wear or other notable defects. Service the lock- screws (if used) are tight and the unit is securely at-
set or remove defective parts and replace per the tached to the door. Service the glass light or remove
manufacturer’s recommendations. The door should defective parts and replace by following the manu-

1
 SDI 124-11

facturer’s recommendations. Also be sure to use ap- in building codes. These doors must not be obstructed
proved safety glass in appropriate applications/loca- in any fashion preventing them from functioning as
tions, or fire rated glass and glazing in fire doors, intended.
windows or lights.
Gasketting/weatherstripping
Door and frame finish
A visual and operational inspection is periodically nec-
A general visual inspection of the door and frame finish essary for gasketted or weatherstripped areas such as
should be periodically conducted. Any excessive finish perimeter seals, threshold seals, door bottoms, etc.
defects should be repaired and repainted. Adequate Inspect for signs of deterioration such as splitting,
protection is needed to help prevent the product from
cracking or deforming of flexible components. Install
rusting prematurely and shortening its service life.
replacement components as needed.
Unobstructed operation
Inspect operational integrity by the following
Fire rated and/or smoke control assemblies are method:
specified and installed to meet “safety to life code
requirements.” It is imperative that these assemblies Gasketting should be positioned to create proper
receive regularly scheduled maintenance checks for contact along the door’s entire perimeter. The test
all of the above items. Additionally, for the assembly for proper contact is usually done with common let-
to serve its purpose of stopping fire and/or smoke terhead paper. The paper should be firmly held in
propagation it must function freely with the ability to place by inserting it between the door and gasket and
positively latch in the closed position. Therefore, prop- then closing the door. If the paper is not firmly held in
ping or blocking these doors in an open position is in place, the seal is inadequate. The paper test should
violation of intended use and purpose as established be conducted along the entire perimeter.

Related Documents:
— NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives, Chapter 5
— SDI-122 Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames

2
 MEMBERS OF THE
AVAILABLE PUBLICATIONS STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE
AMwELD INTERNATIONAL, LLC
8324 Sterling Drive
Specifications
Irving, TX 75063
ANSI/SDI A250.6 Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcings on Standard (888) 775-2397
Steel Doors and Frames www.amweld.com
ANSI/SDI A250.8 SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors & CECO DOOR PRODUCTS
Frames 9159 Telecom Drive
SDI-108 Recommended Selection & Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors Milan, TN 38358
(731) 686-8345
SDI-109 Hardware for Standard Steel Doors & Frames www.cecodoor.com
SDI-118 Basic Fire Door Requirements CURRIES COMPANy
SDI-128 Guidelines for Acoustical Performance of Standard Steel Doors & P.O. Box 1648
Frames Mason City, IA 50402-1648
(641) 423-1334
SDI-129 Hinge & Strike Spacing www.curries.com

Test Procedures DEANSTEEL MANUFACTURING CO.

111 Merchant Street
ANSI/SDI A250.3 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish San Antonio, TX 78204-1496
Coatings for Steel Doors & Frames (210) 226-8271
ANSI/SDI A250.4 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for www.deansteel.com
Steel Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors & Hardware Reinforcings DOOR COMPONENTS INC.
ANSI/SDI A250.10 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel 7980 Redwood Avenue
Fontana, CA 92336-1638
Surfaces for Steel Doors & Frames
(909) 770-5700
ANSI/SDI A250.13 Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components www.doorcomponents.com
for Swinging Door Assemblies
MESkER DOOR, INC.
SDI-113 Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal 3440 Stanwood Boulevard
Transmittance of Steel Door & Frame Assemblies Huntsville, AL 35811-9021
(256) 851-6670
SDI-131 Accelerated Physical Endurance Test Procedure for Steel Doors, www.meskerdoor.com
Frames and Frame Anchors
METAL PRODUCTS, INC.
Construction Details 319 North Hills Road
Corbin, KY 40701
ANSI/SDI A250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames (606) 523-0173
SDI-110 Standard Steel Doors & Frames for Modular Masonry Construction www.metalproductsinc.com
SDI-111 Recommended Details for Standard Details Steel Doors, Frames, PIONEER INDUSTRIES, INC.
Accessories and Related Components 171 South Newman Street
Hackensack, NJ 07601
SDI-122 Installation & Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors &
(201) 933-1900
Frames www.pioneerindustries.com
SDI Drywall Slip-On Frames
REPUBLIC
155 Republic Drive
Miscellaneous Documents McKenzie, TN 38201-0580
ANSI/SDI A250.7 Nomenclature for Standard Steel Doors & Steel Frames (731) 352-3383
www.republicdoor.com
SDI-106 Recommended Standard Door Type Nomenclature
SDI-112 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors & SECURITy METAL PRODUCTS CORP.
5700 Hannum Avenue, Suite 250
Frames
Culver City, CA 90230
SDI-117 Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors & Frames (310) 641-6690
www.secmet.com
SDI-124 Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors & Frames
SDI-127 Industry Alert Series (A-L) STEELCRAFT
Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies
SDI-130 Electrified Hinge Preparations 9017 Blue Ash Road
SDI What is The SDI? Cincinnati, OH 45242
(513) 745-6400
AUDIO-VISUAL PROGRAMS ON VHS ALSO AVAILABLE www.steelcraft.com

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
440.899.0010 • FAX 440.892.1404
7/22/2011 www.steeldoor.org
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
INDUSTRY ALERT 127A - 06
End Closure Location
The steel door industry utilizes a variety of end closure designs in standard doors. The most common are flush
type end closures or inverted end closures. The inverted (legs upward) end closures in many cases may create a
necessity to reposition the mounting holes for regular arm closures or surface overhead stops/holders. To avoid
interference with the “web” of the top end closure channel, mounting screws must be slightly repositioned.
A similar (but less serious) situation could occur when channel-shaped closer reinforcements are inserted into flush
type end closures. The additional layers of material or the joint itself could cause "creeping" of the drill bit or tap.
Illustrated below is the consensus of the Steel Door Institute members showing the location of these channel
conditions on standard steel doors.
It is suggested that the hardware manufacturer and/or hardware consultant be contacted for resolution of such a
conflict.

Top of Door Top of Door Top of Door Top of Door

" to "$ ,1" " to "$ ,1" " to "$ ,1" " to "$ ,1"
End Closure End Closure End Closure End Closure

Reinf.
Plate

Flush End Closure Flush End Closure Inverted End Closure with Inverted End Closure with
With Insert Channel with Offset Channel Reinforcement Plate Reinforcement Channel

Refer to ANSI A250.8 for Material Thickness

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2008 Steel Door Institute
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
INDUSTRY ALERT 127B - 06
Door Edge Cutouts
The ability to form a crisp aesthetic cutout in the edge of a steel door, especially in the vicinity of a bend line is
directly influenced by the steel thickness and the proximity of the cutout to the bend line. A cutout too close to
the bend line will result in a flare-out of the cutout area due to unevenly distributed stress along the brake die or
rollform rollers.
The following illustrations are intended to convey dimensional limitations of the hardware items to be mortised into
the edge of 1 3/4" thick standard steel doors.
Certain lock fronts, concealed hinges, strikes, or electrical devices do not comply with these limitations. The
resulting potential for inaccuracy or lack of asthetics is inherent in the manufacturing processes and is not to be
considered a defect.

Edge seam system

varies by manufacturer
(not shown).
Variable

Variable

Minimum distance Dimension is to

to hardware item is hardware item, not
nominally " " to cutout in door.
minimum. 1  x.
m a

Minimum distance " " Minimum distance to

nominally 1.5x face 1 1 cutout is nominally 3x
sheet thickness face sheet thickness
or $ ,1" minimum.
Cutout Limits Cutout Limits
Cutout Around Corner Cutout On Edge

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2008 Steel Door Institute
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
INDUSTRY ALERT 127C - 06
Frame Cutout Limits
The ability to form a crisp aesthetic cutout in steel frames, especially in the vicinity of a bend line is directly influenced
by the steel thickness and the proximity of the cutout to the bend line. A cutout too close to the bend line will result
in a flare-out of the cutout area due to unevenly distributed stress along the brake die or rollform rollers.
The following illustration is intended to convey dimensional limitations of the hardware items to be mortised into
the face, rabbet or stop of steel frames. Certain concealed hinges, strikes, or electrical devices do not comply
with these limitations. The resulting potential for inaccuracy or lace of aesthetics is inherent in the manufacturing
processes and is not to be considered a defect.

Inside Outside
Backset
Bends Bends
Min. A B C D
Gage
Thickness Min. Min. Min. Min.
D 18 0.042" 5/64" 7/32" 5/64" 7/32"
A A
C 16 0.053" 3/32" 7/32" 3/32" 7/32"

14 0.067" 7/64" 7/32" 7/64" 7/32"

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2008 Steel Door Institute
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
INDUSTRY ALERT 127D - 06
Electric Strikes in Stud Walls
Steel or wood stud and drywall construction methods and frame anchorage could result in interference between
the stud and electric strike. Notching of the stud could result in compromising the stability of the frame.
Dependent on the dimensions of the strike, the cutouts may extend beyond the frame face or the returns, thus
leaving critical strike parts or wiring exposed.
Consideration should be given to specifying a strike suitably sized to fit the confines of a standard frame or specify-
ing alternate frame profiles to accommodate the strike.

2" 2"
Common Common
Standard Standard

Wallboard Wallboard
Wall Thickness

Wall Thickness

Area commonly Area commonly

required for strike required for strike

Door Door
Wallboard Wallboard
Commonly
Commonly " to "
" to " Commonly & ,1" to "
Minimum per "
NFPA–80 Minimum per "
Varies with NFPA–80 Varies with manufacturer
manufacturer commonly 1" to 1-"

Typical Frame Profile Slip-on Drywall Frame

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2008 Steel Door Institute
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
INDUSTRY ALERT 127E - 06
Prime Painted Materials Alert
Prime Painted Doors, Frames, and Accessories (where applicable) shall comply with the acceptance criteria speci-
fied in ANSI A250.10-1998 (R 2004). Doors and frames are cleaned and treated prior to painting to ensure maximum
paint adhesion. All exposed surfaces are then given a factory-applied coat of rust inhibiting “direct to metal” type
primer. The primer is then baked, air dried, or otherwise cured as appropriate for the primer.
This process is intended to protect the steel surfaces for a period of time under reasonable weather exposure con-
ditions. Factory applied primer coatings may be somewhat porous in order to accept finish coatings. The primer
coating may therefore be susceptible to the action of moisture or ambient moisture condensation during shipping
or storage. For example, transportation of materials in unprotected “open” trucks during inclement weather (rain
or snow) or on roadways where salt or other snow melting agents are used will deteriorate the primer. Extended
exposure to such conditions may result in rusted or water stained areas. ANSI A250.8-2003 (SDI-100) paragraph
4.1 presents Industry recommended jobsite storage requirements.
Should the primer become scratched, abraded, rusted or stained, the affected areas may rust unless sanded and
reprimed with a suitable “direct to metal” primer containing rust inhibitors.
Prior to application of finish coats, the substrate shall be inspected by the Painting Contractor. All Architectural
Specification requirements along with all requirements of the paint manufacturer shall be followed. These will gen-
erally include scuff sanding of the substrate to remove foreign materials, scratches or abrasions from construction
processes, along with any special or mandatory requirements for primer touch-up or additional primers required
by the paint system.
MOST IMPORTANTLY, the field applied primer and finish paint “systems” must be designed for direct to metal ap-
plications and contain rust inhibiting properties.
IF COATING COMPATIBILITY IS AN ISSUE, contact the SDI Manufacturers or their local distributors who can provide
information or “sample” materials for the painting contractor’s use.

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2008 Steel Door Institute
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
INDUSTRY ALERT 127F - 02
Butted Frames
Rough Opening Sizes
The variety of existing wall anchors available from SDI Members allow Standard Steel Door Frames to be a reliable
option for existing wall, structural steel wall framing or retrofit installations utilizing a butted to wall application. In
order to make the installation successful, careful consideration shall be given to all tolerances involved and that
sufficient clearance is figured to allow for them.
It has been “customary” to allow 1/4" clearance around the frame perimeter when establishing rough opening sizes
or when figuring non-standard overall frame sizes. Although this dimensional requirement does not appear in In-
dustry publications, it is based on the following:
•Both SDI 117-00 and ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 861-00 recognize a + tolerance in opening width and height. (There
is a –1/32" opening width tolerance that seldom is at issue).
•Both of these documents recognize a ± 1/32" tolerance in frame face dimensions.
•The overall frame width tolerance is a “non-critical” issue, therefore it is not addressed in the above Docu-
ments.
•Both ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 861-00 and ANSI/DHI A115.IG-1994 recognize a ± 1/16" installation tolerance for
vertical plumb.
Frames will “fit and function” if made to these dimensional tolerances and installed within tolerances. There is,
however, relatively no assurance that the substrate (walls) will be of suitable size or alignment.
We therefore recommend that the rough openings for these cases be no less than 3/16" larger on all 3 sides than
the “intended” overall frame size. (Example: 3070 standard frame = 3'-4 3/8" x 7'-2 3/16"). The installer carries the
responsibility for shimming and aligning as necessary. Gaps are normally sealed as part of the installation or
caulking/painting process. Architectural Specifications are to be consulted to determine the appropriate sealant
material to be used at fire door or smoke control frames.

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2008 Steel Door Institute
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
INDUSTRY ALERT 127G - 06
Environmental Considerations
Relating to Factory Painted
Steel Doors and Frames
There is an Industry need for a comprehensive revision of specifications, practices and procedures that will allow
compliance with existing and future regulations. The Member Companies of the Steel Door Institute have taken
the steps needed to eliminate from their primers, those elements identified by Regulatory Authorities as hazardous
to human health and the environment. This is not only a moral responsibility toward society, but also a survival
responsibility toward the business. The SDI encourages specification writers to look at these issues very carefully
when they specify coating requirements.
Federal and State Laws have regulated the management of hazardous waste so as to not pose a threat to the
environment or human health. Environmental Protection Agencies are very strict in regulations that affect coating
applications, by limiting the emission to the atmosphere of the amount of VOC (Volatile Organic Compound), which
has curtailed the use of solvent base paints.
Section 313 of the Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act (Title III) sets up the reporting require-
ments in the metal fabricating industry for all wastes containing any listed toxic chemical, which affects the use of
heavy metals (such as Zinc-Chromates) as rust inhibitors.

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2008 Steel Door Institute
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
INDUSTRY ALERT 127H - 02

Water Penetration

Borrowed lite assemblies, transom, sidelite, and combination transom sidelite frames are not factory sealed to
prevent water penetration. In situations where water penetration is a concern, the contractor must seal all joints
that are exposed to the elements after the frame assembly is installed.
Whenever possible, it is strongly recommended that glass and glazing be installed on the exterior rabbet of the
frame assembly. This will help act as a deterrent to water penetration.
The member companies of the hollow metal industry can not control the workmanship associated with the frame
installation; therefore, it is the responsibility of the installer to assure all steps are taken to prevent water pene-
tration.

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2008 Steel Door Institute
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
INDUSTRY ALERT 127 - 04

Grouting Frames in Drywall

Some Architectural Specifications require frames in stud and drywall partitions to be filled with grout for
sound deadening or to enhance structural integrity.
The STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE is opposed to this practice for the following reasons:
• ANSI A250.8-2003 (also 1998) paragraph 4.2.2 and ANSI A250.11-2001 paragraph 2.2 both address the
question of grouting frames. The paragraph cited in ANSI A250.8 gives a bit more information on the
problems related to moisture in grout.
• In drywall construction, this moisture has two places to go. It can soak into the drywall, potentially
destroying its cohesive integrity and thus the ability to retain anchors or frame integrity, or it can leach
downward where it will cause premature rusting of anchors, screws, stud connections, bottom of frames,
etc.
• Grouting does not appreciably afford any additional structural rigidity to the frame. As an example, slip-
on drywall frames have passed fire and hose stream tests, cycle tests, and in some cases impact tests
without being grouted.
• If the intention is for sound deadening, SDI 128-97 (Section 3) should be consulted. In addition, the
same insulation as used between wall studs (generally lightly packed fiberglass) will serve as a sound
deadener without the potential for damage to the frame or wallboard.
It is therefore the opinion of the STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE that grouting should never be specified for
drywall construction.

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2008 Steel Door Institute
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
INDUSTRY ALERT 127J - 04

Bituminous
Back-Coating of Frames
Some Architectural Specifications require steel frames to be back-coated with a “bituminous” coating for corro-
sion protection or sound control. Bituminous is an archaic term for a coating or emulsion containing fibrous or
non-fibrous asphalt. Other than for a few selective uses unrelated to steel frames, it is not readily available. A more
modern replacement for this material is automotive undercoating.
It is the recommendation of the STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE that this coating SHALL NOT be applied at the factory
or any location other than the jobsite. The coating never fully dries; leaving a dark residue that can be transferred
to the frame during transportation, storage, or handling prior to final installation.
ANSI A250.8-2003 (also 1998) limits factory applied coatings to either factory prime finish (2.1.3) or factory-applied
finish paint (2.1.4).
For corrosion protection, ANSI A250.11-2001 paragraph 2.2 clearly states that “the contractor responsible for instal-
lation” applies corrosion resistant coatings only where specified for anti-freezing agents in plaster or mortar.
For sound control purposes, it is less damaging to the frame finish and more expedient for “the contractor respon-
sible for installation” to extend the insulation material used in the adjoining wall into the frame. This creates an
unbroken barrier to the passage of sound.

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2008 Steel Door Institute
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
INDUSTRY ALERT 127K - 09

Improper Wedges
as Hold-Opens
It has come to the attention of the Steel Door Institute (SDI) that cleaning or maintenance personnel have been
incorrectly wedging doors to hold them open. This has been reported mainly in health care or hotel-motel installa-
tions at patient rooms, utility rooms, sleeping rooms, and even stairways.
Instead of using rubber wedges at the bottom of doors or suitable hold-open mechanisms, wedges of various ma-
terials have been inserted between the hinge edge of the door and the hinge jamb. This practice puts an abnormal
stress on the hinge reinforcements, hinge knuckles, and attachment screws causing potential damage to any or
all of these components.
Damage, loosening, or failure resulting from this practice shall not be construed as a door, frame, or hardware
defect or warranty issue. The SDI strongly discourages the use of wedges in this manner or any methods
for holding doors open that will compromise the fire or life safety integrity of the openings.
The importance of unrestricted closing and latching of door openings in fire situations is further discussed in Sec-
tions 9 through 9.5 of SDI-118 “Basic Fire Door Requirements”.

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2009 Steel Door Institute
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
INDUSTRY ALERT 127L - 09

Buyer Beware
Steel Doors with
Lead-Based Primer
Excessive lead paint in toys has been in the news a great deal lately. Just ask the toy industry about the far reaching
impact of selling products that donít comply with federal regulations. U.S. manufacturers, contractors, and end us-
ers are aware of the regulations concerning the limitations of lead in paint. Although the toy industry may not have
knowingly violated these regulations, it is embroiled in this issue because it didnít closely regulate the production
of these toys in a country where lead in paint is an accepted practice. United States industries need to comply
with applicable regulations for all products that they produce, including all components and assemblies that are
outsourced to foreign manufacturers.
In light of the issues raised by the toy industry example and others, the Steel Door Institute felt it worthwhile to
investigate the lead content of paint contained on steel doors imported into the United States. The investigations
were conducted by independent laboratories on randomly selected doors taken from various regions throughout
the United States. The results showed that all the doors tested exceed the allowable lead content for paint used in
residential and other consumer products. To ensure consumer safety and, to protect the interests of its membership
as well as the industry as a whole, SDI believes it is important to bring attention to this issue.

Risks of Using Lead-Based Paint

In addition to the issues associated with non-compliance with the federal statutes and regulations, there are more
serious risks associated with manufacturing, importing, buying or selling products that contain lead-based paint.
There are significant physical risks associated with ingesting lead by breathing or swallowing lead dust, which can
affect workers during construction and installation as well as the ultimate consumers who may come into contact
with the surfaces. For example, standard practice for top coat painting steel doors and frames is to rough up the
primer on the face of the door with abrasive sheets to improve adhesion to the primer. This practice will release lead

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2009 Steel Door Institute
dust that could be potentially inhaled by the painter or other workers in the general vicinity. In addition, painting
over lead-based paint with non-lead paint is not a long-term solution. Even though the lead-based paint may be
covered by non-lead paint, the lead-based paint may continue to loosen from the surface below and create lead
dust. The new paint may also partially mix with the lead-based paint, and lead dust will be released when the new
paint begins to deteriorate.

Restrictions on the Use of Lead-Based Paint

There are a number of statutory restrictions on the use of lead-based or lead containing paint in the United States.
The Residential Lead-Based Paint Hazard Reduction Act of 1992 (P.L. 102-550, October 28, 1992) incorporates
the definition of lead-based paint contained in Section 302(C) of the Lead-Based Paint Poisoning Prevention Act
(42 U.S.C. 4831), which characterizes any paint that contains more than .5% by weight of lead as “lead-based
paint.”
Together, these two statutes prohibit the use of any paint with excessive lead content in new residential structures,
and mandate strict disclosure requirements with respect to the lead content of paint in existing dwellings.
The lead content restrictions are even more stringent under the Consumer Product Safety Act, which reduces the
threshold for characterization as lead-containing paint to .06% by weight of the total non-volatile content of the paint
or the weight of the dried paint film, and prohibits the use of such paint in residences and consumer products.
This prohibition extends to any products that may be used by consumers following an initial sale, including those
contained in apartment buildings, schools, hospitals, hotels, parks and any other public places or areas where
consumers may have access to the painted surfaces. (Consumer Product Safety Act, 15 U.S.C. 2057, 2058; 16
C.F.R. 1303.)
Due to the significant potential risks and costs associated with those risks of importing and/or distributing doors
containing lead-based paint, the Steel Door Institute feels obligated to alert the industry to the issue and to urge
the general public to be aware of the products that they are associated with, so that they can monitor compliance
with all applicable laws.
The Steel Door Institute does not make any assertions or conclusions other than those specifically contained
herein, which are limited in scope and used for illustrative purposes only.

For more information on steel doors and frames, contact any of the following members of the Steel Door Institute

AMWELD INTERNATIONAL, LLC DOOR COMPONENTS INC. REPUBLIC

301 South Northpoint Drive, Suite 400 7980 Redwood Avenue 155 Republic Drive
Coppell, TX 75019 Fontana, CA 92336-1638 McKenzie, TN 38201-0580
(888) 775-2397 (909) 770-5700 (731) 352-3383
www.amweld.com www.doorcomponents.com www.republicdoor.com

CECO DOOR PRODUCTS MESKER DOOR, INC. SECURITY METAL PRODUCTS CORP.
9159 Telecom Drive 3440 Stanwood Boulevard 5700 Hannum Avenue, Suite 250
Milan, TN 38358 Huntsville, AL 35811-9021 Culver City, CA 90230
(731) 686-8345 (256) 851-6670 (310) 641-6690
www.cecodoor.com www.meskerdoor.com www.secmet.com

CURRIES COMPANY METAL PRODUCTS, INC. STEELCRAFT

P.O. Box 1648 319 North Hills Road Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies
Mason City, IA 50402-1648 Corbin, KY 40701 9017 Blue Ash Road
(641) 423-1334 (606) 523-0173 Cincinnati, OH 45242
www.curries.com www.metalproductsinc.com (513) 745-6400
www.steelcraft.com
DEANSTEEL MANUFACTURING CO. PIONEER INDUSTRIES, INC.
111 Merchant Street 171 South Newman Street
San Antonio, TX 78204-1496 Hackensack, NJ 07601
(210) 226-8271 (201) 933-1900
www.deansteel.com www.pioneerindustries.com

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
440/899-0010 • FAX 440/892-1404
www.steeldoor.org
 MEMBERS OF THE
AVAILABLE PUBLICATIONS STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE
AMWELD INTERNATIONAL, LLC
301 South Northpoint Drive, Suite 400
Specifications
Coppell, TX 75019
ANSI/SDI A250.6 Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcings on Standard (888) 775-2397
Steel Doors and Frames www.amweld.com
ANSI/SDI A250.8 SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors & CECO DOOR PRODUCTS
Frames 9159 Telecom Drive
SDI-108 Recommended Selection & Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors Milan, TN 38358
(731) 686-8345
SDI-109 Hardware for Standard Steel Doors & Frames www.cecodoor.com
SDI-118 Basic Fire Door Requirements CURRIES COMPANY
SDI-128 Guidelines for Acoustical Performance of Standard Steel Doors & P.O. Box 1648
Frames Mason City, IA 50402-1648
(641) 423-1334
SDI-129 Hinge & Strike Spacing www.curries.com

Test Procedures DEANSTEEL MANUFACTURING CO.

111 Merchant Street
ANSI/SDI A250.3 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish San Antonio, TX 78204-1496
Coatings for Steel Doors & Frames (210) 226-8271
ANSI/SDI A250.4 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for www.deansteel.com
Steel Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors & Hardware Reinforcings DOOR COMPONENTS INC.
ANSI/SDI A250.10 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel 7980 Redwood Avenue
Fontana, CA 92336-1638
Surfaces for Steel Doors & Frames
(909) 770-5700
ANSI/SDI A250.13 Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components www.doorcomponents.com
for Swinging Door Assemblies
MESKER DOOR, INC.
SDI-113 Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal 3440 Stanwood Boulevard
Transmittance of Steel Door & Frame Assemblies Huntsville, AL 35811-9021
(256) 851-6670
SDI-131 Accelerated Physical Endurance Test Procedure for Steel Doors, www.meskerdoor.com
Frames and Frame Anchors
METAL PRODUCTS, INC.
Construction Details 319 North Hills Road
Corbin, KY 40701
ANSI/SDI A250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames (606) 523-0173
SDI-110 Standard Steel Doors & Frames for Modular Masonry Construction www.metalproductsinc.com
SDI-111 Recommended Details for Standard Details Steel Doors, Frames, PIONEER INDUSTRIES, INC.
Accessories and Related Components 171 South Newman Street
Hackensack, NJ 07601
SDI-122 Installation & Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors &
(201) 933-1900
Frames www.pioneerindustries.com
SDI Drywall Slip-On Frames
REPUBLIC
155 Republic Drive
Miscellaneous Documents McKenzie, TN 38201-0580
ANSI/SDI A250.7 Nomenclature for Standard Steel Doors & Steel Frames (731) 352-3383
www.republicdoor.com
SDI-106 Recommended Standard Door Type Nomenclature
SDI-112 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors & SECURITY METAL PRODUCTS CORP.
5700 Hannum Avenue, Suite 250
Frames
Culver City, CA 90230
SDI-117 Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors & Frames (310) 641-6690
www.secmet.com
SDI-124 Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors & Frames
SDI-127 Industry Alert Series (A-L) STEELCRAFT
Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies
SDI-130 Electrified Hinge Preparations 9017 Blue Ash Road
SDI What is The SDI? Cincinnati, OH 45242
(513) 745-6400
AUDIO-VISUAL PROGRAMS ON VHS ALSO AVAILABLE www.steelcraft.com

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
440.899.0010 • FAX 440.892.1404
11/9/2009 www.steeldoor.org
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
128 - 09

Guidelines for
Acoustical Performance
of Standard Steel Doors
and Frames

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2009 Steel Door Institute
SDI 128-09

Guidelines for Acoustical Performance of

Standard Steel Doors and Frames

1 General 2 Testing

1.1 Scope 2.1 Test Specimen

This document shall provide guidelines for the speci- Unless otherwise specified, the test specimen shall
fying, installing, and adjusting of standard steel doors be a nominal 36" (914 mm) wide, by 84" (2133 mm)
and frames in applications where sound control is a high for single doors and 72" (1,829 mm wide, by 84"
consideration. (2133 mm) high for pairs of doors. All doors shall be 1
3/4" (44 mm) in thickness. All doors shall be fully oper-
1.2 Definitions
able. A detailed description of the test assembly shall
1.2.1 Sound Transmission Class be included in the test report.
A single number rating that indicates the sound trans- Ratings derived from non-operable assemblies shall
mission loss over a defined range of frequencies of a only be used for experimental purposes and are not
door assembly between adjacent closed rooms, ab- part of this document.
breviated STC. Higher values equate to better sound
reduction performance. 2.2 Test Method
1.2.2 Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class The door assemblies shall be tested in accordance
with ASTM E 1425. The STC and OITC ratings shall
A single number rating used to compare door as-
be calculated in accordance with ASTM E 413 and
semblies when subjected to exterior sounds, such
E 1332, respectively. The latest editions of the stan-
as ground or air transportation noise, is abbreviated
dards shall be used in determining the STC and OITC
OITC.
ratings. Testing shall be performed at laboratories that
1.2.3 Sound transmission loss –TL are accredited under the National Voluntary Labora-
tory Accreditation Program (NVLAP)
The reduction in sound level at specific frequency lev-
els when sound passes through a door assembly. 2.3 Test Results and Report
1.2.4 Frequency The test report shall be prepared by the test laboratory
and shall contain the information identified in Section
The number of cycles per second of a sound wave,
8 of ASTM E 1425.
measured in units of Hertz and abbreviated Hz.

1.2.5 Decibel – dB
3 Design Criteria
A unit used to express the intensity of a sound wave,
equal to 20 times the common logarithm of the ratio of
3.1 Performance Considerations
the pressure produced by the sound wave to a refer-
ence pressure, usually 0.0002 microbar. The proper function of acoustical doors relies on a
combination of factors that are under the control of
1.2.6 Sound Control Door Assembly various firms, trades, specifiers, suppliers, and de-
An assembly consisting of a door, frame, hardware, signers. Without the cooperation of all concerned, the
threshold, and gasketing, capable of reducing the installed opening may not function as intended. Proper
transmission of sound. seal installation and adjustment are critical to the per-

2
 SDI 128-09

formance of the opening. The installation guidelines doors. A wall that moves or flexes each time the door
shall be provided by the manufacturer. is operated cannot ensure that the gasket alignment
will be maintained.
Consideration must be given to correctly specifying
the door capability for the project condition. Some The manufacturer’s literature should be consulted to
doors, although rated higher in overall STC or OITC determine the weight of acoustical doors; especially,
ratings may not perform as well as lower rated doors
those that have higher acoustical ratings.
at certain frequencies. The test reports should be re-
viewed to establish the best TL values at the frequen- 3.2 Field Testing
cies under consideration for a given project.
Results obtained from field-testing may vary from
Room design should create a full enclosure equal to those obtained under laboratory conditions. Atmo-
or greater than the door’s TL capabilities. For exam- spheric conditions, room volumes, wall type and de-
ple, walls that do not run full height to a similar rated
sign, sound diffusion, test equipment, etc. may affect
overhead structure will allow sound leakage through
the results obtained when testing in the field.
ceilings, louvers, pipe chases, access doors, etc.

Carpeting, although considered a good source of 3.3 Hardware Considerations

sound absorption, should not be used underneath Hardware should be specified giving special consid-
acoustical doors. Door bottom gaskets must com- eration to the fact that it will be used on acoustical
press against a solid object to affect a proper seal. doors. Any type of hardware that may be the source
Carpeting by its nature does not provide that type of
of sound leakage should be avoided. Since all acous-
surface.
tical doors depend on a tight perimeter seal, some
Walls, in addition to their STC rating, should be de- types of hardware will become difficult to operate due
signed to support the additional weight of acoustical to the compression required to seal the opening.

3
 MEMBERS OF THE
AVAILABLE PUBLICATIONS STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE
AMWELD INTERNATIONAL, LLC
301 South Northpoint Drive, Suite 400
Specifications
Coppell, TX 75019
ANSI/SDI A250.6 Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcings on Standard (888) 775-2397
Steel Doors and Frames www.amweld.com
ANSI/SDI A250.8 SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors & CECO DOOR PRODUCTS
Frames 9159 Telecom Drive
SDI-108 Recommended Selection & Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors Milan, TN 38358
(731) 686-8345
SDI-109 Hardware for Standard Steel Doors & Frames www.cecodoor.com
SDI-118 Basic Fire Door Requirements CURRIES COMPANY
SDI-128 Guidelines for Acoustical Performance of Standard Steel Doors & P.O. Box 1648
Frames Mason City, IA 50402-1648
(641) 423-1334
SDI-129 Hinge & Strike Spacing www.curries.com

Test Procedures DEANSTEEL MANUFACTURING CO.

111 Merchant Street
ANSI/SDI A250.3 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish San Antonio, TX 78204-1496
Coatings for Steel Doors & Frames (210) 226-8271
ANSI/SDI A250.4 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for www.deansteel.com
Steel Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors & Hardware Reinforcings DOOR COMPONENTS INC.
ANSI/SDI A250.10 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel 7980 Redwood Avenue
Fontana, CA 92336-1638
Surfaces for Steel Doors & Frames
(909) 770-5700
ANSI/SDI A250.13 Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components www.doorcomponents.com
for Swinging Door Assemblies
MESKER DOOR, INC.
SDI-113 Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal 3440 Stanwood Boulevard
Transmittance of Steel Door & Frame Assemblies Huntsville, AL 35811-9021
(256) 851-6670
SDI-131 Accelerated Physical Endurance Test Procedure for Steel Doors, www.meskerdoor.com
Frames and Frame Anchors
METAL PRODUCTS, INC.
Construction Details 319 North Hills Road
Corbin, KY 40701
ANSI/SDI A250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames (606) 523-0173
SDI-110 Standard Steel Doors & Frames for Modular Masonry Construction www.metalproductsinc.com
SDI-111 Recommended Details for Standard Details Steel Doors, Frames, PIONEER INDUSTRIES, INC.
Accessories and Related Components 171 South Newman Street
Hackensack, NJ 07601
SDI-122 Installation & Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors &
(201) 933-1900
Frames www.pioneerindustries.com
SDI Drywall Slip-On Frames
REPUBLIC
155 Republic Drive
Miscellaneous Documents McKenzie, TN 38201-0580
ANSI/SDI A250.7 Nomenclature for Standard Steel Doors & Steel Frames (731) 352-3383
www.republicdoor.com
SDI-106 Recommended Standard Door Type Nomenclature
SDI-112 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors & SECURITY METAL PRODUCTS CORP.
5700 Hannum Avenue, Suite 250
Frames
Culver City, CA 90230
SDI-117 Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors & Frames (310) 641-6690
www.secmet.com
SDI-124 Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors & Frames
SDI-127 Industry Alert Series (A-L) STEELCRAFT
Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies
SDI-130 Electrified Hinge Preparations 9017 Blue Ash Road
SDI What is The SDI? Cincinnati, OH 45242
(513) 745-6400
AUDIO-VISUAL PROGRAMS ON VHS ALSO AVAILABLE www.steelcraft.com

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
440.899.0010 • FAX 440.892.1404
11/9/2009 www.steeldoor.org
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
129 - 12

Hinge and Strike

Spacing

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2012 Steel Door Institute
 SDI 129-12

Cautionary Statement
The hinge and strike spacings presented in this brochure are intended as a reference to inform the reader of the
standard locations used in the manufacture of steel doors and frames by SDI member companies for the opening
sizes shown.
The user must be aware that these spacings shall not be relied upon when retrofitting doors or frames to an exist-
ing installation. Field verification of hinge and strike spacings in this situation is necessary.
Dimensions listed are valid at the time of publication. However, manufacturers do periodically revise their hinge
and strike spacing, therefore, the SDI strongly recommends that individual manufacturers be contacted to verify
dimensions.
The Steel Door Institute and its member companies shall not be held liable for products manufactured using the
information published here.

1
 SDI 129-12

Black Mountain Door

EC
L Note: Dimensions listed are valid at time of publication. However, manufacturers do
A periodically revise their hinge and strike spacing, therefore, the SDI strongly
Opening
Height D
recommends that individual manufacturers be contacted to verify dimensions.
Hinge
CL Spacing

B
Strike
CL
C

3 1/2″ x 3 1/2″
Hinge
Frame
3-1/2 Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-3/8″ Thick Doors
F A B C D E F G
6′-8″ 10-⅜″
1/8
1/16 7′-0″ 40-5⁄16″ 14-⅜″ 59-⅞″ 9-¾″ 5⁄16″ 3⁄16″
G
7′-2″ 16-⅜″
1 3/8
Door

4-½ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 10-⅜″ 2 @ 29-15⁄16″
6′-10″ 8-⅜″ 2 @ 31-15⁄16″
4 1/2″ x 4 1/2″ 7′-0″ 10-⅜″ 2 @ 31-15⁄16″
Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 12-⅜″ 2 @ 31-15⁄16″
F 7′-4″ 10-⅜″ 2 @ 33-15⁄16″
7′-6″ 40-5⁄16″ 12-⅜″ 2 @ 33-15⁄16″ 9-¾″ 5⁄16″ 3⁄16″ 1⁄16″ ⅛″
H
J
G
7′-8″ 10-7⁄16″ 3 @ 23-15⁄16″
7′-10″ 8-5⁄16″ 3 @ 25-5⁄16″
1 3/4
Door 8′-0″ 10-5⁄16″ 3 @ 25-5⁄16″
9′-0″ 8-7⁄16″ 3 @ 29-15⁄16″
10′-0″ 11-7⁄16″ 3 @ 32-15⁄16″

5″ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 10-⅜″ 2 @ 29-15⁄16″
6′-10″ 8-⅜″ 2 @ 31-15⁄16″
5" x 4 1/2" 7′-0″ 10-⅜″ 2 @ 31-15⁄16″
or
5" x 5" Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 12-⅜″ 2 @ 31-15⁄16″
F 7′-4″ 10-⅜″ 2 @ 33-15⁄16″
7′-6″ 40-5⁄16″ 12-⅜″ 2 @ 33-15⁄16″ 9-¾″ 5⁄16″ 3⁄16″ 1⁄16″ ⅛″
H
J 7′-8″ 10-7⁄16″ 3 @ 23-15⁄16″
G
7′-10″ 8-5⁄16″ 3 @ 25-5⁄16″
1 3/4
Door 8′-0″ 10-5⁄16″ 3 @ 25-5⁄16″
9′-0″ 8-7⁄16″ 3 @ 29-15⁄16″
10′-0″ 11-7⁄16″ 3 @ 32-15⁄16″

3
SDI 129-12

Ceco Door

EC
L Note: Dimensions listed are valid at time of publication. However, manufacturers do
A periodically revise their hinge and strike spacing, therefore, the SDI strongly
Opening
Height D
recommends that individual manufacturers be contacted to verify dimensions.
Hinge
CL Spacing
Note: On 3 1/2″ hinge preparation for 1 3/8″ doors, the standard for non-fire rated
frames is two (2) hinges.
B
Strike
CL
C

3 1/2″ x 3 1/2″
Hinge
Frame
3-1/2 Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-3/8″ Thick Doors
F A B C D E F G
6′-8″ 2 @ 29-15⁄16″
1/8
1/16
7′-0″ 40-5⁄16″ 10-⅜″ 2 @ 31-15⁄16″ 9-¾″ 5⁄16″ ¼″
G
7′-2″ 2 @ 32-15⁄16″
1 3/8
Door

4-½ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 2 @ 31″
6′-10″ 2 @ 32″
4 1/2″ x 4 1/2″ 7′-0″ 2 @ 33″
Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 2 @ 34″
F 7′-4″ 2 @ 35″
7′-6″ 41-13⁄16″ 9″ 2 @ 36″ 9″ 5⁄16″ ¼″ ⅛″ 1⁄16″
H
J
G
7′-8″ 3 @ 24-2⅓2″
7′-10″ 3 @ 25-2⅙4″
1 3/4
Door 8′-0″ 3 @ 26″
9′-0″ 3 @ 30″
10′-0″ 3 @ 34″

5″ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 2 @ 31″
6′-10″ 2 @ 32″
5" x 4 1/2" 7′-0″ 2 @ 33″
or
5" x 5" Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 2 @ 34″
F 7′-4″ 2 @ 35″
7′-6″ 41-13⁄16″ 9″ 2 @ 36″ 9″ 5⁄16″ ¼″ ⅛″ 1⁄16″
H
J 7′-8″ 3 @ 24-2⅓2″
G
7′-10″ 3 @ 25-2⅙4″
1 3/4
Door 8′-0″ 3 @ 26″
9′-0″ 3 @ 30″
10′-0″ 3 @ 34″

4
 SDI 129-12

Curries

EC
L Note: Dimensions listed are valid at time of publication. However, manufacturers do
A periodically revise their hinge and strike spacing, therefore, the SDI strongly
Opening
Height D
recommends that individual manufacturers be contacted to verify dimensions.
Hinge
CL Spacing
Note: On 3 1/2″ hinge preparation for 1 3/8″ doors, the standard for non-fire rated
frames is two (2) hinges.
B
Strike
CL
C

3 1/2″ x 3 1/2″
Hinge
Frame
3-1/2 Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-3/8″ Thick Doors
F A B C D E F G
6′-8″ 10-⅜″ 2 @ 29-15⁄16″
1/8
1/16
7′-0″ 40-5⁄16″ 10-⅜″ 2 @ 31-15⁄16″ 9-¾″ 5⁄16″ ¼″
G
7′-2″ 10-⅜″ 2 @ 32-15⁄16″
1 3/8
Door

4-½ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 30-¼″
6′-10″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 31-¼″
4 1/2″ x 4 1/2″ 7′-0″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 32-¼″
Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 33-¼″
F 7′-4″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 34-¼″
7′-6″ 40″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 35-¼″ 7-¼″ 5⁄16″ ¼″ ⅛″ 1⁄16″
H
J
G
7′-8″ 12-⅜″ 3 @ 24-⅛″
7′-10″ 12-⅛″ 3 @ 24-⅞″
1 3/4
Door 8′-0″ 12-¼″ 3 @ 25-½″
9′-0″ 12-¼″ 3 @ 29-½″
10′-0″ 12-¼″ 3 @ 33-½″

5″ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 30-¼″
6′-10″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 31-¼″
5" x 4 1/2" 7′-0″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 32-¼″
or
5" x 5" Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 33-¼″
F 7′-4″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 34-¼″
7′-6″ 40″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 35-¼″ 7-¼″ 5⁄16″ ¼″ ⅛″ 1⁄16″
H
J 7′-8″ 12-⅜″ 3 @ 24-⅛″
G
7′-10″ 12-⅛″ 3 @ 24-⅞″
1 3/4
Door 8′-0″ 12-¼″ 3 @ 25-½″
9′-0″ 12-¼″ 3 @ 29-½″
10′-0″ 12-¼″ 3 @ 33-½″

5
SDI 129-12

Deansteel Manufacturing Co.

EC
L Note: Dimensions listed are valid at time of publication. However, manufacturers do
A periodically revise their hinge and strike spacing, therefore, the SDI strongly
Opening
Height D
recommends that individual manufacturers be contacted to verify dimensions.
Hinge
CL Spacing

B
Strike
CL
C

3 1/2″ x 3 1/2″
Hinge
Frame
3-1/2 Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-3/8″ Thick Doors
F A B C D E F G
6′-8″ 61-½″
1/8
1/16
7′-0″ 40-5⁄16″ 11-¾″ 2 @ 32-¾″ 6-¾″ 5⁄16″ ¼″
G
7′-2″ 2 @ 33-¾″
1 3/8
Door

4-½ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 2 @ 30-¼″
6′-10″ 2 @ 31-¼″
4 1/2″ x 4 1/2″ 7′-0″ 2 @ 32-¼″
Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 2 @ 33-¼″
F 7′-4″ 2 @ 34-¼″
7′-6″ 40-5⁄16″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 35-¼″ 7-¼″ 5⁄16″ ¼″ ⅛″ 1⁄16″
H
J
G
7′-8″ 24-⅛″, 24-¼″, 24-⅛″
7′-10″ 24-⅞″, 24-¾″, 24-⅞″
1 3/4
Door 8′-0″ 3 @ 25-½″
9′-0″ 3 @ 29-½″
10′-0″ 3 @ 33-½″

5″ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 12-½″ 2 @ 30″
6′-10″ 12-½″ 2 @ 31″
5" x 4 1/2" 7′-0″ 12-½″ 2 @ 32″
or
5" x 5" Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 12-½″ 2 @ 33″
F 7′-4″ 12-½″ 2 @ 34″
7′-6″ 40-5⁄16″ 12-½″ 2 @ 35″ 7-½″ 5⁄16″ ¼″ ⅛″ 1⁄16″
H
J 7′-8″ 12-½″ 3 @ 24″
G
7′-10″ 12-½″ 24-⅝″, 24-¾″, 24-⅝″
1 3/4
Door 8′-0″ 12-½″ 25-⅜″, 25-¼″, 25-⅜″
9′-0″ 12-9⁄16″ 3 @ 29-5⁄16″
10′-0″ 12-9⁄16″ 3 @ 33-5⁄16″

6
 SDI 129-12

Door Components Inc.

EC
L Note: Dimensions listed are valid at time of publication. However, manufacturers do
A periodically revise their hinge and strike spacing, therefore, the SDI strongly
Opening
Height D
recommends that individual manufacturers be contacted to verify dimensions.
Hinge
CL Spacing

B
Strike
CL
C

3 1/2″ x 3 1/2″
Hinge
Frame
3-1/2 Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-3/8″ Thick Doors
F A B C D E F G
6′-8″ 2 @ 29-15⁄16″
1/8
1/16
7′-0″ 40-5⁄16″ 10-⅜″ 2 @ 31-15⁄16″ 9-¾″ 5⁄16″ ¼″
G
7′-2″ 2 @ 32-15⁄16″
1 3/8
Door

4-½ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 2 @ 29-15⁄16″
6′-10″ 2 @ 30-15⁄16″
4 1/2″ x 4 1/2″ 7′-0″ 2 @ 31-15⁄16″
Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 2 @ 32-15⁄16″
F 7′-4″ 2 @ 33-15⁄16″
7′-6″ 40-5⁄16″ 10-⅜″ 2 @ 34-15⁄16″ 9-¾″ 5⁄16″ ¼″ ⅛″ 1⁄16″
H
J
G
7′-8″ 23-15⁄16″, 24″, 23-15⁄16″
7′-10″ 3 @ 24-⅝″
1 3/4
Door 8′-0″ 25-5⁄16″, 25-¼″, 23-5⁄16″
9′-0″ 29-5⁄16″, 29-¼″, 29-5⁄16″
10′-0″ 33-5⁄16″, 33-¼″, 33-5⁄16″

5″ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 2 @ 29-15⁄16″
6′-10″ 2 @ 30-15⁄16″
5" x 4 1/2" 7′-0″ 2 @ 31-15⁄16″
or
5" x 5" Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 2 @ 32-15⁄16″
F 7′-4″ 2 @ 33-15⁄16″
7′-6″ 40-5⁄16″ 10-⅜″ 2 @ 34-15⁄16″ 9-¾″ 5⁄16″ ¼″ ⅛″ 1⁄16″
H
J 7′-8″ 23-15⁄16″, 24″, 23-15⁄16″
G
7′-10″ 3 @ 24-⅝″
1 3/4
Door 8′-0″ 25-5⁄16″, 24-¼″, 25-5⁄16″
9′-0″ 29-5⁄16″, 29-¼″, 29-5⁄16″
10′-0″ 33-5⁄16″, 33-¼″, 33-5⁄16″

7
SDI 129-12

Mesker Door, Inc.

EC
L Note: Dimensions listed are valid at time of publication. However, manufacturers do
A periodically revise their hinge and strike spacing, therefore, the SDI strongly
Opening
Height D
recommends that individual manufacturers be contacted to verify dimensions.
Hinge
CL Spacing

B
Strike
CL
C

3 1/2″ x 3 1/2″
Hinge
Frame
3-1/2 Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-3/8″ Thick Doors
F A B C D E F G
6′-8″ 61-½″
1/8
1/16
7′-0″ 40-5⁄16″ 11-¾″ 2 @ 32-¾″ 6-¾″ ¼″ 3⁄16″
G
7′-2″ 2 @ 33-¾″
1 3/8
Door

4-½ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 30-¼″
6′-10″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 31-¼″
4 1/2″ x 4 1/2″ 7′-0″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 32-¼″
Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 33-¼″
F 7′-4″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 34-¼″
7′-6″ 40-5⁄16″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 35-¼″ 7-¼″ 5⁄16″ ¼″ ⅛″ 1⁄16″
H
J
G
7′-8″ 11-¼″ 3 @ 24-½″
7′-10″ 10-¼″ 3 @ 25-½″
1 3/4
Door 8′-0″ 12-¼″ 3 @ 25-½″
9′-0″ 12-¼″ 3 @ 29-½″
10′-0″ 12-¼″ 4 @ 25-⅛″

5″ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 30-¼″
6′-10″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 31-¼″
5" x 4 1/2" 7′-0″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 32-¼″
or
5" x 5" Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 33-¼″
F 7′-4″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 34-¼″
7′-6″ 40-5⁄16″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 35-¼″ 7-¼″ 5⁄16″ ¼″ ⅛″ 1⁄16″
H
J 7′-8″ 11-¼″ 3 @ 24-½″
G
7′-10″ 10-¼″ 3 @ 25-½″
1 3/4
Door 8′-0″ 12-¼″ 3 @ 25-½″
9′-0″ 12-¼″ 3 @ 29-½″
10′-0″ 12-¼″ 4 @ 25-⅛″

8
 SDI 129-12

MPI

EC
L Note: Dimensions listed are valid at time of publication. However, manufacturers do
A periodically revise their hinge and strike spacing, therefore, the SDI strongly
Opening
Height D
recommends that individual manufacturers be contacted to verify dimensions.
Hinge
CL Spacing

B
Strike
CL
C

3 1/2″ x 3 1/2″
Hinge
Frame
3-1/2 Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-3/8″ Thick Doors
F A B C D E F G
6′-8″ 2 @ 30-¾″
1/8
1/16
7′-0″ 40-5⁄16″ 11-¾″ 2 @ 32-¾″ 6-¾″ 5⁄16″ ¼″
G
7′-2″ 2 @ 33-¾″
1 3/8
Door

4-½ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 2 @ 30-¼″
6′-10″ 2 @ 31-¼″
4 1/2″ x 4 1/2″ 7′-0″ 2 @ 32-¼″
Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 2 @ 33-¼″
F 7′-4″ 2 @ 34-¼″
7′-6″ 40-5⁄16″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 35-¼″ 7-¼″ 5⁄16″ ¼″ ⅛″ 1⁄16″
H
J
G
7′-8″ 2 @ 24-3⁄16″, 1 @ 24-⅛″
7′-10″ 2 @ 24-13⁄16″, 1 @ 24-⅞″
1 3/4
Door 8′-0″ 3 @ 25-½″
9′-0″ 3 @ 29-½″
10′-0″ 3 @ 33-½″

5″ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 2 @ 30
6′-10″ 2 @ 31
5" x 4 1/2" 7′-0″ 2 @ 32
or
5" x 5" Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 2 @ 33
F 7′-4″ 2 @ 34
7′-6″ 40-5⁄16″ 12-½″ 2 @ 35 7-½″ 5⁄16″ ¼″ ⅛″ 1⁄16″
H
J 7′-8″ 3 @ 24
G
7′-10″ 2 @ 24-11⁄16″, 1 @ 24-⅝″
1 3/4
Door 8′-0″ 2 @ 25-5⁄16″, 1 @ 25-⅜″
9′-0″ 2 @ 29-5⁄16″, 1 @ 29-⅜″
10′-0″ 2 @ 33-5⁄16″, 1 @ 33-⅜″

9
SDI 129-12

Pioneer Industries, Inc.

EC
L Note: Dimensions listed are valid at time of publication. However, manufacturers do
A periodically revise their hinge and strike spacing, therefore, the SDI strongly
Opening
Height D
recommends that individual manufacturers be contacted to verify dimensions.
Hinge
CL Spacing

B
Strike
CL
C

3 1/2″ x 3 1/2″
Hinge
Frame
3-1/2 Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-3/8″ Thick Doors
F A B C D E F G
6′-8″ 2 @ 30-¾″
1/8
1/16
7′-0″ 38″ 11-¾″ 2 @ 32-¾″ 6-¾″ 5⁄16″ 7⁄32″
G
7′-2″ 2 @ 33-¾″
1 3/8
Door

4-½ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 30-¼″
6′-10″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 31-¼″
4 1/2″ x 4 1/2″ 7′-0″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 32-¼″
Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 33-¼″
F 7′-4″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 34-¼″
7′-6″ 38″ 12-¼″ 3 @ 23-½″ 7-¼″ 5⁄16″ 7⁄32″ 3⁄32″ 3⁄32″
H
J
G
7′-8″ 12-3⁄16″ 3 @ 24-3⁄16″
7′-10″ 12-5⁄16″ 3 @ 24-13⁄16″
1 3/4
Door 8′-0″ 12-¼″ 3 @ 25-½″
9′-0″ 12-¼″ 3 @ 29-½″
10′-0″ 12-¼″ 3 @ 33-½″

5″ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 12-½″ 2 @ 30″
6′-10″ 12-½″ 2 @ 31″
5" x 4 1/2"
or
7′-0″ 12-½″ 2 @ 32″
5" x 5" Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 12-½″ 2 @ 33″
F 7′-4″ 12-½″ 2 @ 34″
7′-6″ 38″ 12-9⁄16″ 3 @ 23-5⁄16″ 7-½″ 5⁄16″ 7⁄32″ 3⁄32″ 3⁄32″
H
J 7′-8″ 12-½″ 3 @ 24″
G
7′-10″ 12-⅝″ 3 @ 24-⅝″
1 3/4
Door 8′-0″ 12-9⁄16″ 3 @ 25-5⁄16″
9′-0″ 12-9⁄16″ 3 @ 29-5⁄16″
10′-0″ 12-9⁄16″ 3 @ 33-5⁄16″

10
 SDI 129-12

Republic Doors & Frames

EC
L Note: Dimensions listed are valid at time of publication. However, manufacturers do
A periodically revise their hinge and strike spacing, therefore, the SDI strongly
Opening
Height D
recommends that individual manufacturers be contacted to verify dimensions.
Hinge
CL Spacing

B
Strike
CL
C

3 1/2″ x 3 1/2″
Hinge
Frame
3-1/2 Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-3/8″ Thick Doors
F A B C D E F G
6′-8″ 10-⅜″ 2 @ 29-15⁄16″ 9-¾″
1/8
1/16
7′-0″ 40-5⁄16″ 12-⅜″ 2 @ 29-15⁄16″ 11-¾″ 5⁄16″ ¼″
G
7′-2″ 12-⅜″ 2 @ 30-15⁄16″ 11-¾″
1 3/8
Door

4-½ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 10-⅜″ 2 @ 29-15⁄16″ 9-¾″
6′-10″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 31-¼″ 7-¼″
4 1/2″ x 4 1/2″ 7′-0″ 12-⅜″ 2 @ 29-15⁄16″ 11-¾″
Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 12-⅜″ 2 @ 30-15⁄16″ 11-¾″
F 7′-4″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 34-¼″ 7-¼″
7′-6″ 40-5⁄16″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 35-¼″ 7-¼″ 5⁄16″ ¼″ ⅛″ 1⁄16″
H
J
G
7′-8″ 12-⅜″ 3 @ 24-⅛″ 7-¼″
7′-10″ 12-⅛″ 3 @ 24-⅞″ 7-¼″
1 3/4
Door 8′-0″ 12-¼″ 3 @ 25-½″ 7-¼″
9′-0″ 12-¼″ 3 @ 29-½″ 7-¼″
10′-0″ 12-¼″ 3 @ 33-½″ 7-¼″

5″ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 10-⅜″ 2 @ 29-15⁄16″ 9-¾″
6′-10″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 31-¼″ 7-¼″
5" x 4 1/2" 7′-0″ 12-⅜″ 2 @ 29-15⁄16″ 11-¾″
or
5" x 5" Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 12-⅜″ 2 @ 30-15⁄16″ 11-¾″
F 7′-4″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 34-¼″ 7-¼″
7′-6″ 40-5⁄16″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 35-¼″ 7-¼″ 5⁄16″ ¼″ ⅛″ 1⁄16″
H
J 7′-8″ 12-⅜″ 3 @ 24-⅛″ 7-¼″
G
7′-10″ 12-⅛″ 3 @ 24-⅞″ 7-¼″
1 3/4
Door 8′-0″ 12-¼″ 3 @ 25-½″ 7-¼″
9′-0″ 12-¼″ 3 @ 29-½″ 7-¼″
10′-0″ 12-¼″ 3 @ 33-½″ 7-¼″

11
SDI 129-12

Security Metal Products

EC
L Note: Dimensions listed are valid at time of publication. However, manufacturers do
A periodically revise their hinge and strike spacing, therefore, the SDI strongly
Opening
Height D
recommends that individual manufacturers be contacted to verify dimensions.
CL
Hinge
Spacing
Note: Does not manufacture 1 3/8″ thick doors. Frames for 1 3/8″ doors are manu-
factured by special arrangement only.
B
Strike
CL
C

3 1/2″ x 3 1/2″
Hinge
Frame
3-1/2 Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-3/8″ Thick Doors
F A B C D E F G
1/8
1/16
— — — — — — —
G

1 3/8
Door

4-½ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 30-¼″
6′-10″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 31-¼″
4 1/2″ x 4 1/2″ 7′-0″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 32-¼″
Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 33-¼″
F 7′-4″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 34-¼″
7′-6″ 40-5⁄16″ 10-¼″ 2 @ 36-¼″ 7-¼″ ⅜″ ¼″ 1⁄16″ ⅛″
H
J
G
7′-8″ 12-¼″ 3 @ 24-1⅙4″
7′-10″ 12-¼″ 3 @ 24-53⁄64″
1 3/4
Door 8′-0″ 12-¼″ 3 @ 25-½″
9′-0″ 10-¼″ 3 @ 30-5⁄32″
10′-0″ 12-¼″ 3 @ 33-½″

5″ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 12-½″ 2 @ 30″
6′-10″ 12-½″ 2 @ 31″
5" x 4 1/2" 7′-0″ 12-½″ 2 @ 32″
or
5" x 5" Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 12-½″ 2 @ 33″
F 7′-4″ 12-½″ 2 @ 34″
7′-6″ 40-5⁄16″ 10-½″ 2 @ 36″ 7-½″ ⅜″ ¼″ 1⁄16″ ⅛″
H
J 7′-8″ 12-½″ 3 @ 24″
G
7′-10″ 12-½″ 3 @ 24-43⁄64″
1 3/4
Door 8′-0″ 12-½″ 3 @ 25-2⅙4″
9′-0″ 10-½″ 3 @ 30″
10′-0″ 12-½″ 3 @ 33-2⅙4″

12
 SDI 129-12

Steelcraft

EC
L Note: Dimensions listed are valid at time of publication. However, manufacturers do
A periodically revise their hinge and strike spacing, therefore, the SDI strongly
Opening
Height D
recommends that individual manufacturers be contacted to verify dimensions.
Hinge
CL Spacing

B
Strike
CL
C

3 1/2″ x 3 1/2″
Hinge
Frame
3-1/2 Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-3/8″ Thick Doors
F A B C D E F G
6′-8″ 59-⅞″
1/8
1/16
7′-0″ 40-5⁄16″ 10-⅜″ 2 @ 31-15⁄16″ 9-¾″ 5⁄16″ ¼″
G
7′-2″ 2 @ 32-15⁄16″
1 3/8
Door

4-½ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 2 @ 29-15⁄16″
6′-10″ 2 @ 30-15⁄16″
4 1/2″ x 4 1/2″ 7′-0″ 2 @ 31-15⁄16″
Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 2 @ 32-15⁄16″
F 7′-4″ 2 @ 33-15⁄16″
7′-6″ 40-5⁄16″ 10-⅜″ 2 @ 34-15⁄16″ 9-¾″ 5⁄16″ ¼″ ⅛″ 1⁄16″
H
J
G
7′-8″ 3 @ 23-6⅙4″
7′-10″ 3 @ 24-⅝″
1 3/4
Door 8′-0″ 3 @ 25-19⁄64″
9′-0″ 3 @ 25-19⁄64″
10′-0″ 3 @ 25-19⁄64″

5″ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 2 @ 29-15⁄16″
6′-10″ 2 @ 30-15⁄16″
5" x 4 1/2" 7′-0″ 2 @ 31-15⁄16″
or
5" x 5" Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 2 @ 32-15⁄16″
F 7′-4″ 2 @ 33-15⁄16″
7′-6″ 40-5⁄16″ 10-⅜″ 2 @ 34-15⁄16″ 9-¾″ 5⁄16″ ¼″ ⅛″ 1⁄16″
H
J 7′-8″ 3 @ 23-6⅙4″
G
7′-10″ 3 @ 24-⅝″
1 3/4
Door 8′-0″ 3 @ 25-19⁄64″
9′-0″ 3 @ 25-19⁄64″
10′-0″ 3 @ 25-19⁄64″

13
SDI 129-12

The following companies are included for historical purposes only.

The validity of their hinge and strike spacing data cannot be confirmed.

14
 SDI 129-12

Benchmark

EC
L Note: Benchmark is no longer a member of the Steel Door Institute. Its hinge and
A strike spacing are included for legacy purposes; the validity of the data cannot
Opening
Height D
be confirmed
Hinge
CL Spacing

B
Strike
CL
C

3 1/2″ x 3 1/2″
Hinge
Frame 3-1/2 Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-3/8″ Thick Doors
F
A B C D E F G
1/8 — — — — — — —
1/16
G

1 3/8
Door

4-½ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 30-¼″
6′-10″ 14-¼″ 2 @ 30-¼″
4 1/2″ x 4 1/2″ 7′-0″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 32-¼″
Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 14-¼″ 2 @ 32-¼″
F 7′-4″ 40-5⁄16″ 12-¼″ 2 @ 34-¼″ 7-¼″ 1⅓2″ ¼″ ⅛″ 3⁄32″
7′-6″ 14-¼″ 2 @ 34-¼″
H
J
G
7′-8″ 8-¼″ 3 @ 25-½″
7′-10″ 10-¼″ 3 @ 25-½″
1 3/4
Door 8′-0″ 12-¼″ 3 @ 25-½″

5″ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
— — — — — — — — —

5" x 4 1/2"
or
5" x 5" Hinge Frame
F

H
J
G

1 3/4
Door

15
SDI 129-12

Copco

EC
L Note: Copco is no longer a member of the Steel Door Institute. Its hinge and strike
A spacing are included for legacy purposes; the validity of the data cannot be
Opening
Height D
confirmed
Hinge
CL Spacing

B
Strike
CL
C

3 1/2″ x 3 1/2″
Hinge
Frame
3-1/2 Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-3/8″ Thick Doors
F A B C D E F G
6′-8″ 2 @ 29-15⁄16″
1/8
1/16
G
7′-0″ 40-5⁄16″ 10-⅜″ 2 @ 31-15⁄16″ 9-¾″ 5⁄16″ 7⁄32″
7′-2″ 2 @ 32-15⁄16″
1 3/8
Door

4-½ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 2 @ 29-15⁄16″
6′-10″ 2 @ 30-15⁄16″
4 1/2″ x 4 1/2″ 7′-0″ 2 @ 31-15⁄16″
Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 2 @ 32-15⁄16″
F 7′-4″ 40-5⁄16″ 10-⅜″ 2 @ 33-15⁄16″ 9-¾″ 5⁄16″ 7⁄32″ ⅓2″ 3⁄32″
7′-6″ 2 @ 34-15⁄16″
H
J
G
7′-8″ 3 @ 23-19⁄64″
7′-10″ 3 @ 24-19⁄64″
1 3/4
Door 8′-0″ 3 @ 25-19⁄64″

5″ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 2 @ 29-15⁄16″
6′-10″ 2 @ 30-15⁄16″
5" x 4 1/2" 7′-0″ 2 @ 31-15⁄16″
or
5" x 5" Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 2 @ 32-15⁄16″
F
7′-4″ 40-5⁄16″ 10-⅜″ 2 @ 33-15⁄16″ 9-¾″ 5⁄16″ 7⁄32″ ⅓2″ 3⁄32″
H 7′-6″ 2 @ 34-15⁄16″
J
G 7′-8″ 3 @ 23-19⁄64″
1 3/4 7′-10″ 3 @ 24-19⁄64″
Door
8′-0″ 3 @ 25-19⁄64″

16
 SDI 129-12

Kewanee

EC
L Note: Kewanee is no longer a member of the Steel Door Institute. Its hinge and
A strike spacing are included for legacy purposes; the validity of the data cannot
Opening
Height D
be confirmed
Hinge
CL Spacing

B
Strike
CL
C

3 1/2″ x 3 1/2″
Hinge
Frame
3-1/2 Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-3/8″ Thick Doors
F A B C D E F G
6′-8″ 60-⅛″
1/8
1/16
G
7′-0″ 40-5⁄16″ 11-¾″ 2 @ 32-1⁄16″ 9-⅝″ ¼″ 3⁄16″
7′-2″ 2 @ 33-1⁄16″
1 3/8
Door

4-½ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 2 @ 30-1⁄16″
6′-10″ 2 @ 31-1⁄16″
4 1/2″ x 4 1/2″ 7′-0″ 2 @ 32-1⁄16″
Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 2 @ 33-1⁄16″
F 7′-4″ 40-5⁄16″ 10-¼″ 2 @ 34-1⁄16″ 9-⅝″ ⅜″ ¼″ 1⁄16″ ⅛″
7′-6″ 2 @ 35-1⁄16″
H
J
G
7′-8″ 24-1⁄16″, 24″, 24-1⁄16″
7′-10″ 24-11⁄16″, 24-¾″, 24-11⁄16″
1 3/4
Door 8′-0″ 3 @ 25-⅜″

5″ Hinge & Strike Comparison for 1-¾″ Thick Doors

A B C D E F G H J
6′-8″ 2 @ 30-1⁄16″
6′-10″ 2 @ 31-1⁄16″
5" x 4 1/2" 7′-0″ 2 @ 32-1⁄16″
or
5" x 5" Hinge Frame 7′-2″ 2 @ 33-1⁄16″
F 7′-4″ 40-5⁄16″ 10-¼″ 2 @ 34-1⁄16″ 9-⅝″ ⅜″ ¼″ 1⁄16″ ⅛″
7′-6″ 2 @ 35-1⁄16″
H
J 7′-8″ 24-1⁄16″, 24″, 24-1⁄16″
G
7′-10″ 24-11⁄16″, 24-¾″, 24-11⁄16″
1 3/4
Door 8′-0″ 3 @ 25-⅜″

17
 MEMBERS OF THE
AVAILABLE PUBLICATIONS STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE
BLACK MOUNTAIN DOOR
Specifications 310 Flint Drive
Mt. Sterling, KY 40353
ANSI/SDI A250.6 Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcings on Standard
(859) 274-0411
Steel Doors and Frames www.blackmountaindoor.com
ANSI/SDI A250.8 SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors & CECO DOOR
Frames 9159 Telecom Drive
SDI-108 Recommended Selection & Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors Milan, TN 38358
(731) 686-8345
SDI-118 Basic Fire Door, Fire Door Frame, Transom/Sidelight Frame, and www.cecodoor.com
Window Frame Requirements
CURRIES
SDI-128 Guidelines for Acoustical Performance of Standard Steel Doors & P.O. Box 1648
Frames Mason City, IA 50402-1648
(641) 423-1334
SDI-129 Hinge & Strike Spacing
www.curries.com

Test Procedures DEANSTEEL MANUFACTURING CO.

111 Merchant Street
ANSI/SDI A250.3 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish San Antonio, TX 78204-1496
Coatings for Steel Doors & Frames (210) 226-8271
www.deansteel.com
ANSI/SDI A250.4 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for
Steel Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors DOOR COMPONENTS INC.
7980 Redwood Avenue
ANSI/SDI A250.10 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Fontana, CA 92336-1638
Surfaces for Steel Doors & Frames (909) 770-5700
www.doorcomponents.com
ANSI/SDI A250.13 Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components
for Swinging Door Assemblies MESKER DOOR, INC.
3440 Stanwood Boulevard
SDI-113 Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal
Huntsville, AL 35811-9021
Transmittance of Steel Door & Frame Assemblies (256) 851-6670
SDI-131 Accelerated Physical Endurance Test Procedure for Steel Doors, www.meskerdoor.com
Frames and Frame Anchors MPI
319 North Hills Road
Construction Details Corbin, KY 40701
(606) 523-0173
ANSI/SDI A250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames www.metalproductsinc.com
SDI-110 Standard Steel Doors & Frames for Modular Masonry Construction PIONEER INDUSTRIES, INC.
SDI-111 Recommended Details for Standard Details Steel Doors, Frames, 171 South Newman Street
Accessories and Related Components Hackensack, NJ 07601
(201) 933-1900
SDI-122 Installation & Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors & www.pioneerindustries.com
Frames
REPUBLIC DOORS & FRAMES
SDI-132 Drywall Slip-On Frames 155 Republic Drive
McKenzie, TN 38201-0580
(731) 352-3383
Miscellaneous Documents www.republicdoor.com
ANSI/SDI A250.7 Nomenclature for Standard Steel Doors & Steel Frames SECURITY METAL PRODUCTS
SDI-112 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors & 5700 Hannum Avenue, Suite 250
Frames Culver City, CA 90230
(310) 641-6690
SDI-117 Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors & Frames www.secmet.com
SDI-124 Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors & Frames STEELCRAFT
SDI-127 Industry Alert Series (A-L) Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies
9017 Blue Ash Road
SDI-130 Electrified Hinge Preparations Cincinnati, OH 45242
(513) 745-6400
AUDIO-VISUAL PROGRAMS ON VHS ALSO AVAILABLE www.steelcraft.com

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
440.899.0010 • FAX 440.892.1404
8/30/2012 www.steeldoor.org
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
130 - 05 (Reaffirmed 2010)

Electronic Hinge Preparations

1 Purpose
It is the intention of this document to furnish users of standard steel frames with practical information regarding an
acceptable method for preparing frames for 4-1/2" electric hinges. This document will allow frame manufacturers to
provide frames prior to having knowledge of the specific electric hinge being used.

2 Scope
The information contained herein pertains to frames manufactured in accordance with ANSI A250.8. The prepara-
tion as defined herein will accommodate the majority of electric hinges sold. It is the responsibility of the hardware
specifier to assure compatible hinges are used.

3 Reference Documents
ANSI A250.6 Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
ANSI A250.8 SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.

4 Location
The preparation for electric hinges is intended to be non-load bearing. Therefore it shall be located in the center
hinge preparation on frames with 1-1/2 pair of hinges, and on the second hinge from the bottom on frames with 2
pair of hinges.

5 Hinge Reinforcement
The hinge reinforcement shall comply with ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A250.8, and shall incorporate cutouts as shown
in Figure 1.

6 Junction Box
A junction box shall be provided to facilitate wiring and connector installation. In addition, a hole shall be provided
at the top and bottom of the junction box to facilitate conduit (see Figure 1). It is the responsibility of the electrical
contractor to plug any unused holes.

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2010 Steel Door Institute
SDI 130-05

2
 SDI 130-05

20 Ga. junction box

welded to frame Door &
Cutout
$-

NOTE:
Box configuration 4- " $- Cutout
must provide access + -" – 0
to facilitate wiring and
connector installation.

Clearance
cutout only –
No reinf. reqʼd
1-" + -" – 0

$-" ± -"

1-"& ,1"

Opening height
39 "
41 "
42 "
46 "
47 "
Hinge jamb

Anchors to suit

" diameter
$- Cutout
top and bottom
7' – 10"
6' – 8"
7' – 0"
7' – 2"

8' – 0"

" min
1-"

2"

NOTE:
Detail does not apply to Cutout location
drywall slip-on type frames

Electrified Continuous Hinge Preparation on Standard Steel Frame

3
 MEMBERS OF THE
AVAILABLE PUBLICATIONS STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE
AMwELD INTERNATIONAL, LLC
301 South Northpoint Drive, Suite 400
Specifications
Coppell, TX 75019
ANSI/SDI A250.6 Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcings on Standard (888) 775-2397
Steel Doors and Frames www.amweld.com
ANSI/SDI A250.8 SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors & CECO DOOR PRODUCTS
Frames 9159 Telecom Drive
SDI-108 Recommended Selection & Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors Milan, TN 38358
(731) 686-8345
SDI-109 Hardware for Standard Steel Doors & Frames www.cecodoor.com
SDI-118 Basic Fire Door Requirements CURRIES COMPANy
SDI-128 Guidelines for Acoustical Performance of Standard Steel Doors & P.O. Box 1648
Frames Mason City, IA 50402-1648
(641) 423-1334
SDI-129 Hinge & Strike Spacing www.curries.com

Test Procedures DEANSTEEL MANUFACTURINg CO.

111 Merchant Street
ANSI/SDI A250.3 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish San Antonio, TX 78204-1496
Coatings for Steel Doors & Frames (210) 226-8271
ANSI/SDI A250.4 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for www.deansteel.com
Steel Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors & Hardware Reinforcings DOOR COMPONENTS INC.
ANSI/SDI A250.10 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel 7980 Redwood Avenue
Fontana, CA 92336-1638
Surfaces for Steel Doors & Frames
(909) 770-5700
ANSI/SDI A250.13 Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components www.doorcomponents.com
for Swinging Door Assemblies
MESkER DOOR, INC.
SDI-113 Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal 3440 Stanwood Boulevard
Transmittance of Steel Door & Frame Assemblies Huntsville, AL 35811-9021
(256) 851-6670
SDI-131 Accelerated Physical Endurance Test Procedure for Steel Doors, www.meskerdoor.com
Frames and Frame Anchors
METAL PRODUCTS, INC.
Construction Details 319 North Hills Road
Corbin, KY 40701
ANSI/SDI A250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames (606) 523-0173
SDI-110 Standard Steel Doors & Frames for Modular Masonry Construction www.metalproductsinc.com
SDI-111 Recommended Details for Standard Details Steel Doors, Frames, PIONEER INDUSTRIES, INC.
Accessories and Related Components 171 South Newman Street
Hackensack, NJ 07601
SDI-122 Installation & Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors &
(201) 933-1900
Frames www.pioneerindustries.com
SDI Drywall Slip-On Frames
REPUBLIC
155 Republic Drive
Miscellaneous Documents McKenzie, TN 38201-0580
ANSI/SDI A250.7 Nomenclature for Standard Steel Doors & Steel Frames (731) 352-3383
www.republicdoor.com
SDI-106 Recommended Standard Door Type Nomenclature
SDI-112 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors & SECURITy METAL PRODUCTS CORP.
5700 Hannum Avenue, Suite 250
Frames
Culver City, CA 90230
SDI-117 Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors & Frames (310) 641-6690
www.secmet.com
SDI-124 Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors & Frames
SDI-127 Industry Alert Series (A-L) STEELCRAFT
Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies
SDI-130 Electrified Hinge Preparations 9017 Blue Ash Road
SDI What is The SDI? Cincinnati, OH 45242
(513) 745-6400
AUDIO-VISUAL PROgRAMS ON VHS ALSO AVAILABLE www.steelcraft.com

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
440.899.0010 • FAX 440.892.1404
11/9/2009 www.steeldoor.org
 SDI
TECHNICAL DATA SERIES
131 - 10

Accelerated Physical Endurance

Test Procedure for Steel Doors

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
© 2010 Steel Door Institute
 SDI 131-10

Accelerated Physical Endurance Test Procedure for Steel Doors

1 Purpose Care shall be taken to ensure the hinges are

properly applied to the door and frame, and
The purpose of this test procedure is to provide any required hinge fillers are in place. The initial
manufacturers with an accelerated method of clearances between the door and frame shall be
testing the performance of doors. recorded as part of the performance test report.
This test procedure will provide performance data Silencers, weather strip or gasketing shall be
for comparative purposes and is not intended installed on the frame, and the stop face of the
to simulate field operating conditions. This test door shall contact them.
will subject the product to more severe condi-
tions than those experienced in normal field 4 Test Specimen
operation. The test shall be performed on a 3'0" wide x
7'0" high nominal size door; although, other sizes
2 Apparatus and Equipment are permitted to be evaluated at the discretion
The main testing structure shall be constructed of the sponsor.
as shown in Figures 1 and 2. The structure shall A detailed description of the door construction
conform to the parts shown, except the opening shall be recorded as part of the test report.
width and height are permitted to vary, allowing This information shall cover all components as
the testing of various door sizes. well as applicable processes (such as welding,
The cycling mechanism shall be positioned so that bonding, etc.) used for attaching and connecting
the connecting arm is perpendicular to the stop components.
face of the door. It shall have a threaded swivel
connector that is attached to the door through 5 Cycle Test
the lock preparation or by means of a bracket The duration of the test shall be 250,000 cycles
mounted directly to the door face at the vertical for Level C; 500,000 cycles for Level B; 1,000,000
and horizontal location of the lock preparation. cycles for Level A; or longer, if specified by the
The cycling mechanism shall have an operating test sponsor. A general inspection of the door
stroke so that the door lock edge will be opened shall be made at 25,000 cycle intervals for the
not less than 4 inches from the frame stop and first 100,000 cycles and at 50,000 cycles there-
then returned to the closed position. The mini- after until the completion of the required number
mum cycle rate shall be one cycle per second. of cycles. The general inspection shall cover all
A mechanical or electronic counter shall be used components readily accessible, such as face
to record the cycles. skins, exposed hinge and/or lock edges, head
and sill closures, flush-closing channels, hinge
3 Preparation for Test reinforcements, etc. Additionally, the inspection
shall cover the welding, bonding, staking, me-
The door shall be hung in the frame on hinges
chanical interlocking, etc., used to connect the
conforming to the most current edition of ANSI
various door components.
A156.7-2009, “Template Hinge Dimensions”. The
hinges and their locations shall be noted on Form The results shall be recorded on a standard per-
1 of the report. formance report “Door Test Form 1.”

1
SDI 131-10



  

  



 ­ †‡

    

     
  
 ˆ
­ €

‚ƒ„

  ‚


„  ‡‡‡‰­Š‹
Œ ­Ž­‡
‘ 

Figure 1 – Slam Test Detail

When an independent third party organization is as described in Figure 2. The deflection noted
employed to certify the overall performance of on the dial indicator shall be plotted against
the door design, they shall validate the initial, the load applied to the corner. A maximum 300
mid-point, and final observations. pounds pressure shall be applied. The pressure
shall then be reduced in 30-pound increments
6 Twist Test and the deflection recorded on the report form.
Any deterioration of the door construction as a A smooth curve drawn through the points shall
result of the cycle testing shall be determined graphically demonstrate the reaction of the door.
through a series of twist tests. These tests shall Use “Performance Report – Door Test Form 2”
occur prior to the onset of the cycle test and at to graphically represent the deflections.
the end of the cycle test. Measurements for deflections shall be taken
During the twist test, the hinge pins shall be one minute or less after the force has been
removed and the door moved to the twist test stabilized.
fixture (if a separate fixture is used) and clamped At the completion of each twist test, and prior
in place as shown in Figure 2. to the continuance of the cycle test, the hinges
If the same fixture is used for both the cycle shall be inspected and lubricated or replaced,
test and twist test, the hinge pins shall be re- if necessary.
moved and the door clamped in place as shown
in Figure 2. 7 Acceptance Criteria
Pressures in 30-pound increments shall be applied 7.1 Doors shall not show any visible signs of
at the upper lock corner through the screw jack, metal fatigue cracking, or deformation on the
or equivalent device, and force gage in an area edges or the door face.

2
 SDI 131-10

7.2 Doors of either laminated or welded construc- 7.6 As a result of the twist test, the maximum
tion shall not delaminate or have weld breakage deflection shall not exceed 2- ½ " when loaded
in excess of 10% of total bonded or welded to 300 lb for Level C doors. For Level B and A
surface. doors, the maximum deflection shall not exceed
1- ¼ " when loaded to 300 lb.
7.3 Top, bottom, or edge channels must remain
securely in place, with no signs of weld or bond 7.7 Permanent deflection measured within 5-
breakage. minutes after the force is removed shall not
exceed ⅛ ".
7.4 Doors of stile and panel or stile and rail
construction shall not be misaligned.
7.5 Where visible seams are inherent in the door
design, no opening or spreading shall occur.

 
 ­€‚ƒ

  ­€‚ƒ


 

  
 

     
     ­€‚ƒ 

„   
   †

  

  

Figure 2 – Twist Test Detail

3
4
Performance Report – Cycle Test Form No. 1

Door Manufacturer: Door Model: Hinge Manufacturer:

SDI 131-10

Weight of Door: Door Size: Hinge Model:

Test No.: Start Test Date: Finish Test Date:

Inspection Intervals – (000)

25 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000

Edge Condition

Top

Intermediate

Hinge
Preparations
Bottom

Top Closer Condition

Bottom Closer Condition

Condition of Core

Condition of Panels

“S” indicates satisfactory performance. Use footnotes under remarks for any further explanations.

Remarks:
 Performance Report — Twist Test Form No. 2

Test No: Date:

Door Manufacturer: Door Model:
Door Size: Weight of Door:

3.0

2.5

2.0

1.5

Deflection – Inches
1.0

0.5

0.0
0 30 60 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 270 240 210 180 150 120 90 60 30 0
Applied Load – LBF

5
SDI 131-10
 MEMBERS OF THE
AVAILABLE PUBLICATIONS STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

Specifications CECO DOOR PRODUCTS

9159 Telecom Drive
ANSI/SDI A250.6 Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcings on Standard Milan, TN 38358
Steel Doors and Frames (731) 686-8345
www.cecodoor.com
ANSI/SDI A250.8 SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors &
Frames CURRIES COMPANy
SDI-108 Recommended Selection & Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors P.O. Box 1648
Mason City, IA 50402-1648
SDI-118 Basic Fire Door, Fire Door Frame, Transom/Sidelight Frame, and (641) 423-1334
Window Frame Requirements www.curries.com
SDI-128 Guidelines for Acoustical Performance of Standard Steel Doors &
Frames DEANSTEEL MANUFACTURINg CO.
111 Merchant Street
SDI-129 Hinge & Strike Spacing San Antonio, TX 78204-1496
(210) 226-8271
Test Procedures www.deansteel.com
ANSI/SDI A250.3 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish
DOOR COMPONENTS INC.
Coatings for Steel Doors & Frames
7980 Redwood Avenue
ANSI/SDI A250.4 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Fontana, CA 92336-1638
Steel Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors (909) 770-5700
www.doorcomponents.com
ANSI/SDI A250.10 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel
Surfaces for Steel Doors & Frames MESkER DOOR, INC.
ANSI/SDI A250.13 Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components 3440 Stanwood Boulevard
for Swinging Door Assemblies Huntsville, AL 35811-9021
(256) 851-6670
SDI-113 Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal www.meskerdoor.com
Transmittance of Steel Door & Frame Assemblies
SDI-131 Accelerated Physical Endurance Test Procedure for Steel Doors, METAL PRODUCTS, INC.
319 North Hills Road
Frames and Frame Anchors
Corbin, KY 40701
(606) 523-0173
Construction Details
www.metalproductsinc.com
ANSI/SDI A250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames
PIONEER INDUSTRIES, INC.
SDI-110 Standard Steel Doors & Frames for Modular Masonry Construction 171 South Newman Street
SDI-111 Recommended Details for Standard Details Steel Doors, Frames, Hackensack, NJ 07601
Accessories and Related Components (201) 933-1900
www.pioneerindustries.com
SDI-122 Installation & Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors &
Frames REPUBLIC
SDI-132 Drywall Slip-On Frames 155 Republic Drive
McKenzie, TN 38201-0580
Miscellaneous Documents (731) 352-3383
www.republicdoor.com
ANSI/SDI A250.7 Nomenclature for Standard Steel Doors & Steel Frames
SDI-112 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors & SECURITy METAL PRODUCTS CORP.
Frames 5700 Hannum Avenue, Suite 250
Culver City, CA 90230
SDI-117 Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors & Frames (310) 641-6690
www.secmet.com
SDI-124 Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors & Frames
SDI-127 Industry Alert Series (A-L) STEELCRAFT
SDI-130 Electrified Hinge Preparations Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies
9017 Blue Ash Road
SDI What is The SDI? Cincinnati, OH 45242
(513) 745-6400
AUDIO-VISUAL PROgRAMS ON VHS ALSO AVAILABLE www.steelcraft.com

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
440.899.0010 • FAX 440.892.1404
4/5/2012 www.steeldoor.org
Drywall
Slip-On
Frames

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD - CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
 Drywall Slip-On Frames
SDI members’ drywall slip-on frames are the SMART CHOICE 5. Knocked-down frames have only three pieces for quick
for your drywall frame needs. installation, from rough opening to complete framed door-
way in less than 10 minutes.
Their many advantages include:
6. Designed to fit most any stud wall/drywall construction.
1. Many stock sizes available for quick delivery and maxi-
mum economy. 7. Designed for installation after wall is erected, thus elimi-
nating costly construction delays.
2. Frames are shipped knocked-down for utmost shipping
and storage efficiency. 8. Available with fire protection rating.
3. Frames are fabricated out of heavy gage steel for supe- 9. Factory finish paint available as an option for additional
rior durability and resistance to damage. jobsite labor savings.
4. Factory prepared for standard, commercial grade, build- When you add up all the features, your choice is clear. Specify
ers hardware or listed hardware. SDI members’ drywall slip-on frames: The SMART CHOICE.

Compression
Anchor

Corner Connection*
*May be mitered or coped

Optional
Security Device

Frame Profile
NOTE: For specific information on various frame
profiles see individual company catalog for details. Sill Anchors

Technical data
Hardware provisions — Frames for 1-3/8" doors shall be Labeled frames — Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mu-
prepared for 3- 1/2" x 3-1/2" template type hinges and for tual, Warnock Hersey International and I.C.B.O. labeling is
ANSI A115.3 strike. Frames for 1-3/4" doors shall be pre- available for 20 minute to 1-1/2 hour applications.
pared for 4-1/2" x 4-1/2" template type hinges and for ANSI
Material — Available in 16 gage and 18 gage cold rolled or
A115.1 or A115.2 universal strike. Rubber silencers are
galvanized steel.
required, (3) per strike jamb and (2) per head for double
openings. Consult individual manufacturers for their prac- Opening sizes — Available to 9 feet high in both singles
tice. and pairs, widths to 8 feet.
Jamb depth — From 4-3/4" to 7-1/8" in 1/8" increments. Other Paint — Factory applied prime paint shall meet the require-
depths available, consult individual manufacturers. ments of ANSI A224.1. Finish paint is optional.

1
 Installation instructions
The following 4 steps listed below, illustrate how quick and easy SDI members’ drywall frames are to install. Your
rough opening is transformed into a neatly trimmed doorway in less than 10 minutes.

Provide for rough opening dimensions in accor- Start header onto wall engaging corner clips and/or
dance with individual manufacturers recommenda- aligning tabs of jamb and push header up into position.
tions.
Place second jamb onto wall and engage corner clips
Fully retract compression anchor and install sill an- and/or aligning tabs with the header. Pivot the jamb
chors (if loose type are used) then slip jamb into posi- into position on the wall to form a completely as-
tion over sill. sembled frame.

Adjust compression anchors evenly until they contact Install spreader bar at base and fasten sill anchor of
studs. Level the header by shimming under jambs if strike jamb.
required.
Square frame and tighten into final position by adjust-
Plumb hinge jamb and fasten hinge jamb sill anchors. ing compression anchor screws.

NOTE: Some manufacturer’s instructions may vary slightly, refer to instructions supplied with frames.

2
Advantages ...
USING STANDARD DRYWALL SLIP-ON FRAMES
• STOCK SIZES MEAN READY DELIVERY
• SHIPPED KNOCKED-DOWN
• HEAVY GAGE STEEL
• PREPARED FOR STANDARD BUILDERS HARDWARE
• THREE PIECE FRAMES FOR FAST INSTALLATION
• ADAPTABLE TO MOST DRYWALL CONSTRUCTION
• INSTALL AFTER WALL IS ERECTED
• FIRE LABEL AVAILABILITY
• FINISH PAINT AVAILABILITY

For more information on steel doors and frames, contact any of the following members of the Steel Door Institute
AMWELD BUILDING PRODUCTS INC. CURRIES COMPANY PIONEER INDUSTRIES INC.
P.O. Box 267 P.O. Box 1648 401 Washington Avenue
Garrettsville, OH 44231 525 9th Street, SE Carlstadt, NJ 07072
(330) 527-4385 Mason City, IA 50401 (201) 933-1900
FAX (330) 527-4510 (641) 423-1334 FAX (201) 933-9580
FAX (641) 423-9104
REPUBLIC BUILDERS PRODUCTS
BENCHMARK COMMERCIAL DOORS DEANSTEEL MANUFACTURING CO. 155 Republic Drive
Division of General Products Co., Inc. 111 Merchant Street McKenzie, TN 38201-0580
P.O. Box 7387 San Antonio, TX 78204-1496 (901) 352-3383
Fredericksburg, VA 22404 (210) 226-8271 FAX (901) 352-3001
(540) 898-5800 FAX (210) 226-0913
FAX (540) 898-5894 SECURITY METAL PRODUCTS CORP.
5700 Hannum Avenue
THE KEWANEE CORPORATION Suite 250
CECO DOOR PRODUCTS P.O. Box 309 Culver City, CA 90230
A United Dominion Company Kewanee, IL 61443 (310) 641-6690
750 Old Hickory Boulevard (309) 853-4481 FAX (310) 641-6601
One Brentwood Commons, Suite 150 FAX (309) 853-5466
Brentwood, TN 37027 STEELCRAFT
(615) 661-5030 MESKER DOOR, INC. IR Security & Safety
FAX (615) 370-5299 3440 Stanwood Boulevard 9017 Blue Ash Road
Huntsville, AL 35811 Cincinnati, OH 45242
(256) 851-6670 (513) 745-6400
FAX (888) 851-7896 FAX (513) 745-6446

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
440/899-0010 • FAX 440/892-1404
www.steeldoor.org
 ANSI/SDI A250.3-2007 (R2011)
Revision of ANSI A250.3-1999

Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for —

Factory Applied Finish Coatings
for Steel Doors and Frames
ANSI/SDI A250.3-2007

STEEL
DOOR
INSTITUTE

SPONSOR
Steel Door Institute
Approved February 12, 2007
 ANSI/SDI ®
A250.3-2007 (R2011)
Revision of
ANSI/SDI A250.3-1999

American National Standard

Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for

Factory Applied Finish Coatings
for Steel Doors and Frames

Secretariat
Steel Door Institute

Approved February 12, 2007

American National Standards Institute, Inc.
American Approval of an American National Standard requires verification by ANSl
that the requirements for due process, consensus, and other criteria for
National approval have been met by the standards developer.

Standard Consensus is established when, in the judgement of the ANSl Board of

Standards Review, substantial agreement has been reached by directly
and materially affected interests. Substantial agreement means much more
than a simple majority, but not necessarily unanimity. Consensus requires
that all views and objections be considered, and that a concerted effort
be made toward their resolution.
The use of American National Standards is completely voluntary; their exis-
tence does not in any respect preclude anyone, whether they have approved
the standards or not, from manufacturing, marketing, purchasing, or using
products, processes, or procedures not conforming to the standards.
The American National Standards Institute does not develop standards and
will in no circumstances give any interpretation of any American National
Standard. Moreover, no person shall have the right or authority to issue
an interpretation of an American National Standard in the name of the
American National Standards Institute. Requests for interpretations should
be addressed to the secretariat or sponsor whose name appears on the
title page of this standard.
CAUTION NOTICE: This American National Standard may be revised or
withdrawn at any time. The procedures of the American National Stan-
dards Institute require that action be taken periodically to reaffirm, revise,
or withdraw this standard. Purchasers of American National Standards
may receive current information on all standards by calling or writing the
American National Standards Institute.

Published by

Steel Door Institute

30200 Detroit Road, Cleveland, Ohio 44145-1967

Copyright © 2012 by Steel Door Institute

All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced in any

form, in an electronic retrieval system or otherwise,
without prior written permission of the publisher.

Printed in the United States of America

ANSI/SDI A250.3-2007
Contents
Page
Foreword............................................................................................. ii
1 General..........................................................................................1
1.1 Scope......................................................................................1
1.2 Reference Documents..............................................................1
2 Material. . ........................................................................................1
3 Testing...........................................................................................2
3.1 Salt spray test. . ........................................................................2
3.2 Condensation testing (humidity)...............................................2
3.3 Accelerated weathering test.....................................................2
3.4 Impact test...............................................................................2
3.5 Film adhesion test....................................................................2
3.6 Abrasion test............................................................................2
4 Acceptance criteria........................................................................2
4.1 Salt spray resistance................................................................2
4.2 Condensation resistance..........................................................3
4.3 Accelerated weathering resistance...........................................3
4.4 Impact test...............................................................................3
4.5 Film adhesion...........................................................................3
4.6 Abrasion resistance..................................................................3
5 Report.. ..........................................................................................3
6 General..........................................................................................3
6.1 Testing laboratory. . ...................................................................3
6.2 Certification. . ............................................................................3
Tables
1 Rust grades...................................................................................4
2 Classification of adhesive test results............................................8
Figures
1 Visual reference for percentage of rust.. .........................................4
2 Blister size #2 . . .............................................................................5
3 Blister size #4 . . .............................................................................5
4 Blister size #6 . . .............................................................................6
5 Blister size #8 . . .............................................................................6
6 Photographic reference standard for degree of chalking ...............7

i
Foreword (This Foreword is not part of American National Standard A250.3-2007)

The material contained in this document has been developed under the
auspices of the Technical Committee of the Steel Door Institute.
The original standard was issued on July 28, 1980 and was last revised
in 1999. The current edition is a revision of the 1999 document with the
contents being updated to reflect changes and advances that have taken
place in the steel door and frame industry since that time.
Suggestions for improvement gained in the use of this standard will be
welcome. They should be sent to the Steel Door Institute, 30200 Detroit
Road, Cleveland, Ohio 44145-1967.
The organizations that have approved this standard are as follows:
American Institute of Architects
Builders Hardware Manufacturers’ Association
Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers’ Association
Door and Hardware Institute
FM Approvals
General Services Administration
Hollow Metal Manufacturers’ Association / Division of National Association
of Architectural Metal Manufacturers’ Association
International Conference of Building Officials
Intertek Testing Services
Manufactured Housing Institute
National Association of Home Builders
Steel Door Institute
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
Window and Door Manufacturers’ Association

ii
The Accredited Standards Committee A250 TC-1 developed this standard
and had the following personnel at the time of approval:

Robert M. Berhinig, Chairman

J. Jeffery Wherry, Secretary
Organization Represented Name of Representative
American Institute of Architects.................................................. Joseph Berchenko
Amweld Building Products LLC.................................................. Mike Kolovich
Benchmark Commercial Doors................................................... TBD
Builders Hardware Manufacturers’ Association.......................... Mike Tierney
Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers’ Association...................... Bud Bulley
Ceco Door Products.................................................................... Thomas R. Janicak
Curries Company........................................................................ Dave Dedic
Deansteel Manufacturing Company............................................ Claus D. Heide
Door and Hardware Institute....................................................... John Geniesse
FM Approvals.............................................................................. Mark Tyrol
General Services Administration................................................. Stuart Palmer
Hollow Metal Manufacturers’ Association / Division of
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers........ Russell Tauscher
Ingersoll-Rand............................................................................. Kurt Roeper
International Conference of Building Officials............................. Paul Armstrong
Intertek Testing Services............................................................. Nancy Kokesh
The Kewanee Corporation.......................................................... Fred L. Pipin
Manufactured Housing Institute.................................................. Mark Nunn
Mesker Door, Inc......................................................................... Mike Torres
National Association of Home Builders....................................... Jeff Inks
Pioneer Industries........................................................................ Mitchell Dorf
Republic...................................................................................... Jason Lisewski
Security Metal Products Corporation.......................................... Daniel Buffenbarger
Steel Door Institute...................................................................... J. Jeffery Wherry
Underwriters Laboratories Inc..................................................... Matthew Schumann
Window & Door Manufacturers’ Association.............................. Rick Perry
General Interest Representatives................................................ Allan Ashachik
Stan L. Horsfall

iii
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD ANSI/SDI A250.3-2007

American National Standard

Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for —

Factory Applied Finish Coatings
for Steel Doors and Frames

1 General ASTM D714-02, “Standard Test Method for

Evaluating Degree of Blistering of Paints.”
1.1 Scope
ASTM D4214-98, “Standard Test Method for
These methods prescribe the procedures to be Evaluating Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint
followed in the selection of material, chemical Films.”
preparation, coating application, testing, and
evaluation of factory applied finish coatings ASTM D523-89(1999), “Standard Test Method
for steel doors and frames. Coatings covered for Specular Gloss.”
by this standard include paints, stains, clear ASTM D2244-02e1, “Standard Practice for
coats, and powder coats. Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Dif-
1.2 Reference Documents ferences from Instrumentally Measured Color
Coordinates.”
ASTM B117-03, “Standard Practice for Operat-
ing Salt Spray (Fog) Testing Apparatus,” 2 Material
ASTM D1654-92, “Standard Test Method for 2.1 The test specimen shall be the exact type
Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens and gauge of steel as used in the manufacture of
Subjected to Corrosive Environments” the product. The specimen shall be a minimum
ASTM D4585-99, “Standard Practice for Testing of 4" (102 mm) × 6" (152 mm) with a ¼" (6.4 mm)
Water Resistance of Coatings Using Controlled hole at the center of the 4" (102 mm) width, ½"
Condensation.” (12.7 mm) in from the end. Identification marks
shall be added to the specimen as required for
ASTM G154-04, “Standard Practice for Op- control purposes. The test specimen shall be
erating Fluorescent Light Apparatus for UV handled at all stages of the process with clean
Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials.” gloves to prevent contamination.
ASTM D4587-01, “Standard Practice for Fluo- 2.2 The specimen(s) shall be hung using a
rescent UV-Condensation Exposures of Paint method representative of that used in pro-
and Related Coatings.” duction.
ASTM D2794-93(2004), “Standard Test Method 2.3 The test specimen(s) shall be cleaned,
for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Ef- pretreated and coated in accordance with the
fects of Rapid Deformation (Impact).” manufacturers normal production method and
ASTM D3359-02, “Standard Test Method for procedure. All coating weights used on test
Measuring Adhesion by the Tape Test.” specimens shall be documented and represen-
tative of the individual manufacturer’s normal
ASTM D4060-01, “Standard Test Method for production material.
Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by
the Taber Abraser.” 2.4 At the end of the coating cycle, the
specimen(s) shall be removed from the coat-
ASTM D610-01, “Standard Test Method for
ing system and handled carefully. The coated
Evaluating Degree of Rusting on Painted Steel
Surfaces.” surface of the specimen shall not be handled

1
ANSI/SDI A250.3-2007

or come in contact with other objects in such UV-Condensation Exposures of Paint and Re-
a way as to disrupt the coated surface. lated Coatings” For a test period of 300 hours
duration. The cycle schedule for operating this
2.5 Specimens shall be allowed to age at an am-
type of equipment shall be 18 hours of light
bient room temperature, for a minimum 72 hour
exposure at 140°F (60°C) followed by a 6 hour
duration, before any testing commences.
condensation cycle at 120°F (49°C).
3 Testing 3.4 Impact test
3.1 Salt spray test The coating shall be tested per ASTM D2794-
93(2004), “Standard Test Method for Resistance
a) Apparatus – The apparatus used for salt
of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid
spray testing shall be of such design as to
Deformation (Impact),” with 20 inch pounds of
conform to ASTM B117-03, “Standard Practice
direct impact using a Gardner Impact Tester with
for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Testing Appa-
a 1/2" (12.7 mm) diameter ball or punch at room
ratus.”
temperature of 70°-75°F (21°C-24°C). The test
b) Test performance – Salt spray testing shall specimen shall be impacted at three locations
be conducted as specified in ASTM B117-03, on the panel that have a dry film thickness within
“Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray the tolerance range for the coating process.
(Fog) Testing Apparatus,” for a test period of Apply one-inch (25.4 mm) wide, #600 Scotch
120 continuous hours. The test specimen shall cellophane pressure-sensitive tape firmly to the
be scribed with an “X” per ASTM D1654-92, impact area and pull off sharply.
“Standard Test Method for Evaluation of Painted
3.5 Film adhesion test
or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive
Environments”, sections 4.1 and 5.1. The coating film adhesion shall be tested in ac-
cordance with method “B” of ASTM D3359-02,
3.2 Condensation testing (humidity)
“Standard Test Method for Measuring Adhe-
a) Apparatus – The apparatus used for con- sion by the Tape Test.” A total of (11) parallel
densation (humidity) testing shall be of such cuts are made with a sharp instrument, 0.039"
design as to conform to ASTM D4585-99, (1 mm) apart in both a vertical and horizontal
“Standard Practice for Testing Water Resis- direction forming a grid. One-inch (25.4 mm)
tance of Coatings Using Controlled Condensa- wide #600 Scotch cellophane pressure-sensi-
tion.” tive tape is then firmly applied to the scribed
surface and rapidly removed.
b) Test performance – Condensation (humid-
ity) testing shall be conducted as specified 3.6 Abrasion test
in ASTM D4585-99, “Standard Practice for
The coating film shall be tested with a Taber
Testing Water Resistance of Coatings Using
Abraser Testing Apparatus using a No. CS-10
Controlled Condensation,” for a test period of
Resilient Calibrase Wheel in accordance with
480 continuous hours. Exposure temperatures
ASTM D4060-01, “Standard Test Method for
shall be maintained at a minimum of 100°F
Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by
(38°C). Actual test temperature shall be noted
the Taber Abraser.”
in the report.
3.3 Accelerated weathering test 4 Acceptance criteria
a) Apparatus – The apparatus used for ac- 4.1 Salt spray resistance
celerated weathering testing shall be of such
The coating film on the unscored surface of
design as to conform to ASTM G154-04,
the test specimen shall have a rust grade of
“Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent
no less than 6 as defined in ASTM D610-01,
Light Apparatus for UV Exposure of Nonmetal-
“Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree
lic Materials.” The bulb type used shall be a
of Rusting on Painted Steel Surfaces.” Table 1
UVA340.
and the depictions shown in Figure 1 illustrate
b) Test performance – Accelerated weathering the scale used to evaluate the rust grades.
testing shall be conducted as specified in ASTM The coating film at the scribe line shall not be
D4587-01, “Standard Practice for Fluorescent undercut by rust more than 1/8" (3.2 mm) or a

2
 ANSI/SDI A250.3-2007

6 on each side of the scribe line when evalu- grade represents a film removal of between
ated in accordance with ASTM D1654-92 and 5 and 15%. Table 2 on page 8 illustrates the
rated per ASTM D1654-92, Table 1. “Rating of various classifications for adhesion loss.
Failure at Scribe (Procedure A)”.
4.6 Abrasion resistance
4.2 Condensation resistance
The coating film shall have a wear index of
The coating film shall be allowed to exhibit the 100 (.10 mg weight loss per cycle) or less
dense pattern of #8 blisters, but shall have no when tested in accordance with Paragraph
more than the “few” pattern of #6 blisters as 3.6 herein.
illustrated in the photographic reference ASTM
D714-02, “Standard Test Method for Evaluat- 5 Report
ing Degree of Blistering of Paints.” Testing
shall be in accordance with Paragraph 3.2. 5.1 The report shall cover the date the test was
Visual representations of the various degrees performed and the issue date of the report.
of blistering are shown in Figures 2 through 5 5.2 Identification of the specimen tested,
of this document. source of supply, manufacturer, model or se-
4.3 Accelerated weathering resistance ries number, or both, and any other pertinent
information.
When tested in accordance with Paragraph
3.3 herein, the paint film shall exhibit the fol- 5.3 A detailed description of the specimen
lowing traits: or specimens tested shall include the type of
prime or barrier coating if used, the method
4.3.1 No rust, checking, cracking, erosion or of coating application, the procedure used to
flaking shall be present. cure it and the dry film thickness.
4.3.2 No more than a few #6 blisters as il- 5.4 Any modifications made on the test speci-
lustrated in Figure 4 and in ASTM D714-02, men to obtain the values of acceptance shall
“Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree be noted and described.
of Blistering of Paint.”
5.5 A statement that the test or tests were
4.3.3 A degree of chalking not to exceed #8 conducted in accordance with the methods
as illustrated in Figure 6 and in test method and procedures as specified herein. If devia-
B of ASTM D4214-98, “Standard Test Method tions from these methods and procedures were
for Evaluating Degree of Chalking of Exterior made, they shall be described in the report.
Paint Films.”
5.6 When the test is made to check the
4.3.4 No more than a 50% decrease in gloss conformance of the unit specimen to test re-
when tested in accordance with ASTM D523- quirements of a particular specification, the
89(1999), “Standard Test Method for Specular identification or description of the specification
Gloss.” shall be included in the report.
4.3.5 No more than a 10% change in color
(fade) when tested in accordance with ASTM
D2244-02e1, “Standard Practice for Calculation 6 General
of Color Tolerances and Color Differences from
Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates.” 6.1 Testing laboratory
4.4 Impact test All tests shall be conducted and certified by
a nationally recognized, independent testing
No coating film removal shall occur other than
laboratory.
at an area 1/8" (3.2 mm) in diameter at the center
of the impact area, when tested in accordance
6.2 Certification
with Paragraph 3.4.
When reference is made to this specification
4.5 Film adhesion
the following statement shall be used: “Finish
There shall be no adhesion loss less than a coating has been tested in conformance with
grade 3B as defined in ASTM D3359-02. This ANSI Standard A250.3-2006.”

3
ANSI/SDI A250.3-2007

Table 1 – Rust grades

Rust Grade Maximum % of rusted area

10 00.01
9 00.03
8 00.10
7 00.30
6 01.00
5 03.00
4 10.00
3 16.67
2 33.33
1 50.00
0 100.00

Figure 1 – Visual reference for percentage of rust

4
 Visual examples illustrating degrees of blistering

FEW MEDIUM MEDIUM DENSE DENSE

Figure 2 – Blister size #2

FEW MEDIUM MEDIUM DENSE DENSE

Figure 3 – Blister size #4

5
ANSI/SDI A250.3-2007
6
Visual examples illustrating degrees of blistering
ANSI/SDI A250.3-2007

FEW MEDIUM MEDIUM DENSE DENSE

Figure 4 – Blister size #6

FEW MEDIUM MEDIUM DENSE DENSE

Figure 5 – Blister size #8
 ANSI/SDI A250.3-2007

Figure 6 – Photographic reference standard for degree of chalking

7
ANSI/SDI A250.3-2007

Table 2 – Classification of adhesive test results

Surface of cross-cut areas from

Classification which listing has occurred. (Ex- Rate of adhesion
ample for six parallel cuts.)

The edges of the cuts are

completely smooth; none of
5B None
the squares or the lattice are
detached.

Small flakes of coating are

detached at intersections;
4B
less than 5% of the area is
affected.

Small flakes of coating are

detached along edges and
3B at intersections of cuts. The
area affected is 5 to 15% of
the lattice.

The coating has flaked along

the edges and at parts of the
2B
squares. The affected area is
15 to 35% of the lattice.

The coating has flaked along

the edges of cuts in large rib-
1B bons and entire squares have
detached. The area affected
is 35 to 65% of the lattice.

0B Flaking and detachment in excess of 65%.

8
 MEMBERS OF THE
AVAILABLE PUBLICATIONS STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

Specifications CECO DOOR PRODUCTS

9159 Telecom Drive
ANSI/SDI A250.6 Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcings on Standard Milan, TN 38358
Steel Doors and Frames (731) 686-8345
www.cecodoor.com
ANSI/SDI A250.8 SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors &
Frames CURRIES COMPANY
SDI-108 Recommended Selection & Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors P.O. Box 1648
Mason City, IA 50402-1648
SDI-118 Basic Fire Door, Fire Door Frame, Transom/Sidelight Frame, and (641) 423-1334
Window Frame Requirements www.curries.com
SDI-128 Guidelines for Acoustical Performance of Standard Steel Doors &
Frames DEANSTEEL MANUFACTURING CO.
111 Merchant Street
SDI-129 Hinge & Strike Spacing San Antonio, TX 78204-1496
(210) 226-8271
Test Procedures www.deansteel.com
ANSI/SDI A250.3 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish
DOOR COMPONENTS INC.
Coatings for Steel Doors & Frames
7980 Redwood Avenue
ANSI/SDI A250.4 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Fontana, CA 92336-1638
Steel Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors (909) 770-5700
www.doorcomponents.com
ANSI/SDI A250.10 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel
Surfaces for Steel Doors & Frames MESKER DOOR, INC.
ANSI/SDI A250.13 Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components 3440 Stanwood Boulevard
for Swinging Door Assemblies Huntsville, AL 35811-9021
(256) 851-6670
SDI-113 Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal www.meskerdoor.com
Transmittance of Steel Door & Frame Assemblies
SDI-131 Accelerated Physical Endurance Test Procedure for Steel Doors, METAL PRODUCTS, INC.
319 North Hills Road
Frames and Frame Anchors
Corbin, KY 40701
(606) 523-0173
Construction Details
www.metalproductsinc.com
ANSI/SDI A250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames
PIONEER INDUSTRIES, INC.
SDI-110 Standard Steel Doors & Frames for Modular Masonry Construction 171 South Newman Street
SDI-111 Recommended Details for Standard Details Steel Doors, Frames, Hackensack, NJ 07601
Accessories and Related Components (201) 933-1900
www.pioneerindustries.com
SDI-122 Installation & Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors &
Frames REPUBLIC
SDI-132 Drywall Slip-On Frames 155 Republic Drive
McKenzie, TN 38201-0580
Miscellaneous Documents (731) 352-3383
www.republicdoor.com
ANSI/SDI A250.7 Nomenclature for Standard Steel Doors & Steel Frames
SDI-112 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors & SECURITY METAL PRODUCTS CORP.
Frames 5700 Hannum Avenue, Suite 250
Culver City, CA 90230
SDI-117 Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors & Frames (310) 641-6690
www.secmet.com
SDI-124 Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors & Frames
SDI-127 Industry Alert Series (A-L) STEELCRAFT
SDI-130 Electrified Hinge Preparations Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies
9017 Blue Ash Road
SDI What is The SDI? Cincinnati, OH 45242
(513) 745-6400
AUDIO-VISUAL PROGRAMS ON VHS ALSO AVAILABLE www.steelcraft.com

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
440.899.0010 • FAX 440.892.1404
4/5/2012 www.steeldoor.org
 ANSI/SDI A250.4-2011
Revision of ANSI/SDI A250.4-2001

Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for –

Physical Endurance for
Steel Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors
ANSI/SDI A250.4-2011

SPONSOR
Steel Door Institute
Approved June 10, 2011
 ANSI/SDI ®
A250.4-2011
Revision of ANSI/SDI A250.4-2001

American National Standard

Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for –
Physical Endurance for
Steel Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors

Secretariat
Steel Door Institute

Approved June 10, 2011

American National Standards Institute, Inc.
American Approval of an American National Standard requires verification by ANSl
that the requirements for due process, consensus, and other criteria for
National approval have been met by the standards developer.

Standard Consensus is established when, in the judgement of the ANSl Board of

Standards Review, substantial agreement has been reached by directly
and materially affected interests. Substantial agreement means much more
than a simple majority, but not necessarily unanimity. Consensus requires
that all views and objections be considered, and that a concerted effort
be made toward their resolution.
The use of American National Standards is completely voluntary; their exis-
tence does not in any respect preclude anyone, whether they have approved
the standards or not, from manufacturing, marketing, purchasing, or using
products, processes, or procedures not conforming to the standards.
The American National Standards Institute does not develop standards and
will in no circumstances give any interpretation of any American National
Standard. Moreover, no person shall have the right or authority to issue
an interpretation of an American National Standard in the name of the
American National Standards Institute. Requests for interpretations should
be addressed to the secretariat or sponsor whose name appears on the
title page of this standard.
CAUTION NOTICE: This American National Standard may be revised or
withdrawn at any time. The procedures of the American National Stan-
dards Institute require that action be taken periodically to reaffirm, revise,
or withdraw this standard. Purchasers of American National Standards
may receive current information on all standards by calling or writing the
American National Standards Institute.

Published by

Steel Door Institute

30200 Detroit Road, Cleveland, Ohio 44145-1967

Copyright © 2011 by Steel Door Institute

All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced in any

form, in an electronic retrieval system or otherwise,
without prior written permission of the publisher.

Printed in the United States of America

ANSI/SDI A250.4-2011
Contents
Page

Foreword ............................................................................................ ii
1 Purpose ........................................................................................1
1.1 Reference documents ..............................................................1
2 Apparatus and equipment .............................................................1
2.1 Door opener ............................................................................1
2.2 Hardware .................................................................................1
3 Preparation for test .......................................................................2
4 Test specimen ...............................................................................2
4.1 Doors ......................................................................................2
4.2 Frames ....................................................................................2
5 Swing test .....................................................................................3
5.1 Doors ......................................................................................3
5.2 Frame ......................................................................................3
6 Twist test ......................................................................................4
7 Acceptance criteria .......................................................................4
7.1 Doors ......................................................................................4
7.2 Frames ....................................................................................5
Figures
1 Swing Test Detail .....................................................................2
1A Swing Test Detail .....................................................................3
2 Twist Test ................................................................................4
Performance Reports
Swing Test Form 1 ........................................................................6
Swing Test Form 2 ........................................................................7
Twist Test Form 3 ........................................................................8

i
Foreword (This Foreword is not part of American National Standard A250.4-2011)

The material contained in this document has been developed under the
auspices of the Technical Committee of the Steel Door Institute.
The original standard was issued on July 28, 1980 and was revised in 1987,
1994 and 2001. The current edition is a revision of the 2001 document
with the contents being updated to reflect changes that have taken place
in the steel door and frame industry since that time.
Suggestions for improvement gained in the use of this standard are wel-
come, and should be sent to the Steel Door Institute, 30200 Detroit Road,
Cleveland, Ohio 44145-1967.
The organizations which approved this standard and are part of the Accred-
ited Standards Committee A250 formed February 8, 1991, are as follows:
American Institute of Architects
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association
Cedar Valley Associates
Door and Hardware Institute
FM Approvals
HMMA/Division of NAAMM
Intertek Testing Services
Steel Door Institute
Therma-Tru
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
The Technical Committee of the Steel Door Institute, which developed this
standard, had the following personnel at the time of approval:

Terry Simpson, Chairman

Claus Heide, Vice Chairman
J. Jeffery Wherry, Managing Director
Organization Represented Name of Representative
Amweld Building Products, Inc. ................................................. Mike Kolovich
Ceco Door Products................................................................... Tom Janicak
Curries Company ....................................................................... Dave Dedic
Deansteel Manufacturing Company ........................................... Claus Heide
Door Components ...................................................................... Tom Popow
Mesker Door Company .............................................................. Mike Torres
Metal Products, Inc. ................................................................... Tom Stone
Pioneer Industries....................................................................... Kamal Sheikh
Republic ..................................................................................... Jason Lisewski
Security Metal Products Corporation ......................................... Terry Simpson
Steelcraft .................................................................................... Kurt Roeper

ii
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD ANSI/SDI A250.4-2011

American National Standard

Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for –

Physical Endurance for Steel Doors, Frames
and Frame Anchors

1 Purpose testing door or frame shall be anchored in such a

manner as to ensure rigidity.
The primary purpose of this procedure shall be to
establish a standard method of testing the perfor- The swinging mechanism shall be in two parts:
mance of a steel door mounted in a hollow metal 2.1 Door opener
or channel iron frame installed with appropriate an-
chors, under conditions that might reasonably be The door opener shall be an air motor positioned
considered an accelerated field operating condi- at 65° to the plane of the door in its closed posi-
tion. tion that will actuate an exit device mounted on the
test door. The contact point shall be set to push the
The user of this performance standard must temper door open 60° ± 5°, and retract to allow the door
his usage with the knowledge that there are many closer to bring the door back into its original closed
variables that affect door and frame performance, position and then begin the cycle again. See the
such as different hardware, anchors, glass and lou- specifications in figures 1 and 1A.
ver cutouts, field modification by parties other than
2.2 Hardware
the manufacturer, environmental factors, such as
heat, cold, moisture, etc. The exit device, door closer and hinges used in
testing shall be selected based on the manufac-
1.1 Reference documents
turer’s recommendations for the testing level de-
ANSI/BHMA A156.1-2006 Butts and Hinges scribed in Swing Test Form 1. The manufacturer
and model number shall be recorded in the report.
ANSI/BHMA A156.3-2008 Exit Devices All hardware shall be applied to the door and frame
ANSI/BHMA A156.4-2008 Door Controls – Clos- with fasteners provided by the hardware manufac-
ers turer (for example, machine screws or sex bolts) in
the location recommended by the door manufac-
ANSI/BHMA A156.7-2009 Template Hinge Di- turer. The hardware shall conform to the latest edi-
mensions tions of American National Standards ANSI/BHMA
A156.1, 3, 4 and 7. The device shall be set to close
2 Apparatus and equipment the door at a rate of 15 cycles, ± 1, per minute.
The apparatus and equipment used shall be the Inspect all hardware and silencers at regular in-
same when testing doors or frames with frame tervals, and adjust or replace as necessary. It is
anchors. The main testing structure shall be con- acceptable to apply lubrication to hinges and exit
structed as shown in figures 1 and 2. The structure devices.
shall conform to the parts shown, except the open-
Note: Where the applicable BHMA Test Standards
ing width and height are permitted to vary to allow have been followed, this information shall be record-
the testing of various door sizes. The test frame for ed in the test report.

1
ANSI/SDI A250.4-2011

3 Preparation for test the frame throat to simulate actual construction

conditions.
The door shall be hung in the frame on the hinges.
Care shall be taken to ensure the hinges are prop-
4 Test specimen
erly applied to the door and frame as recommend-
ed by the hinge manufacturer, and any hinge fillers 4.1 Doors
or shims, are in place. The clearance between the
Unless specified otherwise, the test shall be per-
door and the frame shall be recorded in the test
formed on a 3′-0″ x 7′-0″ nominal size door. A
report.
detailed description of the construction of the door
The door frame shall be securely fastened to the and the applicable processes such as welding,
test frame opening structure in accordance with bonding, etc., used for attaching components, shall
the manufacturer’s instructions. The manufacturer be recorded in the test report, Swing Test Form 1,
is permitted to select anchors for specific wall ap- under the “remarks” section.
plications (i.e., wood stud anchors or steel stud an-
4.2 Frames
chors, loose or welded in or existing masonry wall
anchors). Unless specified otherwise, the test shall be per-
formed on a 3′-0″ x 7′-0″ nominal size frame hav-
Silencers shall be installed on the frame and the
ing a 5 ¾″ jamb depth. A detailed description of the
stop face of the door shall contact the silencers.
door frame which shall cover all components used
The frame shall be plumb, square, and rigid.
in the frame’s construction, as well as applicable
When applicable, wall surface materials (e.g., dry- processes (such as welding, etc.) used for attach-
wall) shall be applied to the test frame opening at ing and connecting components, shall be recorded

1″ dia. x 5″ long
roller contact pad

Air motor
Air motor stand
Set screw
Contact panic bar at attach to
center third of door piston rod

Detail “A”
Air lube unit
Panic bar
Mechanical counter
or equivalent
65°

Standard hollow metal frame

Detail “A”
mounted in channel iron frame

Full mortise butts

60°
Door closer
Door 3070

Figure 1 – Swing test detail

2
 ANSI/SDI A250.4-2011

in the test report, Swing Test Form 2, under the nents readily accessible, such as face skins, ex-
“remarks” section. posed hinge and lock stiles, flush closing channels,
end closures, hinge reinforcements, and lock body/
A detailed description of the frame and anchoring
face plate reinforcements and shall cover the integ-
system which shall cover all details of the anchors,
rity of assembly methods used to connect the door
as well as the means of attachment in the frame
components.
and the weight of the door used for the test shall
be recorded in the test report, Swing Test Form 2. Doors which have passed the cycling criteria at
one level shall be deemed to have passed all lower
5 Swing test levels. The results shall be recorded on a standard
performance report, Swing Test Form 1.
5.1 Doors
5.2 Frame
Duration of the test shall be 250,000 cycles with
latching for Level C doors; 500,000 cycles Duration of the test shall be 250,000 cycles for
with latching for Level B doors; and 1,000,000 Level C frames; 500,000 cycles for Level B frames;
cycles with latching for Level A doors. A general and 1,000,000 cycles for Level A frames. A general
inspection of the door shall be made at 25,000 inspection of the frame shall be made at 25,000
cycle intervals for the first 100,000 cycles and at cycle intervals for the first 100,000 cycles and at
50,000 cycles thereafter. A mechanical counter or 50,000 cycle intervals thereafter.
equivalent shall be used to record the cycles.
The general inspection shall cover perimeter clear-
The general inspection shall cover perimeter clear- ances between door and frame and all frame
ances between door and frame and all compo- components readily accessible, such as corner

1″ dia. x 5″ long
roller contact pad

Air motor
Air motor stand
Set screw
Contact panic bar at attach to
center third of door piston rod

Detail “A”
Air lube unit
Panic bar
Mechanical counter
or equivalent
5″ adjustable C.I. frame 65°
location varies to
accomodate different 5″ Stationary C.I. frame
Detail “A”
size doors

Half mortise butts

60°
Door closer
Door 3070

Figure 1A – Swing test detail

Door can be tested in channel iron frame with half mortise hinges (no pressed steel frame).

3
ANSI/SDI A250.4-2011

21/4" max

Screw jack

21/4" max
Force gage

Remove hinge pins

Test frame

Pressure pad
Long range between force gage
dial indicator Lever operated and door, 21/2" dia.
toggle clamps
at adjacent corners

Figure 2 – Twist test

clips and screws, corner tabs and slots, head and area illustrated in figure 2. The deflection noted on
jamb tabs/slots hinge reinforcements, and strike the dial indicator shall be plotted against the load
reinforcements and shall cover the integrity of as- applied to the corner on Twist Test Form 3. A maxi-
sembly methods used to connect the frame com- mum 300 lb. load shall be applied. The load shall
ponents then be reduced in 30 lb. increments and corre-
Door frames which have passed the cycling criteria sponding deflections recorded and plotted on Twist
at one level shall be deemed to have passed all Test Form 3. A smooth curve drawn through the
lower levels. The results shall be recorded as part points shall graphically demonstrate the reaction of
of the test report, Swing Test Form 2. the door to increasing and decreasing pressures at
different cycle intervals.
6 Twist test At the completion of each twist test, the hinges
The twist test is applicable in evaluating door con- shall be reassembled by means of inserting the
struction only. hinge pins, silencers shall be reinstalled, the exit
devise shall be latched, and the assembly shall be
The deterioration of the door strength during the
subjected to another 25,000 or 50,000 cycles. The
cycle test, if any, shall be checked through a series
condition of the silencers shall be noted and re-
of twist tests. These twist tests shall be performed
placements made where deemed necessary.
before the cycle test begins and then at 25,000
cycle intervals for the first 100,000 cycles and at
50,000 cycle intervals for the balance of the test. 7 Acceptance criteria
During the twist test, the hinge pins and silenc- 7.1 Doors
ers shall be removed from the door and frame as- 7.1.1 Doors shall not show any visual indication of
sembly and the exit device shall be unlatched. The metal fatigue, cracking or deformation at hardware
door is then clamped in place as noted in figure cutouts or along form contours.
2. If necessary to facilitate twist testing, the door
is permitted to be taken from the test fixture and 7.1.2 Doors of laminated construction (cores lami-
installed in a separate twist fixture. Loads in 30 lb. nated to face sheets, channels or stiffeners lami-
increments shall be applied at the upper lock edge nated to face sheets, etc.) shall not delaminate in
corner through the screw jack and force gage in the excess of 10% of the total surface area.

4
 ANSI/SDI A250.4-2011

7.1.3 In doors of welded construction (stiffeners horizontal and a vertical cut at the center of the
or channels welded to face sheets, etc.) breakage door height and door width. Internal construction
of welds shall not exceed 10% of the total weld of of door shall be inspected visually for delamina-
those face stiffeners. tion, metal fatigue, cracking and weld failure. The
results of this inspection shall be recorded in the
7.1.4 Top, bottom or edge channels shall remain
test report.
securely in place, without any weld breakage.
7.2 Frames
7.1.5 Where seams occur on doors, there shall be
no opening or spreading of the seam. 7.2.1 Frames shall remain plumb, square, rigid,
and show no visual signs of metal fatigue, crack-
7.1.6 All hardware reinforcements shall remain se- ing, or deformation at hardware cutouts or along
curely in place and show no visual signs of metal form contours.
fatigue, cracking or deformation.
7.2.2 Corners shall stay aligned with seams in a
7.1.7 As a result of the twist test, the maximum closed position.
deflection permitted shall not exceed 2 ½″ when
loaded to 300 lb. for Level C. For Level B and Level 7.2.3 Perimeter clearances between door and
A doors the maximum deflection shall not exceed frame shall not be greater than 1⁄16″ from those
1 ¼″ when loaded to 300 lb. listed at onset of test.

7.1.8 Permanent deflection for doors shall not ex- 7.2.4 Hardware reinforcements shall remain se-
ceed ⅛″ when load is removed. curely attached to the frame, with all welds intact.

7.1.9 Tapped holes shall not strip. 7.2.5 Tapped holes shall not strip.
7.2.6 At the completion of the test, the frame shall
7.1.10 At the completion of the swing and twist
not limit door operation. If during the test the door
tests, the door shall be fully operable.
becomes inoperable, it shall be determined wheth-
7.1.11 Upon completion of the foregoing checks er a defective door frame, hardware reinforcement,
and measurements, remove door from test struc- hinge, frame anchor, etc., caused the failure and
ture and cut door into four equal sections with a shall be so noted in the test report.

5
ANSI/SDI A250.4-2011

Performance Report — Swing Test Form 1 Date

Test#

Manufacturers Type and Size of Doors

Weight of Door

Inspection at 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
indicated cycle 25 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000
M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M
intervals (1)

Condition of edge
weld/bond

Condition of lock
prep.
Condition of hinge
prep.

Top

Center

Bottom

Condition of top
closure
Condition of bottom
closure
Condition of door
core/stiffeners
Condition of panels
— general
Level C Door  Level B Door  Level A Door 
(1)
Indicates condition in appropriate columns:
S — Satisfactory
Use footnotes under Remarks for further explanation

Hinge Manufacturer & Number

Lock Manufacturer & Number
Closer Manufacturer & Number

Remarks:

6
 ANSI/SDI A250.4-2011

Performance Report — Swing Test Form 2 Date

Manufacturers Test#

Jamb Width Type and Size of Frame

Weight of Door Type of Anchors

Inspection at 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
indicated cycle 25 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000
M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M
intervals (1)

Condition of general
appearance

Condition of
perimeter clearance
Condition of strike
prep.
Condition of hinge
prep.

Top

Center

Bottom

Condition of mutes

Condition of wall
anchors
Condition of floor
anchors

Condition of miters

Level C Door  Level B Door  Level A Door 

Indicates condition in appropriate columns:
(1)

S — Satisfactory
Use footnotes under Remarks for further explanation

Hinge Manufacturer & Number

Lock Manufacturer & Number

Remarks:

7
8
Performance Report — Twist Test Form 3

Test No. Date

Product Description
ANSI/SDI A250.4-2011

480

450

420

390

360

330

300

270

240

210

180

150

Pounds / Load Applied

120

90

60

30

0
0.1 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0

Inches / Deflection
 MEMBERS OF THE
AVAILABLE PUBLICATIONS STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE
AMWELD INTERNATIONAL, LLC
Specifications 8324 Sterling Drive
Irving, TX 75063
ANSI/SDI A250.6 Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcings on Standard (888) 775-2397
Steel Doors and Frames www.amweld.com

ANSI/SDI A250.8 SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors & CECO DOOR PRODUCTS
Frames 9159 Telecom Drive
Milan, TN 38358
SDI-108 Recommended Selection & Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors (731) 686-8345
SDI-118 Basic Fire Door Requirements www.cecodoor.com

SDI-128 Guidelines for Acoustical Performance of Standard Steel Doors & CURRIES COMPANY
Frames P.O. Box 1648
Mason City, IA 50402-1648
SDI-129 Hinge & Strike Spacing (641) 423-1334
www.curries.com
Test Procedures DEANSTEEL MANUFACTURING CO.
ANSI/SDI A250.3 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish 111 Merchant Street
Coatings for Steel Doors & Frames San Antonio, TX 78204-1496
(210) 226-8271
ANSI/SDI A250.4 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for www.deansteel.com
Steel Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors
DOOR COMPONENTS INC.
ANSI/SDI A250.10 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel 7980 Redwood Avenue
Surfaces for Steel Doors & Frames Fontana, CA 92336-1638
(909) 770-5700
ANSI/SDI A250.13 Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components www.doorcomponents.com
for Swinging Door Assemblies
MESKER DOOR, INC.
SDI-113 Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal 3440 Stanwood Boulevard
Transmittance of Steel Door & Frame Assemblies Huntsville, AL 35811-9021
SDI-131 Accelerated Physical Endurance Test Procedure for Steel Doors, (256) 851-6670
www.meskerdoor.com
Frames and Frame Anchors
METAL PRODUCTS, INC.
Construction Details 319 North Hills Road
Corbin, KY 40701
ANSI/SDI A250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames (606) 523-0173
SDI-110 Standard Steel Doors & Frames for Modular Masonry Construction www.metalproductsinc.com

SDI-111 Recommended Details for Standard Details Steel Doors, Frames, PIONEER INDUSTRIES, INC.
Accessories and Related Components 171 South Newman Street
Hackensack, NJ 07601
SDI-122 Installation & Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors & (201) 933-1900
Frames www.pioneerindustries.com
SDI Drywall Slip-On Frames REPUBLIC
155 Republic Drive
Miscellaneous Documents McKenzie, TN 38201-0580
(731) 352-3383
ANSI/SDI A250.7 Nomenclature for Standard Steel Doors & Steel Frames www.republicdoor.com
SDI-112 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors & SECURITY METAL PRODUCTS CORP.
Frames 5700 Hannum Avenue, Suite 250
SDI-117 Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors & Frames Culver City, CA 90230
(310) 641-6690
SDI-124 Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors & Frames www.secmet.com
SDI-127 Industry Alert Series (A-L) STEELCRAFT
SDI-130 Electrified Hinge Preparations Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies
9017 Blue Ash Road
SDI What is The SDI? Cincinnati, OH 45242
(513) 745-6400
AUDIO-VISUAL PROGRAMS ON VHS ALSO AVAILABLE www.steelcraft.com

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
440.899.0010 • FAX 440.892.1404
9/13/2011 www.steeldoor.org
 ANSI/SDI A250.6-2003 (R2009)
Revision of ANSI/SDI A250.6-1997

Recommended Practice for

Hardware Reinforcing
on Standard Steel Doors and Frames
ANSI/SDI A250.6-2003

SPONSOR
Steel Door Institute
Approved October 7, 2003
 ANSI/SDI ®
A250.6-2003 (R2009)
Revision of ANSI/SDI A250.6-1997

American National Standard

Recommended Practice
for Hardware Reinforcing
on Standard Steel Doors and Frames

Secretariat
Steel Door Institute

Approved October 7, 2003

American National Standards Institute, Inc.
American Approval of an American National Standard requires verification by ANSl
that the requirements for due process, consensus, and other criteria for
National approval have been met by the standards developer.

Standard Consensus is established when, in the judgement of the ANSl Board of

Standards Review, substantial agreement has been reached by directly
and materially affected interests. Substantial agreement means much more
than a simple majority, but not necessarily unanimity. Consensus requires
that all views and objections be considered, and that a concerted effort
be made toward their resolution.
The use of American National Standards is completely voluntary; their exis-
tence does not in any respect preclude anyone, whether they have approved
the standards or not, from manufacturing, marketing, purchasing, or using
products, processes, or procedures not conforming to the standards.
The American National Standards Institute does not develop standards and
will in no circumstances give any interpretation of any American National
Standard. Moreover, no person shall have the right or authority to issue
an interpretation of an American National Standard in the name of the
American National Standards Institute. Requests for interpretations should
be addressed to the secretariat or sponsor whose name appears on the
title page of this standard.
CAUTION NOTICE: This American National Standard may be revised or
withdrawn at any time. The procedures of the American National Stan-
dards Institute require that action be taken periodically to reaffirm, revise,
or withdraw this standard. Purchasers of American National Standards
may receive current information on all standards by calling or writing the
American National Standards Institute.

Published by

Steel Door Institute

30200 Detroit Road, Cleveland, Ohio 44145-1967

Copyright © 2012 by Steel Door Institute

All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced in any

form, in an electronic retrieval system or otherwise,
without prior written permission of the publisher.

Printed in the United States of America

ANSI/SDI A250.6–2003
Contents
Page

1 General..........................................................................................1
1.1 Purpose.......................................................................................1
1.2 Scope..........................................................................................1
1.3 Reinforcing methods....................................................................1
2 Metrication. . ...................................................................................1
3 Reference documents....................................................................2
4 Recommended reinforcing thickness..............................................2
5 Recommended application of hardware.. ........................................2
5.1 Mortised hardware.......................................................................2
5.2 Field drilling and tapping.. ............................................................3
5.3 Thru-bolting.................................................................................4
5.4 Sheet metal screws. . ....................................................................4
6 Continuous hinges.........................................................................6

Tables
1 Minimum hardware reinforcing thickness. . ......................................3
2 #10/24 thread (nm). . .......................................................................4
3 #12-24 thread (nm)........................................................................4
4 Tap drills and clearance drills for machine screws
with American National Thread form (nm). . .....................................5

Figures
1 Rigidity of angle or channel versus plate.......................................1
2 Full #12-24 (nm) threads................................................................2
3 Extrusion to create (3) full threads of #12-24 (nm).........................2
4 Maintain a minimum of 65% of full thread.. ....................................4
5 Full thread shall not fall below 65%...............................................4
6 Sex-bolted.....................................................................................6
7 Improper thru-bolting.....................................................................6

Appendices
A Conclusion.....................................................................................7
B Bibliography. . .................................................................................8

i
Foreword (This Foreword is not part of American National Standard A250.6-2003)

The first edition of this standard was developed under the auspices of the
Technical Committee of the Steel Door Institute and published in 1978 as
SDI-107 Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement – Application). In 1994,
the word “standard” was added to the document’s title and the decision
was made to promulgate SDI-107 as an American National Standard.
A250.6 was officially approved by the American National Standards Insti-
tute on October 22, 1997. Substantive changes between SDI-107 and the
revised and redesignated A250.6-1997 Hardware on Standard Steel Doors
(Reinforcement – Application) include the addition of metric equivalents,
revised tap and drill sizes to eliminate those that are not recommended,
and a better definition for “factory mortise.”
In 2001, the TC-1 Committee of the Accredited Standards Committee
A250 initiated the 5-year review process, and changed the title of A250.6
to Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel
Doors and Frames to more accurately define the content of the standard.
In addition, this revision includes the following substantive changes: Ad-
dition of Appendices A and B, both informative; discontinuation of the use
of “gauge” in favor of decimal equivalents; addition of information relating
to continuous hinges; redefinition of the scope to exclude “architecturally
specified or specialized conditions.”
Suggestions for improvement gained in the use of this standard will be
welcome, and should be sent to the Steel Door Institute, 30200 Detroit
Road, Cleveland, Ohio 44145-1967.
The organizations of the Accredited Standards Committee A250 that have
approved this standard are as follows:
American Institute of Architects
American Iron and Steel Institute
Builders Hardware Manufacturers’ Association
Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers’ Association
Door and Hardware Institute
Factory Mutual Research Corporation
General Services Administration
Hollow Metal Manufacturers’ Association / Division of National Association
of Architectural Metal Manufacturers’ Association
Insulated Steel Door Institute
International Conference of Building Officials
Intertek Testing Services
Manufactured Housing Institute
National Association of Home Builders
Steel Door Institute
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
Window and Door Manufacturers’ Association

ii
The Accredited Standards Committee A250 TC-1 developed this standard
had the following personnel at the time of approval:

Robert Berhinig, Chairman

J. Jeffery Wherry, Secretary
Organization Represented Name of Representative
American Institute of Architects.................................................. Christopher Bushnell
American Iron & Steel Institute.................................................... Robert Wills
Amweld Building Products, LLC................................................. Allan Ashachik
Benchmark Commercial Doors................................................... Randall Barber
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association........................... Mike Tierney
Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association....................... Bud Bulley
Ceco Door Products.................................................................... Thomas R. Janicak
Curries Company........................................................................ Stan Horsfall
Deansteel Manufacturing Company............................................ Claus D. Heide
Door and Hardware Institute....................................................... John Geniesse
Factory Mutual Research Corporation........................................ Mark Tyrol
General Services Administration................................................. Donald McGaha
Hollow Metal Manufacturers’ Association / Division of
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers........ Russell Tauscher
Ingersoll-Rand............................................................................. Kurt Roeper
Intertek Testing Services............................................................. Nancy Kokesh
The Kewanee Corporation.......................................................... Jason Lisewski
Magnatrax Corporation............................................................... Craig Ordmandy
Manufactured Housing Institute.................................................. Mark Nunn
Mesker Door Company............................................................... Stephen C. Frates
National Association of Home Builders....................................... Jeff Inks
Pioneer Industries, Inc. ............................................................... Kamal Sheikh
Republic Builders Products......................................................... Craig J. Ordmandy
Security Metal Products Corporation.......................................... Dan Buffenbarger
Steel Door Institute...................................................................... J. Jeffery Wherry
Underwriters Laboratories Inc..................................................... Daniel Kaiser
Window & Door Manufacturers’ Association.............................. Rick Perry

iii
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD ANSI/SDI A250.6-2003

American National Standard

Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing

on Standard Steel Doors and Frames

1 General manufacturing processes. These processes

include forming options (see figure 1) or integral
1.1 Purpose gussets or fillets on lighter gauge members to
It is the intention of this publication to furnish achieve strength and performance equal to
users and prospective users of standard steel heavier gauge members.
doors and frames with practical information 1.3.1 Where reinforcements require tapping
regarding accepted design methods for rein- for machine screw threads, an equivalent num-
forcing and recommended practices for proper ber of threads may be rendered in a lighter
field preparation for builders’ hardware. gauge part with a pierced and dimpled (“ex-
1.2 Scope truded”) hole as compared to a heavier gauge
part manufactured with conventional process-
The information contained herein pertains to es. For example, equal thread depth can be
doors and frames manufactured in accordance achieved on a piece of 0.067" (1.7 mm) metal
with ANSI/SDI A250.8/SDI-100 “Recommended and on a flat plate of 0.123" (3.1 mm) metal
Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and (see figures 2 and 3). The extrusion process
Frames” published by the Steel Door Institute. results in equal strength, equivalent number of
It is not intended to reference architecturally threads and a lighter weight than the parent
specified or specialized situations beyond metal or equivalent flat reinforcing plate.
the scope of this document or documents
herein. 2 Metrication
1.3 Reinforcing methods Metric (SI Units) are indicated in parenthesis
This standard recognizes as equal a variety following conventional linear measurements.
of reinforcing methods produced by unique These are “soft conversion” approximates

  
 



  



Figure 1 – Rigidity of angle or channel versus plate

1
ANSI/SDI A250.6-2003

(3) Full Threads 0.123

[3.1 mm]

Figure 2 – Full #12-24 (nm) threads

Hole to be pierced and

dimpled (extruded) through
parent steel before tapping.
0.067
[1.7 mm]

Figure 3 – Extrusion to create (3) full threads of #12-24 (nm)

based on HMMA 803 “Steel Tables.” Units otherwise) reinforcing and tapped mounting
without metric equivalents are indicated as holes for template hinges and ANSI defined
(nm) (e.g. screws). locks as specified. Additional reinforcing for
surface applied hardware shall be built into the
3 Reference documents door at the factory when specified.
ANSI/SDI A250.8/SDI-100 “Recommended As a guide to specification writers, table 1
Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and shows the minimum thickness of steel to be
Frames” used for hardware reinforcing as endorsed by
ANSI/SDI A250.8.
ANSI/SDI A250.4 “Test Procedure and Accep-
tance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel
5 Recommended application of hard-
Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors and Hardware
ware
Reinforcings”
5.1 Mortised hardware
Machinery's Handbook
Standardized and ANSI defined preparations
4 Recommended reinforcing thick- are made at the factory to allow installation of
ness mortise hardware such as hinges and locks.
Holes shall be made to precise diameters and
The Manufacturer, based on individual con-
accurately tapped to insure maximum thread
struction methods and tooling capabilities,
engagement and holding strength. Cutouts
shall reinforce their product to insure perfor-
shall be pierced to surround the mortised
mance in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4.
hardware item to close tolerances on three or
This reinforcing shall include (unless noted
all four sides. The hardware shall be installed

2
 ANSI/SDI A250.6-2003

using only the proper screws as furnished tion, some hardware such as anchor hinges,
with or specifically recommended for each thrust pivots, pivot reinforced hinges or floor
device. mounted pivots must be field prepared due to
design variations or to provide adjustment that
NOTE: The installer must exercise caution
upon initial insertion of screws to prevent cross can only be provided at time of installation.
threading, especially with the smaller diameter The installer shall use a template provided
screws. with the device or the device itself to locate
5.2 Field drilling and tapping hole spacing.

Doors and frames shall be prepared by the 5.2.1 A suitably sized punch shall be used
installer in the field for surface applied hard- to locate the drilling for pilot holes to prevent
ware, such as surface closers or holders, track drill creeping, off-center holes and improper
type concealed closers or holders, pulls, exit screw alignment.
device cases, or vertical rod latches. In addi-

Table 1 – Minimum hardware reinforcing thickness

Door Frame
Hardware Item
inches mm MSG No. (6) inches mm MSG No. (6)
Mortise Hinge 1-3/8" [34.9 mm] Door (1) 0.093 2.3 12 0.093 2.3 12
Mortise Hinge 1-3/4" [44.5 mm] Door (1) (2)
0.123 3.1 10 0.123 3.1 10
Mortise Lock or Deadbolt (1)
0.067 1.7 14 0.067 1.7 14
Bored Lock or Deadbolt (1)
0.067 1.7 14 0.067 1.7 14
Flush Bolt Front (1) 0.067 1.7 14 0.067 1.7 14
Surface Bolt (3) 0.067 1.7 14 0.067 1.7 14
Surface Applied Closer (4) 0.067 1.7 14 0.067 1.7 14
Hold Open Arm (3)
0.067 1.7 14 0.067 1.7 14
Pull Plates and Bar (3)
0.053 1.3 16 0.053 1.3 16
Surface Exit Device (3)
0.067 1.7 14 0.067 1.7 14
Floor Checking Hinge 0.167 4.2 7 0.167 4.2 7
Pivot Hinge 0.167 4.2 7 0.167 4.2 7
Continuous Hinges (5) Not Required Not Required
Kick / Push Plate Not Required Not Required
Note: The minimum steel thickness for each specific gage is derived from the published figures
of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
(1)
Thinner steel may be employed as long as tapped holes used for mounting the hardware are
extruded to produce an equivalent number of threads.
(2)
If reinforcing is angular or channel shaped, 0.093" (2.3 mm) is permitted.
(3)
When reinforcing is omitted, thru-bolting via the use of spacers or sex-bolts is required.
(4)
Reinforcement shall occur on both sides.
(5)
Refer to section 6.
(6)
MSG No. to be used for reference purposes only.

3
ANSI/SDI A250.6-2003

Correct drill size Incorrect drill size

for pilot hole for pilot hole

Figure 4 – Maintain a minimum of 65% of full

thread Figure 5 – Full thread shall not fall below 65%

IMPORTANT NOTE: Use only the correct size attachment shall be accomplished by thru-
drill for pilot holes, as recommended by “Ma- bolting. The hardware manufacturer’s instruc-
chinery’s Handbook” (see table 4). Larger holes tion sheets shall be closely followed for rec-
will decrease screw holding power causing the ommended procedures. Where thru-bolting is
screw to be pulled from the reinforcing under required on hollow metal doors, spacers or
normal stresses (see figures 4 and 5). sex-bolts shall be used to prevent collapsing
of face sheets as illustrated in figures 6 and 7.
Tables 2 and 3 illustrate the effect of variances
in pilot hole sizes on thread holding power. NOTE: The most popular thru-bolting applica-
tions are door closers, exit devices, overhead
5.2.2 The installer shall assure that tapped holders, pulls and bar sets.
holes have 75% of full thread (considered a
5.4 Sheet metal screws
normal condition). This percentage shall not
fall below 65% to be considered adequate Sheet metal screws are normally used to at-
for proper hardware fastenings. Drills shall tach accessory hardware such as kickplates,
be positioned so the bit enters the reinforced mail slots, room numbers, identification signs,
area in perpendicular position as holes formed and in many instances, push or pull plates.
at angles will not permit proper seating of the These areas are not reinforced beyond the
screw head. After the proper pilot holes are thickness of the face sheets. Properly sized
drilled, proceed with the tapping operation. holes and correct sheet metal screws as pro-
The tap shall match the thread size of the vided with the hardware item or as specified
screws provided and the tap shall be held in the mounting instructions shall be used for
perpendicular to the surface. hardware attachment.
5.3 Thru-bolting 5.4.1 The best performance is achieved
when the space between the threads is equal
Where reinforcing has not been specified or
provided for other than mortised hardware,

Table 2 – #10-24 thread (nm) Table 3 – #12-24 thread (nm)

Drill Size Drill Diameter % Full Thread Drill Size Drill Diameter % Full Thread
#23 0.154" 66% #15 0.180" 66%
#24 0.152" 70% #16 0.177" 70%
#25 0.149" 75% #17 0.173" 75%
#26 0.147" 79% “Machinery’s Handbook” recommendation in BOLD

#27 0.144" 85%

“Machinery’s Handbook” recommendation in BOLD

4
 ANSI/SDI A250.6-2003

Table 4 – Tap drills and clearance drills for machine screws

with American National Thread form (nm)

Size of Screw Tap Drills Clearance Hole Drills

No. of
No. Threads Close Fit Free Fit
Decimal per Drill Decimal
or Drill Decimal Drill Decimal
Equiv. Inch Size Equiv.
Diam. Size Equiv. Size Equiv.

0 .060 80 3/64 .0469 52 .0635 50 .0700

64 53 .0595
1 .073 48 .0760 46 .0810
72 53 .0595
56 50 .0700
2 .086 43 .0890 41 .0960
64 50 .0700
48 47 .0785
3 .099 37 .1040 35 .1100
56 45 .0820
36* 44 .0860
4 .112 40 43 .0890 32 .1160 30 .1285
48 42 .0935
40 38 .1015
5 .125 30 .1285 29 .1360
44 37 .1040
32 36 .1065
6 .138 27 .1440 25 .1495
40 33 .1130
32 29 .1360
8 .164 18 .1695 16 .1770
36 29 .1360
24 25 .1495
10 .190 9 .1960 7 .2010
32 21 .1590
24 16 .1770
12 .216 2 .2210 1 .2280
28 14 .1820
20* 10 .1935
14 .242 D .2460 F .2570
24* 7 .2010
20 7 .2010
1/4 .250 F .2570 H .2660
28 3 .2130
18 F .2570
5/16 .3125 P .3230 Q .3320
24 I .2720
16 5/16 .3125
3/8 .375 W .3860 X .3970
24 Q .3320
14 U .3680
7/16 .4375 29/64 .4531 15/32 .4687
20 25/64 .3906
13 27/64 .4219
1/2 .500 33/64 .5156 17/32 .5312
20 29/64 .4531
* Screws marked with asterisk (*) are not in the American Standard but are from
the former ASME Standard.

5
ANSI/SDI A250.6-2003

Sex nut Grommet nut does not

full door thickness span full door thickness

Figure 6 – Sex-bolted Figure 7 – Improper thru-bolting

to or greater than the thickness of the face 6.2.1 Standard reinforcing shall be a 0.067"
sheets. (1.7 mm) steel strip no less than 1-1/4" (31.7
mm) in width securely welded inside the hinge
6 Continuous hinges edge of doors and hinge jamb door rabbet of
frames.
6.1 Standard preparation for continuous gear
type or barrel type hinges shall not include any 6.2.2 Optional reinforcing shall be a 0.067"
factory reinforcing, drilling and/or tapping in (1.7 mm) steel strip no less than 1-1/4" (31.7
doors or frames. All mounting shall be prepared mm) in width securely welded inside the hinge
in the field by the hardware installer. jamb door side face of frames.
6.2 For continuous hinges that require rein- 6.3 The hardware installer shall carefully fol-
forcing (either for fasteners, door weight, door low the hinge manufacturer’s instructions for
size or frequency of use situations) reinforcing fastener preparations.
shall be indicated at the time of order.

6
 ANSI/SDI A250.6-2003

Appendix A
(informative)

Conclusion

It has been the experience of the Steel Door Institute that most failures of hardware attachments
have been caused by improper field installation rather than insufficient reinforcement. It is quite
obvious that it is easier to tap an oversize pilot hole than to tap one of correct size necessary
for maximum strength. Oversized holes will not ensure adequate product performance.
Manufacturing tolerances and dimensions may not always be consistent on machine and sheet
metal screws when compared with different sources of supply.
The material used for the manufacture of screws is also a factor in the overall performance of the
attachment. Stainless steel, for example, is a stronger fastener than aluminum or plain carbon
steel. On installations where vibration or unusual frequency of operation is a factor, the use of
thread locking inserts, liquids on threads, or binding heads should be considered.
Standard steel doors and top grade builders hardware are made to provide many years of service
and are very compatible. The specification writer and construction superintendent must be aware,
however, that proper installation methods must be considered on an equal basis with door and
hardware construction requirements to achieve this compatibility on the job.

7
ANSI/SDI A250.6-2003

Appendix B
(informative)

Bibliography

— HMMA 803 “Steel Tables”

— HMMA 830 "Hardware Selection for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames"
— HMMA 840 "Guide Specification for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and
Frames"
— ANSI/SDI A250.7 “Nomenclature for Standard Steel Doors and Frames”
— SDI-117 “Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames”
— SDI-122 “Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames”

8
 ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003 (R2008)
Revision of ANSI/SDI A250.8-1998

SDI-100
Recommended Specifications for
Standard Steel Doors and Frames
ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003

SPONSOR
Steel Door Institute
Approved November 14, 2003
 ANSI/SDI ®
A250.8-2003
Revision of ANSI/SDI A250.8-1998

American National Standard

SDI-100
Recommended Specifications for
Standard Steel Doors and Frames

Secretariat
Steel Door Institute

Approved November 14, 2003

American National Standards Institute, Inc.
American Approval of an American National Standard requires verification by ANSl
that the requirements for due process, consensus, and other criteria for
National approval have been met by the standards developer.

Standard Consensus is established when, in the judgement of the ANSl Board of

Standards Review, substantial agreement has been reached by directly
and materially affected interests. Substantial agreement means much more
than a simple majority, but not necessarily unanimity. Consensus requires
that all views and objections be considered, and that a concerted effort
be made toward their resolution.
The use of American National Standards is completely voluntary; their exis-
tence does not in any respect preclude anyone, whether they have approved
the standards or not, from manufacturing, marketing, purchasing, or using
products, processes, or procedures not conforming to the standards.
The American National Standards Institute does not develop standards and
will in no circumstances give any interpretation of any American National
Standard. Moreover, no person shall have the right or authority to issue
an interpretation of an American National Standard in the name of the
American National Standards Institute. Requests for interpretations should
be addressed to the secretariat or sponsor whose name appears on the
title page of this standard.
CAUTION NOTICE: This American National Standard may be revised or
withdrawn at any time. The procedures of the American National Stan-
dards Institute require that action be taken periodically to reaffirm, revise,
or withdraw this standard. Purchasers of American National Standards
may receive current information on all standards by calling or writing the
American National Standards Institute.

Published by

Steel Door Institute

30200 Detroit Road, Cleveland, Ohio 44145-1967

Copyright © 2003 by Steel Door Institute

All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced in any

form, in an electronic retrieval system or otherwise,
without prior written permission of the publisher.

Printed in the United States of America

ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003
Contents
Page

1 General ....................................................................................... 1
1.1 Scope ......................................................................................... 1
1.2 Reference Documents ................................................................. 1
1.3 Approval Drawings and Hardware Schedules .............................. 2
1.4 Classification — Level, Performance, Model................................ 2
1.5 Sizes ........................................................................................... 2
2 Products ..................................................................................... 3
2.1 General ....................................................................................... 3
2.2 Manufacturers Standard Gage (MSG)
vs. Minimum Steel Thickness ...................................................... 5
2.3 Construction Features ................................................................. 5
2.4 Frames ........................................................................................ 6
3 Hardware Preparation.................................................................. 9
3.1 Reinforcings ................................................................................ 9
4 Storage, Handling, and Installation.............................................10
4.1 Jobsite Storage..........................................................................10
4.2 Frame Installation.......................................................................10
4.3 Door Installation .........................................................................10
4.4 Hardware Installation..................................................................10
4.5 Installation of Factory Applied Finish Painted Materials .............10
4.6 Door and Frame Maintenance ....................................................10
Tables
1 Standard opening sizes ............................................................... 3
2 Steel thickness / door faces........................................................ 5
3 Minimum steel thickness / frames ............................................... 7
4 Minimum hardware reinforcing thickness ..................................... 8
5 Hardware locations ..................................................................... 9
Appendicies
A Fire Door Considerations............................................................11
B General Considerations ..............................................................13
C Section 08100 Standard Hollow Metal Doors and Frames ..........15

i
Foreword (This Foreword is not part of American National Standard A250.8-2003)

The material contained in this document has been developed under the
auspices of the ANSI A250 Committee. This committee has a diverse mem-
bership of users, producers, and general interest in addition to members
of the Steel Door Institute. The committee has been charged with the
development of standards, test methods, and other matters relating to
steel doors and frames.
The current edition is a revision, and replaces the ANSI A250.8-1998 docu-
ment. The contents have been updated to reflect changes that have taken
place in the steel door and frame industry since the time of the previous
publication. Some of the significant changes from the previous version
are as follows:
• Titles of the reference documents (1.2) have been updated, and are
included throughout the document to assist the reader.
• References to the UL 10C Positive Pressure Fire Test Standard have been
added.
• Requirements for Smoke Control Doors have been added (2.1.2.2).
• Requirements for Welded Frames (2.4.1.3) have been revised to cor-
respond with the industry standards.
• References to material gages in decimal form have been emphasized to
correspond with the industry standards.
• Table 3 was updated to show one material thickness for frames for each
of the corresponding door levels.
• Appendices A and B in the 1998 edition have been updated and divided
into three separate appendices: Appendix A, Fire Door Considerations;
Appendix B, General Considerations; and Appendix C, Section 08100
Standard Hollow Metal Doors and Frames (intended as a sample speci-
fication). Each appendix is informative and not to be considered part
of the standard.
• An informative statement relating to water penetration for welded frame
assemblies is included in Appendix B.
Suggestions for improvement gained in the use of this standard will be
welcome, and should be sent to the Steel Door Institute, 30200 Detroit
Road, Cleveland, Ohio 44145-1967.

ii
The organizations of the Accredited Standards Committee A250 that have
approved this standard are as follows:
American Institute of Architects
American Iron and Steel Institute
Builders Hardware Manufacturers’ Association
Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers’ Association
Door and Hardware Institute
Factory Mutual Research Corporation
General Services Administration
Hollow Metal Manufacturers’ Association / Division of National Association
of Architectural Metal Manufacturers’ Association
Insulated Steel Door Institute
International Conference of Building Officials
Intertek Testing Services
Manufactured Housing Institute
National Association of Home Builders
Steel Door Institute
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
Window and Door Manufacturers’ Association
The Accredited Standards Committee A250 TC-1 developed this standard
had the following personnel at the time of approval:

Robert M. Berhinig, Chairman

J. Jeffery Wherry, Managing Director
Organization Represented Name of Representative
American Institute of Architects ................................................. Christopher Bushnell
American Iron & Steel Institute ................................................... Robert Wills
Amweld Building Products LLC ................................................. Allan Ashachik
Benchmark Commercial Doors .................................................. Randall Barber
Builders Hardware Manufacturers’ Association ......................... Mike Tierney
Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers’ Association ..................... Bud Bulley
Ceco Door Products................................................................... Thomas R. Janicak
Curries Company ....................................................................... Stan L. Horsfall
Deansteel Manufacturing Company........................................... Claus D. Heide
Door and Hardware Institute ...................................................... John Geniesse
Factory Mutual Research Corporation ....................................... Mark Tyrol
General Services Administration ................................................ Donald McGaha
Hollow Metal Manufacturers’ Association / Division of
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers ....... Russell Tauscher
Ingersoll-Rand ............................................................................ Kurt Roeper
International Conference of Building Officials ............................ Paul Armstrong
Insulated Steel Door Institute ..................................................... Steve Jasperson
Intertek Testing Services ............................................................ Nancy Kokesh
The Kewanee Corporation ......................................................... Jason Lisewski
Magnatrax Corporation .............................................................. Craig J. Ordmandy
Manufactured Housing Institute ................................................. Mark Nunn
Mesker Door Company .............................................................. Stephen C. Frates
National Association of Home Builders...................................... Jeff Inks
Pioneer Industries....................................................................... Kamal Sheikh
Security Metal Products Corporation......................................... Daniel Buffenbarger
Steel Door Institute..................................................................... J. Jeffery Wherry
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.................................................... Daniel Kaiser
Window & Door Manufacturers’ Association ............................. Rick Perry

iii
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003

American National Standard

SDI-100
Recommended Specifications
for Standard Steel Doors and Frames

1 General – SDI-118-2002 Basic Fire Door Require-

ments
1.1 Scope
– SDI-124-1998 Maintenance of Standard
This specification for standard swinging steel Steel Doors and Frames
doors and frames offers a variety of choices
suitable for any commercial application. Spe- 1.2.2 ANSI Standards
cific performance levels of doors and frames – ANSI/UL 10B-1997 Fire Tests of Door As-
are defined herein. SDI-108, “Selection and semblies
Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors” shall
be used as a guide. This Standard shall not – ANSI/UL 10C-1998 Positive Pressure Fire
act as an obstruction to the development of Tests of Door Assemblies
new, modified or improved products that meet – ANSI/UL 1784-2001 Air Leakage Test of
the intent of this specification. Door Assemblies
This specification covers sizes, design, mate- – ANSI/NFPA 80-1999 Fire Doors and Fire
rials, general construction requirements and Windows
finishing of standard steel doors and frames.
SDI-100 is intended to define standard items – ANSI/NFPA 252-1999 Fire Tests of Door
not subject to variations. The products defined Assemblies
in this standard have demonstrated successful – ANSI/SDI A250.3-1999 Test Procedure and
performance to established test procedures Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Fin-
and physical usage (see Section 1.2). ish Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors
It is the user’s responsibility to coordinate the and Frames
information contained herein with applicable – ANSI/SDI A250.4-2001 Test Procedure and
building and/or fire code requirements. Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance
1.2 Reference Documents for Steel Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors and
Hardware Reinforcings
1.2.1 SDI Standards
– ANSI/SDI A250.6-1997 Recommended Prac-
– SDI-106-1999 Recommended Standard Door tice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard
Type Nomenclature Steel Doors and Frames
– SDI-108-1999 Recommended Selection and – ANSI/SDI A250.7-1997 Nomenclature for
Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors Standard Steel Doors and Steel Frames
– SDI-111-2000 Recommended Details and – ANSI/SDI A250.10-1998 Test Procedure and
Guidelines for Standard Steel Doors, Frames, Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel
and Accessories Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames
– SDI-112-1997 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/ – ANSI/SDI A250.11-2001 Recommended
Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors and Erection Instructions for Steel Frames
Frames (Formerly SDI-105)
– SDI-117-2000 Manufacturing Tolerances for
Standard Steel Doors and Frames

1
ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003

– A115 Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors Type Nomenclature” shall be used as guides
and Steel Frames in the development of the necessary product
schedule.
– A115.IG Installation Guide for Doors and
Hardware 1.4 Classification — Level, Performance,
Model
1.2.3 ASTM Standards
For each of the following levels and models,
– ASTM A1008-2003 Standard Specifica-
doors, frames, frame anchors, and hardware
tion for Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,
reinforcings shall be provided to meet the re-
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and
quirements of the performance levels indicated
High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
below. The material used in manufacturing
Formability
these products and components shall comply
– ASTM A568-2003 Standard Specification with Tables 2, 3, and 4 of this document. The
for Steel Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, physical performance levels are determined by
Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, Gen- testing assemblies in accordance with ANSI/
eral Requirements for SDI A250.4, “Test Procedure and Acceptance
Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors,
– ASTM A1011-2001 Standard Specification
Frames, Frame Anchors and Hardware Rein-
for Steel Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Car-
forcings.” See Section 2.3.1.1 and 2.3.1.2 for
bon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy
a description of Full Flush and Seamless.
and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability Level 1
and Physical Performance Level C
– ASTM A591-1998 Standard Specification
for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated, Standard-duty 1-3/8" (34.9 mm) and 1-3/4"
for Light Coating Weight [Mass] Applica- (44.5 mm)
tions Model 1 – Full Flush
Model 2 – Seamless
– ASTM A653-2002 Standard Specification
for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by Level 2
the Hot-Dip Process and Physical Performance Level B
– ASTM A924-1999 Standard Specification Heavy-duty 1-3/4" (44.5 mm)
for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Model 1 – Full Flush
Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process Model 2 – Seamless
1.3 Approval Drawings and Hardware
Schedules Level 3
and Physical Performance Level A
It is intended that approval drawings will
not be required for these items and that the Extra Heavy-duty 1-3/4" (44.5 mm)
manufacturer’s published details, together Model 1 – Full Flush
with this standard, will provide all the needed Model 2 – Seamless
information. When specified, shop drawings Model 3 – Stile and Rail
shall be submitted for approval prior to man-
ufacturing and/or delivery of product to the
Level 4
site. They shall show elevations of each door
and Physical Performance Level A
design, door construction details and meth-
ods of assembling sections, hardware loca- Maximum-duty 1-3/4" (44.5 mm)
tions, dimensions, and shapes of materials, Model 1 – Full Flush
anchorage and fastening methods, door frame Model 2 – Seamless
types and details, and finish requirements. SDI-
111, “Recommended Details and Guidelines 1.5 Sizes
for Steel Doors, Frames, and Accessories”
Standard doors and frames are sized to fit
and SDI-106, “Recommended Standard Door
openings noted in Table 1.

2
 ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003

Table 1 – Standard opening sizes

Widths* Ft-in 2'0" 2'4" 2'6" 2'8" 2'10" 3'0" 3'4" 3'6" 3'8" 3'10" 4'0"
mm 610 711 762 813 864 914 1016 1067 1118 1168 1219
* Sizes shown are for single doors only; equal pairs of doors use twice the width
indicated. Pairs of doors can consist of two unequal widths.

Heights 1-3/4" Doors Ft-in 6'8" 7'0" 7'2" 7'10" 8'0"

mm 2032 2134 2184 2388 2438

1-3/8" Doors Ft-in 6'8" 7'0" 7'2"

mm 2032 2134 2184

2 Products exceed the minimum requirements for coatings

having 0.4 oz/ft² (122 g/m²), total both sides,
2.1 General i.e., A40 (ZF120). See SDI-112 “Zinc-Coated
2.1.1 Steel Specifications (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel
Doors and Frames” for further information.
All steel used to manufacture doors, frames,
anchors, and accessories shall meet at least 2.1.1.4 When zinc coated steel is specified for
one or more of the following requirements. anchors and accessories, and electrolytically
deposited zinc coated steel is provided, it shall
2.1.1.1 Cold rolled steel shall conform to ASTM comply with ASTM A591, “Standard Specific-
A1008, “Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, ation for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated,
Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength for Light Coating Weight [Mass] Applications.”
Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with The minimum coating weight shall be a class
Improved Formability” and A568, “Standard “B”, i.e., 0.075 oz/ft² (22.9 g/m 2).
Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, and
High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and 2.1.2 Fire Doors and Related Frames
Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for.” 2.1.2.1 Fire Doors and Frames
2.1.1.2 Hot rolled, pickled and oiled When specified for either insurance rating pur-
steel shall comply with ASTM A1011, “Stan- poses or for compliance to building codes,
dard Specification for Steel Sheet and Strip, manufacturers shall provide the type of fire door
Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength and frame assembly that has been investigated
Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with and/or successfully fire tested in accordance
Improved Formability” and A568, “Standard with the latest revision of ANSI/UL10B, “Fire
Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, and Tests of Door Assemblies”, ANSI/UL10C, “Posi-
High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and tive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies”,
Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for.” or ANSI/NFPA 252, “Fire Tests of Door As-
2.1.1.3 When specified, hot dipped zinc semblies.” The assembly shall be identified
coated steel shall be of the alloyed type and by labels and/or an approved identification
comply with ASTM A924, “Standard Specifica- marking of an agency accepted by the au-
tion for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, thority having jurisdiction. The door label shall
Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process” indicate the applicable fire test rating for the
and A653, “Standard Specification for Steel door construction furnished. See Appendix “A”,
Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron and SDI-118, “Basic Fire Door Requirements”
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip for additional information.
Process.” The coating weight shall meet or

3
ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003

2.1.2.2 Smoke Control Doors 2.1.5 Field Applied Finish Paint

When specified, manufacturers shall provide Unless doors and frames are factory finish
the type of fire door and frame assembly that painted, a compatible coat of finish paint
has been investigated and/or successfully shall be applied in the field. The finish paint
tested in accordance with the latest revision shall be of a type recommended for use on
of ANSI/UL1784 “Air Leakage Test of Door primed steel. Consult the door and frame
Assemblies.” See SDI-118, “Basic Fire Door manufacturer’s literature for description of
Requirements” for additional information. primer used.
2.1.2.3 Steel Astragals on Fire Doors 2.1.6 Tolerances
Where required by a manufacturer’s listing SDI-117, “Manufacturing Tolerances for Stan-
or ANSI/NFPA 80, “Fire Doors and Fire Win- dard Steel Doors and Frames” shall apply to the
dows”, a steel overlapping astragal shall be standard steel doors and frames specified.
provided.
2.1.7 Test Procedures
2.1.2.4 Louvers for Fire Doors
The products furnished under this standard
When specified, fire doors shall be provided shall have demonstrated successful perfor-
with fire labeled louvers. See SDI-118, “Basic mance to the following established standard
Fire Door Requirements” for acceptable label- test methods:
ing methods. CAUTION: LOUVERS SHALL
ANSI/SDI A250.3 – Test Procedure and
NOT BE USED IN SMOKE CONTROL DOORS,
Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied
DOORS HAVING LITES OR FIRE EXIT HARD-
Finished Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel
WARE.
Doors and Frames.
2.1.3 Prime Finish
ANSI/SDI A250.4 – Test Procedure and Ac-
Doors and frames shall be thoroughly cleaned ceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for
and chemically treated to insure maximum Steel Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors and
paint adhesion. All surfaces of the door and Hardware Reinforcings.
frame exposed to view shall receive a factory
ANSI/SDI A250.10 – Test Procedure and Ac-
applied coat of rust inhibiting primer, either
ceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel
air-dried or baked-on. The finish shall meet the
Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.
requirements for acceptance stated in ANSI/
SDI A250.10, “Test Procedure and Acceptance 2.1.8 Design Clearances
Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for
2.1.8.1 The clearance between the door and
Steel Doors and Frames.” Proper job site
frame shall be a maximum of 1/8" (3.2 mm)
storage as outlined in Section 4.1, shall be
in the case of both single swing and pairs of
followed.
doors.
2.1.4 Factory Applied Finish Paint
2.1.8.2 The clearance between the meeting
When specified, doors and frames shall be edges of pairs of doors shall be 3/16" (4.8 mm)
finish painted on all surfaces of the door and ± 1/16" (1.6 mm). For fire rated applications,
frame exposed to view. The factory applied the clearances between the meeting edges of
finish paint shall meet the performance re- pairs of doors shall be 1/8" (3.2 mm) ± 1/16"
quirements and acceptance criteria as stated (1.6 mm).
in ANSI/SDI A250.3, “Test Procedure and Ac-
2.1.8.3 The clearance measured from the bot-
ceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish
tom of the door to the bottom of the frame
Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and
(Undercut) shall be a maximum of 3/4" (19.1
Frames.” Consult individual manufacturers for
mm) unless otherwise specified. Fire door
product availability and color selection. Proper
undercuts shall comply with ANSI/NFPA 80,
job site storage, as outlined in Section 4.1,
“Fire Doors and Fire Windows.”
shall be followed.

4
 ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003

Table 2 – Steel thickness / door faces

Minimum Thickness
Level Model MSG No. (1)
Inches mm
1 0.032 0.8 20
1
2 0.032 0.8 20
1 0.042 1.0 18
2
2 0.042 1.0 18
1 0.053 1.3 16
3 2 0.053 1.3 16
3 See Sec. 2.3.3 Construction Features 16
1 0.067 1.7 14
4
2 0.067 1.7 14
(1)
MSG No. to be used for reference purposes only.

2.1.8.4 The clearance between the face of the at the discretion of the manufacturer, shall be
door and the stop shall be 1/16" (1.6 mm) to used when a seamless door is specified:
3/32" (2.4 mm).
• v e r t i c a l s e a m e d g e f i l l e d , d re s s e d
2.1.8.5 All clearances shall be, unless otherwise smooth
specified in this document, subject to a toler-
• intermittently welded seams, edge filled,
ance of ±1/32" (0.8 mm).
dressed smooth
2.1.9 Steel Thickness (see Table 2)
• c o n t i n u o u s l y w e l d e d s e a m d re s s e d
2.2 Manufacturers Standard Gage (MSG) smooth
vs. Minimum Steel Thickness
2.3.1.3 Door Edges
The minimum steel thickness for each specific
Door edges shall be fabricated utilizing the
gage is derived from the published figures of
following different profiles:
Underwriters Laboratories Inc., and shall be
used for reference purposes only. • Square Edge – edge of door which is 90°
to the face
2.3 Construction Features
• Beveled Edge – edge of a door which is
2.3.1 Door Faces and Edge
not at a 90° angle to the face of the door
2.3.1.1 Full Flush (standard bevel is 1/8" (3.2 mm) in 2" (50.8
mm) – narrow side of door is in contact
Each door face shall be formed from a single
with stop of frame when door is closed
sheet of steel of a thickness as defined by
Table 2. There shall be no visible seams on Unless specified, door edges will be manu-
the surface of the faces. A full height vertical factured in accordance with manufacturer’s
seam is permitted on door edges. standard for that model.
2.3.1.2 Seamless 2.3.1.4 End Channels or Closures
In addition to the requirements for full flush The top and bottom of the door shall be
doors, no visible seams are permitted along the closed with either flush or inverted channels
vertical edges. One of the following methods, or closures. The channels or closures shall

5
ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003

have a minimum material thickness of 0.042" 2.3.4 Vision Lites

(1.0 mm).
When doors are specified to contain glazed
2.3.1.5 Decorative Faces openings, the manufacturer’s standard lite kit
shall be supplied.
When specified, door faces shall be fabri-
cated of textured and/or embossed steel. 2.3.5 Louvered Doors
These materials shall meet the requirements
When specified, doors shall be provided with
of Table 2.
louvers. SDI-111C, “Recommended Louver De-
2.3.2 Core Construction tails for Standard Steel Doors” shall be used
as a guide in detailing/specifying louvers.
The core design shall be at the discretion of
the manufacturer. 2.4 Frames
Doors of the following core designs have met 2.4.1 General
the performance requirements of the docu-
Provide steel frames for doors, transoms,
ments listed under Section 2.1.7:
sidelites, mullions, interior glazed panels and
• KraftPaper Honeycomb other openings, where indicated. Provide either
knockdown field assembled type, or welded
• Polystyrene
unit type frames as specified.
• Polyurethane
Performance tests shall be conducted on 3-
• Mineral Board sided door frames and corresponding door de-
signs. The variety and complexity of openings
• Vertical Steel Stiffeners
containing transom, sidelites, or other such
This shall not restrict the development of alter- configurations preclude the use of these test
nate core materials that meet the performance methods on such designs.
requirements specified above.
ANSI/SDI A250.7, “Nomenclature for Standard
2.3.3 Construction Features – Stile and Steel Doors and Steel Frames” and SDI-111,
Rail – Flush Panel “Recommended Details and Guidelines for
Standard Steel Doors, Frames, and Acces-
Stiles and rails shall be a minimum of 0.053"
sories” shall be used as guides in the devel-
(1.3 mm) in thickness and shall be cold rolled
opment of frame details.
or galvanized steel. Door corners shall be
mitered or butted. Mitered joints shall be in- 2.4.1.1 Knockdown Frames
ternally reinforced, welded and ground smooth
Unless otherwise specified, frames shall be
such that no miter joints appear on door faces.
supplied as knockdown, and shall have rigidly
Where specified, intermediate rails shall be
interlocked frame joints so as to maintain align-
butted and either permanently mechanically
ment and assure performance of completed
fastened or internally welded to door stiles.
frames when field assembled. These frames
Butted joint seams shall remain visible. Cen-
can consist of either single rabbet or double
ter panels shall be made using cold rolled or
rabbet profiles.
galvanized steel with a minimum thickness of
0.042" (1.0 mm), and shall be reinforced with 2.4.1.2 Slip-On Drywall Frames
manufacturer’s standard core material. Panel
When frames are specified for installation in
faces shall be flush with perimeter surfaces and
existing drywall construction they shall be of
shall be joined to abutting perimeter members
the slip-on drywall type. These frames are not
by welding or permanent mechanical fasten-
available with welded corners.
ing. Where specified, panels shall be recessed
in lieu of flush. Recessed panels shall be re- 2.4.1.3 Welded Frames
inforced and fastened as specified for flush
Welded frames required to comply with this
panels. Hardware reinforcements shall be as
standard shall be supplied as Face Welded
specified in Table 4 and located as specified
unless otherwise specified as either Full Pro-
in Table 5.

6
 ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003

Table 3 – Minimum steel thickness / frames

Thickness
Level MSG No. (1)
inches mm
1 0.042 1.0 18
2 0.053 1.3 16
3 0.053 1.3 16
4 0.067 1.7 14
(1)
MSG No. to be used for reference purposes only.

file Welded, Fully Welded or Continuously “Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel
Welded. Frames” for details.

Face Welded: The joint between the head and 2.4.2 Manufacturers Standard Gages for
jamb faces shall be completely arc welded Frames
along their length either internally or externally. Table 3 shall be used to determine the proper
The remaining elements of the frame profile, gage thickness for the corresponding door
i.e., soffit, stops, rabbets, are not welded. levels.
Face joints shall be ground and finished smooth
with no visible seam. Face joints at meeting 2.4.3 Frames with Mullions and Transom
mullions or between mullions and other frame Bars
members shall be completely arc welded ex- Mullions and transom bars shall be joined to ad-
ternally, ground, and finished smooth. jacent members by welding (see 2.4.1.3) or by
rigid mechanical connection, so as to maintain
Full Profile Welded: (Also specified as Fully alignment of parts and assure performance of
Welded or Continuously Welded.) The joints completed frames when field assembled. When
between all elements of the head and jamb specified, vertical mullions shall be provided
profiles, i.e., soffit, stops, rabbets, faces and with floor anchors.
returns, shall be completely arc welded. Faces 2.4.4 Frame Anchors for Wall Conditions
and returns may be arc welded either internally
or externally, all other frame elements shall Provide frames, other than slip-on drywall type,
be welded internally. Faces and returns shall with a minimum of three anchors per jamb
be ground and finished smooth with no vis- suitable for the adjoining wall construction.
ible seam. The joint at other frame elements Provide anchors of not less than 0.042" (1.0
shall appear as a hairline seam on the exter- mm) in thickness or 0.167" (4.2 mm) diameter
nal side. Face joints at meeting mullions or wire. Frames OVER 7'6" (2286 mm) shall be
between mullions and other frame members provided with an additional anchor.
shall be completely externally welded on the 2.4.4.1 Slip-On Drywall Frame Anchors
faces only, welds shall be ground and finished
smooth. The meeting joints of other mullion Slip-on drywall frames shall have an anchoring
profile elements are not welded. system that is an integral part of the frame,
and allows installation of the frame after the
Welded frames shall be provided with a tem- wall has been constructed.
porary spreader bar for shipping and handling
purposes only. This temporary spreader bar 2.4.4.2 Base Anchors
shall be removed and a setting spreader, sup- Provide frames, other than slip-on drywall type,
plied by the installer, shall be used for instal- with base anchors that are not less than 0.042"
lation of the frame. See ANSI/SDI A250.11, (1.0 mm) in thickness for attachment to the

7
ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003

Table 4 – Minimum hardware reinforcing thickness

Door Frame
Hardware Item
inches mm MSG No. (6)
inches mm MSG No. (6)
Mortise Hinge 1-3/8" [34.9 mm] Door (1) 0.093 2.3 12 0.093 2.3 12
Mortise Hinge 1-3/4" [44.5 mm] Door (1) (2)
0.123 3.1 10 0.123 3.1 10
Mortise Lock or Deadbolt (1)
0.067 1.7 14 0.067 1.7 14
Bored Lock or Deadbolt (1) 0.067 1.7 14 0.067 1.7 14
Flush Bolt Front (1) 0.067 1.7 14 0.067 1.7 14
Surface Bolt (3) 0.067 1.7 14 0.067 1.7 14
Surface Applied Closer (4)
0.067 1.7 14 0.067 1.7 14
Hold Open Arm (3)
0.067 1.7 14 0.067 1.7 14
Pull Plates and Bar (3)
0.053 1.3 16 0.053 1.3 16
Surface Exit Device (3)
0.067 1.7 14 0.067 1.7 14
Floor Checking Hinge 0.167 4.2 7 0.167 4.2 7
Pivot Hinge 0.167 4.2 7 0.167 4.2 7
Continuous Hinges (5) Not Required Not Required
Kick / Push Plate Not Required Not Required
Note: The minimum steel thickness for each specific gage is derived from the published figures
of Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
(1)
Thinner steel may be employed as long as tapped holes used for mounting the hardware are
extruded to produce an equivalent number of threads.
(2)
If reinforcing is angular or channel shaped, 0.093" (2.3 mm) is permitted.
(3)
When reinforcing is omitted, thru-bolting via the use of spacers or sex-bolts is required.
(4)
Reinforcement shall occur on both sides.
(5)
Refer to ANSI/SDI A250.6, "Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel
Doors and Frames."
(6)
MSG No. to be used for reference purposes only.

floor. For wall conditions that do not allow for 2.4.6 Terminated Stops
the use of a floor anchor, an additional jamb
When specified, stops for interior door frames
anchor shall be specified.
shall be terminated above the floor 6" (152.4
2.4.5 Glazing Beads mm) standard, measured from frame bottom
to bottom of terminated stop. The stop is cut
On frame assemblies that incorporate glazed
at a 45° or 90° angle and closed with a steel
openings, the frame shall be provided with
filler plate welded in place. Terminated stops
glazing beads designed to receive the glazing
on frames for lightproof doors, sound-rated
materials specified. The glazing beads shall be
doors, double egress, or lead-lined doors are
butted at the corners. Glazing beads shall be
not available.
of snap-on or screw-applied design.

8
 ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003

3 Hardware Preparation 4) and function holes. Trim and/or mounting

holes are not included.
3.1 Reinforcings
3.1.4 Anchor or Pivot Reinforced Hinges
Provide minimum hardware reinforcing gages
as noted in Table 4 and ANSI/SDI A250.6, “Rec- Where anchor hinges are specified, the ap-
ommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing propriate recessing and reinforcing shall be
on Standard Steel Doors and Frames.” For ad- provided. Mounting holes shall be field drilled
ditional information refer to A115.IG, “Installa- and tapped by others.
tion Guide for Doors and Hardware.” 3.1.5 Hinge Preparations
3.1.1 Mortise Hardware Preparations See Table 5. Doors 6'8" (2032 mm), 7'0"
Doors and frames shall be reinforced, drilled (2134 mm), and 7'2" (2184 mm) high require
and tapped to receive mortised hinges, locks, three (3) hinge preparations. Doors over 7'6"
latches, and flush bolts as required. Preparation (2286 mm) to 8'0" (2438 mm) high require
shall be in accordance with A115 standards and four (4) hinge preparations. Exception: 1-3/8"
ANSI/SDI A250.6, “Recommended Practice for (34.9 mm) thick, 6'8" (2032 mm) high non-fire
Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel Doors rated doors shall be prepared for two hinge
and Frames” where applicable. preparations.
3.1.2 Surface Applied Hardware 3.1.6 Hardware Locations
When specified, doors and frames shall be Hardware shall be located in accordance with
reinforced for surface applied hardware. Table 5.
Drilling and/or tapping shall be completed Other items of hardware shall be located ac-
by others. cording to the door and/or hardware manu-
3.1.3 Function Holes facturer’s directions. This includes the door
closers, floor hinges, overhead door holders,
The preparation for locks and/or exit devices pocket pivot, and most specialized-purpose
shall include reinforcements (as shown in Table hardware.

Table 5 – Hardware locations

Locks, Latches, Roller Latches and Double

Handle Sets 38" – 42" (965 mm – 1067 mm) Centerline of Lock Strike form Bot-
tom of Frame
Rim and Mortise Panic Devices
Cylindrical and Mortise Deadlocks (1) 48" (1219 mm) to Centerline of Strike from Bottom of Frame
Push Plates Centerline 45" (1143 mm) from Bottom of Frame
Pull Plates Centerline of Grip @ 42" (1067) from Bottom of Frame
Combination Push Bar Centerline of 42" (1067 mm) from Bottom of Frame
Centerline of Lower Base is 45" (1143 mm) from Bottom of Frame
Hospital Arm Pull
with Grip Open at Bottom
Up to 11-3/4" (298.5 mm) from Rabbet Section of Frame to Center-
Top
line of Hinge
Hinges
Bottom Up to 13" (330.2 mm) from Bottom of Frame to Centerline of Hinge
Intermediate Equally Spaced Between Top and Bottom Hinges
(1)
Cylindrical and Mortise Deadlock strikes shall be located at 48" (1219 mm) from the bottom of the
frame unless otherwise specified.

9
ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003

4 Storage, Handling, and Installation used. Excess water from thin consistency grout
will cause premature rusting of steel frames
4.1 Jobsite Storage and probable deformation or discoloration of
All doors and frames shall be stored vertically certain wall constructions. Standard mortar
under cover. The units shall be placed on at protection in frames is not intended for thin
least 4" (102 mm) high wood sills or in a manner consistency grout.
that will prevent rust or damage. The use of Steel Frames, including fire rated frames do
non-vented plastic or canvas shelters that can not require grouting. GROUTING SHALL NOT
create a humidity chamber shall be avoided. A BE USED FOR FRAMES INSTALLED IN DRY-
1/4" (6.3 mm) space between the doors shall WALL WALLS.
be provided to promote air circulation. If the
wrapper on the door becomes wet, it must be 4.3 Door Installation
removed immediately. Proper jobsite storage Doors shall be installed and fastened to main-
is extremely important in maintaining the qual- tain alignment with frames to achieve maximum
ity and integrity of the factory applied paint. operational effectiveness and appearance.
IMPROPER STORAGE of material WILL HAVE Doors shall be adjusted to maintain perim-
an adverse effect on the factory applied paint’s eter clearances as specified in Section 2.1.8.
ability to meet the requirements of ANSI/SDI Shimming shall be performed by the installer
A250.10, “Test Procedure and Acceptance as needed to assure the proper clearances
Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for are achieved.
Steel Doors and Frames” or ANSI/SDI A250.3,
“Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for 4.4 Hardware Installation
Factory Applied Finish Painted Steel Surfaces Installation of hardware items shall be in ac-
for Steel Doors and Frames.” cordance with the hardware manufacturer’s
4.2 Frame Installation recommendations and templates. A115.IG,
“Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware”
4.2.1 Frames shall be installed plumb, level, and ANSI/SDI A250.6, “Recommended Practice
rigid and in true alignment as recommended for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel
in ANSI/SDI A250.11 “Recommended Erection Doors and Frames” shall be consulted for other
Instructions for Steel Frames” and A115.IG, pertinent information.
“Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware.” All
frames, other than drywall slip-on types, shall 4.5 Installation of Factory Applied Finish
be fastened to the adjacent structure so as to Painted Materials
retain their position and stability. Slip-on dry- In addition to storage and handling precautions
wall frames shall be installed in prepared wall noted in Section 4.1, it is IMPERATIVE that
openings in accordance with manufacturer’s the work of all other rough trades MUST be
instructions. completed prior to the installation of factory
4.2.2 Where grouting is required in masonry applied finished painted product.
installations, frames shall be braced or fastened 4.6 Door and Frame Maintenance
in such a way that will prevent the pressure
of the grout from deforming the frame mem- It is the responsibility of the installer or end
bers. Grout shall be mixed to provide a 4" user to properly maintain the doors and frames
(102 mm) maximum slump consistency and in accordance with SDI-124, “Maintenance of
hand troweled into place. Grout mixed to a Standard Steel Doors and Frames.”
thinner, “pumpable” consistency shall not be

10
 ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003

Appendix A
(informative)

Fire Door Considerations

Fire door testing

There are two primary fire test methods that are used to establish the fire ratings of doors. The
first is ANSI/UL 10B, “Fire Tests of Door Assemblies”, and is referred to as neutral pressure;
the second is ANSI/UL 10C, “Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies”, and is referred
to as positive pressure.
The difference between the two test methods concerns the location of a neutral pressure plane
in the test furnace. In the late 1990’s the test method required in building codes changed to a
positive pressure test method. This change was adopted in the Uniform Building Code (UBC)
and the International Building Code (IBC) for swinging-type fire doors.
Fire doors required to be tested by either method may be specified by calling out the test method
or by indicating that the product must meet a specific section of a model building code.
These tests incorporate two phases: A fire test phase utilizing an established time-temperature
curve and a structural integrity phase utilizing a hose stream test conducted under established
time-pressure criteria determined by exposure time and area of the assembly. To be a valid fire
door assembly, the unit must pass both phases of the test.
In certain instances as permitted by building codes, the integrity portion (hose stream) is deleted.
The deletion of this requirement negates the assembly’s use as a true fire door.
The fire test procedures also include a measurement of unexposed surface temperatures at
regular intervals up to 30 minutes.
The fire test does not address or measure the amount of smoke leakage through the assembly.
For this criteria, ANSI/NFPA-105 “Installation of Smoke Control Door Assemblies” and ANSI/UL
1784 “Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies” should be consulted.

Fire door ratings

Swinging steel doors and frames are commonly tested as flush (non-glazed) units for a 3-hour
time period. This allows their usage for all lower fire protection ratings. Lites in doors may be
permitted based on the performance of flush doors when evaluated with the testing database
and experience of the test lab or certifying agency.
Typical hourly ratings for swinging steel fire doors are 3-hours, 1-1/2-hours, 3/4-hours, and 1/3-
hour. Usage of these ratings is as follows:
3-Hour — Openings in fire walls that divide a single building into fire areas, normally 4-hour
rated walls.
1-1/2-Hour — Openings in enclosures of vertical communications through buildings and in 2-hour
partitions providing horizontal fire separations. These may also be used as non-glazed doors for
openings in exterior walls subject to severe fire exposure from outside of the building.
3/4-Hour — Openings in 1-hour rated (or less) partitions between rooms and corridors, or other
separation of occupancy. With certain lite restrictions these may also be used in exterior walls
subject to moderate or light fire exposure from outside of the building. The 3/4-hour fire door
may also be used as a smoke and draft control door.
1/3-Hour (20 minute) — Doors of this rating are used for the protection of openings between
living quarters and corridors and where smoke control is a primary concern. They may also be
used as a smoke partition across corridors.

11
ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003

Fire door temperature rise

In addition, a temperature rise rating may be required by building codes in areas such as en-
closures of vertical communications or in areas of storage for hazardous materials. Temperature
rise ratings indicate the maximum temperature, above ambient, of the unexposed surface at
30 minutes into the fire test. Three ratings, 250°F (121°C), 450°F (232°C), or 650°F (343°C) are
recognized, with the 250°F (121°C) rating being the most thermally efficient. Ratings over 650°F
(343°C) are not recognized as temperature rise doors.

Fire door labeling

Doors and frames may bear labels or marks of a recognized third party certification agency, ac-
ceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Fire door labels must indicate the hourly rating and
either the latch throw for single point locks or must bear a notation “Fire door to be equipped
with fire exit hardware”. Fire door labels may also indicate the temperature rise rating.
Door labels may be of metal (installed by welding, riveting, or drive screw) or of mylar. The ex-
istence of a label is the only method of verification that the door is rated.
Frame labels, except in specific instances, do not indicate hourly ratings. Fire door frames as-
sume the rating of the fire door installed or a rating that corresponds to the rating of the wall
in which it is installed, whichever is lesser.
Frame labels may be of metal (installed by welding, riveting, or drive screw), mylar, or may be
embossed into the frame.
Door and/or frame labels may be of the same or different certifying agencies. A door assembly
may consist of labeled components of different manufacturers.

Other fire door considerations

The effectiveness of a fire door assembly is dependent on the use of labeled items for all com-
ponents. These may include glazing material, locks, hinges, closers, latches, lite frames, other
hardware items, etc. The substitution of a non-rated component or one that is rated less than
the intended fire protection rating of the assembly results in a corresponding decrease in rating
or the loss of the rating in its entirety.
For further information, see SDI-118 “Basic Fire Door Requirements” or ANSI/NFPA 80 “Fire
Doors and Fire Windows.”
For information on fire doors used as a means of egress consult NFPA-101 “Life Safety
Code”.

12
 ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003

Appendix B
(informative)

General Considerations
Steel coating types
ASTM A924, “Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated
by the Hot-Dip Process” and A653, “Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galva-
nized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process” provide specifications
for both galvannealed (A Type) and Galvanized (G Type) coatings. For purposes of this standard,
G type coatings are not recommended due to problems related to paint adhesion and weld-
ing. In addition, heavier coating weights, i.e., G60 and G90 are known to experience cracking
and peeling of the coating resulting in potential performance failures under ANSI/SDI A250.10,
“Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and
Frames” and ANSI/SDI A250.3, “Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied
Finish Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames”.
Steel thickness
When ordering steel directly from the mill, manufacturers order sheet and coil to a minimum
decimal thickness and not a nominal gage. This thickness is generally at the low end of the
range for a specific gage. For example, the nominal thickness of 16 gage is 0.059" (1.5 mm). The
thickness tolerance permitted by ASTM A568, “Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon,
and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for” is ± .006"
(0.15 mm). Therefore the minimum ordering dimension would then become 0.053" (1.3 mm) as
shown in Table 2. These minimum values meet the requirements of Underwriters Laboratories
Inc. Steel gages, or MSG numbers may be used for reference purposes only.
Thermal bow
Installers should be aware of a condition known as thermal bow. Thermal bow is a temporary
condition which may occur in metal doors due to an inside / outside temperature differential. This
can occur when the direct rays of the sun strike a door surface. This condition, and the degree
of bowing, depends on the door color, construction, length of exposure, temperature, etc. This
condition can often be alleviated by painting the exposed surface a light color. In some cases
of extreme cold, this condition may also occur in reverse.
Aesthetics
The production of steel doors and frames relies on a variety of manufacturing processes includ-
ing spot welding, projection welding, arc welding ground smooth, grinding, filling, etc. These
processes may result in a show-through after application of finished paint. These characteristics
are inherent in production and are not to be considered as manufacturing defects.
The show-through characteristics increase as the paint gloss increases. This standard recom-
mends a maximum paint gloss rating of 20% reflectance, measured using a 60° gloss meter,
which should be suitable for most applications. Translucent paints may emphasize show-through
characteristics and their use is not recommended.
Water penetration
Borrowed lite, transom, sidelite, and combination transom sidelite frames are not factory sealed
to prevent water penetration. In situations where this is a concern, the contractor must seal all
joints that are exposed to the elements after the frame assembly is installed.
Whenever possible, it is strongly recommended that glass and glazing be installed on the exterior
rabbet of the frame assembly, which will help act as a deterrent to water penetration. It should
be noted that a fully welded corner does not ensure a watertight condition.

13
ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003

The member companies of the hollow metal industry cannot control the workmanship associated
with the frame installation and therefore, this work must be specified in the installation/glazing/
caulking section of the specifications. It is the responsibility of the contractor to assure all steps
are taken by the installer, glazer, or others to prevent water penetration.

14
 ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003

Appendix C
(informative)

Section 08100 Standard Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

(intended as a sample specification)

Part 1: General
1.01 Work included

A. Furnish only standard hollow metal doors, frames, sidelights and borrowed lights as
specified and shown on plans and schedules.
B. Related sections
1. Section 08700 — Finish hardware
2. Section 09900 — Painting
3. Section 08800 — Glass & glazing

1.02 References

A. SDI standards
1. SDI-106-1999 Recommended Standard Door Type Nomenclature
2. SDI-108-1999 Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Standard Steel
Doors
3. SDI-111-2000 Recommended Details and Guidelines for Standard Steel Doors,
Frames, and Accessories
4. SDI-112-1997 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors and
Frames
5. SDI-117-2000 Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames
6. SDI-118-2002 Basic Fire Door Requirements
7. SDI-124-1998 Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors and Frames
B. ANSI standards
1. ANSI/UL 10B-1997 Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
2. ANSI/UL 10C-1998 Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
3. ANSI/UL 1784-2001 Air Leakage Test of Door Assemblies
4. ANSI/NFPA 80-1999 Fire Doors and Fire Windows
5. ANSI/NFPA 252-1999 Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
6. ANSI/SDI A250.3-1999 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied
Finish Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames
7. ANSI/SDI A250.4-2001 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance
for Steel Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors and Hardware Reinforcings
8. ANSI/SDI A250.6-1997 Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard
Steel Doors and Frames
9. ANSI/SDI A250.7-1997 Nomenclature for Standard Steel Doors and Steel Frames

15
ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003

10. ANSI/SDI A250.10-1998 Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted
Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames
11. ANSI/SDI A250.11-2001 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames (For-
merly SDI-105)
12. A115 Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames
13. A115.IG Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware
C. ASTM standards
1. ASTM A1008-2003 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability
2. ASTM A568-2003 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength,
Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for
3. ASTM A1011-2001 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled,
Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Im-
proved Formability
4. ASTM A591-1998 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated,
for Light Coating Weight [Mass] Applications
5. ASTM A653-2002 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
6. ASTM A924-1999 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet,
Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process

1.03 Quality assurance

A. Manufacturer shall meet or exceed all standards as noted in Section 2.01 references.
B. Fire rated assemblies shall be manufactured in accordance with [Underwriters Labo-
ratories] [Intertek Testing Services] [Factory Mutual] established procedures and shall
bear the appropriate labels for each application.
C. No product shall be manufactured prior to receipt of approved hardware schedule and
templates.

1.04 Submittals

A. Shop drawings, if required, shall show all openings in the door schedule and/or the
drawings.
B. When required, provide details of door design, door construction details and methods
of assembling sections, hardware locations, anchorage and fastening methods, door
frame types and details, and finish requirements.

1.05 Delivery, marking and storage

A. Where specified, all products shall be marked with architects opening number on all
doors, frames, misc. parts and cartons.
B. All materials upon receipt shall be inspected for damage, and the shipper and supplier
notified if damage is found.
C. All doors and frames shall be stored vertically under cover. The units shall be placed
on at least 4" (102 mm) high wood sills or in a manner that will prevent rust or damage.

16
 ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003

The use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters that can create a humidity chamber
shall be avoided.
D. A 1/4" (6.3 mm) space between the doors shall be provided to promote air circulation.
If the wrapper on the door becomes wet, it must be removed immediately.
1.06 Warranty
1.07 [See manufacturer’s warranty]

Part 2: Product
2.01 Materials
2.02 All steels used to manufacture doors, frames, anchors, and accessories shall meet at least
one or more of the following requirements:

A. Cold rolled steel shall conform to ASTM designations A1008, “Standard Specification
for Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-
Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability” and A568, “Standard Specification for
Steel Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General
Requirements for.”

B. Hot rolled, pickled and oiled steel shall comply with ASTM designations A1011, “Standard
Specification for Steel Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength
Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability” and A568, “Standard
Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and
Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for.”

C. Hot dipped zinc coated steel shall be of the alloyed type and comply with ASTM des-
ignations A924, “Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet,
Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process” and A653, “Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-
Dip Process.”

2.03 Frames

A. Interior frames
1. Level 1 for door model [1] [2] [0.042" (1.0mm)] [0.053" (1.3mm)] minimum steel
thickness for frames
2. Level 2 for door model [1] [2] [0.042" (1.0mm)] minimum steel thickness for
frames
3. Level 3 for door model [1] [2] [3] [0.053" (1.3mm)] [0.067" (1.7mm)] minimum
steel thickness for frames
B. Exterior frames
1. Level 1 for door model [1] [2] [0.042" (1.0mm)] [0.053" (1.3mm)] minimum steel
thickness for frames
2. Level 2 for door model [1] [2] [0.053" (1.3mm)] minimum steel thickness for
frames

17
ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003

3. Level 3 for door model [1] [2] [3] [0.053" (1.3mm)] [0.067" (1.7mm)] minimum
steel thickness for frames
4. Level 4 for door model [1] [2] [0.067" (1.7mm)] [0.093" (2.3mm)] minimum steel
thickness for frames
C. Frames shall be [knockdown type] [slip-on drywall type] [face welded type] [full profile
weld type]
D. Provide frames, other than slip-on drywall type with a minimum of three anchors per
jamb suitable for the adjoining wall construction. Provide anchors of not less than 0.042"
(1.0 mm) in thickness or 0.167" (4.2 mm) diameter wire. Frames OVER 7'6" (2286 mm)
shall be provided with an additional anchor per jamb.
E. Slip-on drywall frame anchors shall be as provided by the manufacturer to assure per-
formance.
F. Base anchors shall be provided, other than slip-on drywall type, with minimum thickness
of 0.042" (1.0mm). For existing masonry wall conditions that do not allow for the use
of a floor anchor, an additional jamb anchor shall be provided.
G. All frames shall be fully prepared for all mortise template hardware and reinforced only
for surface mounted hardware. Drilling and/or tapping shall be completed by others.
H. Minimum hardware reinforcing gages shall comply with Table 4 of ANSI/SDI A250.8,
“SDI-100, Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames”.
2.04 Doors

A. Doors shall meet at least one or more of the following requirements:

1. Level 1 – Standard duty 1-3/8" (34.9 mm) and 1-3/4" (44.5 mm)
Model 1 – Full flush
Model 2 – Seamless
2. Level 2 – Heavy duty 1-3/4" (44.5 mm)
Model 1 – Full flush
Model 2 – Seamless
3. Level 3 – Extra heavy-duty 1-3/4" (44.5 mm)
Model 1 – Full flush
Model 2 – Seamless
Model 3 – Stile and rail
4. Level 4 – Maximum-duty 1-3/4" (44.5 mm)
Model 1 – Full flush
Model 2 – Seamless
B. Interior doors
Level [I] [II] [III] [IV]
Model [1] [2] [3]
C. Exterior doors
Level [1] [II] [III] [IV]
Model [1] [2] [3]
D. Door [and panel] construction

18
 ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003

E. Face steel sheet shall meet at least one or more of the following requirements:
1. Level 1
Model 1 - 0.032" (0.8mm) minimum thickness
Model 2 - 0.032" (0.8mm) minimum thickness
2. Level 2
Model 1 - 0.042" (1.0mm) minimum thickness
Model 2 - 0.042" (1.0mm) minimum thickness
3. Level 3
Model 1 - 0.053" (1.3mm) minimum thickness
Model 2 - 0.053" (1.3mm) minimum thickness
Model 3 - 0.053" (1.3mm) minimum thickness
4. Level 4
Model 1 - 0.067" (1.7mm) minimum thickness
Model 2 - 0.067" (1.7mm) minimum thickness
F. End closure: The top and bottom of the doors shall be closed with [flush] [inverted]
channels or closures. The channels or closures shall have a minimum material thick-
ness of 0.042" (1.0mm).
G. Core: See ANSI/SDI A250.8, “SDI-100, Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel
Doors and Frames”, Section 2.3.2.
H. Door edge design: See ANSI/SDI A250.8, “SDI-100, Recommended Specifications for
Standard Steel Doors and Frames”, Section 2.3.1.3.
I. Minimum hardware reinforcing gages shall comply with Table 4 of ANSI/SDI A250.8,
“SDI-100, Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames”.
J. Label requirements, steel astragals, louvers, vision lites – see ANSI/SDI A250.8, “SDI-
100, Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames” Section 2,
Products.

2.05 Finishing
Prime finish: Doors and frames shall be thoroughly cleaned, and chemically treated to insure
maximum paint adhesion. All surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view shall receive a
factory applied coat of rust inhibiting primer, either air-dried or baked-on. The finish shall meet
the requirements for acceptance stated in ANSI/SDI A250.10 “Test Procedure and Acceptance
Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.”

2.06 Design clearances

A. The clearance between the door and frame head and jambs shall be 1/8" (3.2 mm) in
the case of both single swing and pairs of doors.
B. The clearance between the meeting edges of pairs of doors shall be 1/8" (3.2 mm) to
1/4" (6.3 mm), for fire rated doors 1/8" (3.2 mm) ± 1/16" (1.6 mm).
C. The clearance at the bottom shall be [3/4" (19.1 mm)] [5/8" (15.8 mm)].
D. The clearance between the face of the door and door stop shall be 1/16" (1.6 mm) to
1/8" (3.2 mm).
E. All clearances shall be, unless otherwise specified, subject to a tolerance of ± 1/32"
(0.8 mm).

19
ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003

Part 3: Execution
3.01 Installation

A. Frames shall be installed plumb, level, rigid and in true alignment as recommended in
ANSI/SDI A250.11, “Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames” and A115.IG,
“Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware”. All frames other than slip-on types shall
be fastened to the adjacent structure so as to retain their position and stability. Dry-
wall slip-on frames shall be installed in prepared wall openings in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Where grouting is required in masonry installations, frames shall be braced or fastened
in such a way that will prevent the pressure of the grout from deforming the frame
members. Grout shall be mixed to provide a 4" (102mm) maximum slump consistency,
hand troweled into place. Grout mixed to a thin “pumpable” consistency shall not be
used.
C. Doors shall be installed and fastened to maintain alignment with frames to achieve
maximum operational effectiveness and appearance. Doors shall be adjusted to main-
tain perimeter clearances as specified in Section 2.1.8. Shimming shall be performed
by the installer as needed to assure the proper clearances are achieved.
D. Installation of hardware items shall be in accordance with the hardware manufacturer’s
recommendations and templates. A115.IG, “Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware”
and ANSI/SDI A250.6, “Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard
Steel Doors and Frames” shall be consulted for other pertinent information.

20
 ANSI/SDI A250.10-1998 (R2011)
Revision and Redesignation of
ANSI 224.1-1990

Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for —

Prime Painted Steel Surfaces
for Steel Doors and Frames
ANSI/SDI A250.10-1998

SPONSOR
Steel Door Institute
Approved November 30, 1998
 ANSI/SDI ®
A250.10-1998 (R2011)
Revision and Redesignation of
ANSI 224.1-1990

American National Standard

Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for

Prime Painted Steel Surfaces
for Steel Doors and Frames

Secretariat
Steel Door Institute

Approved November 30, 1998

American National Standards Institute, Inc.
American Approval of an American National Standard requires verification by ANSl
that the requirements for due process, consensus, and other criteria for
National approval have been met by the standards developer.

Standard Consensus is established when, in the judgement of the ANSl Board of

Standards Review, substantial agreement has been reached by directly
and materially affected interests. Substantial agreement means much more
than a simple majority, but not necessarily unanimity. Consensus requires
that all views and objections be considered, and that a concerted effort
be made toward their resolution.
The use of American National Standards is completely voluntary; their exis-
tence does not in any respect preclude anyone, whether they have approved
the standards or not, from manufacturing, marketing, purchasing, or using
products, processes, or procedures not conforming to the standards.
The American National Standards Institute does not develop standards and
will in no circumstances give any interpretation of any American National
Standard. Moreover, no person shall have the right or authority to issue
an interpretation of an American National Standard in the name of the
American National Standards Institute. Requests for interpretations should
be addressed to the secretariat or sponsor whose name appears on the
title page of this standard.
CAUTION NOTICE: This American National Standard may be revised or
withdrawn at any time. The procedures of the American National Stan-
dards Institute require that action be taken periodically to reaffirm, revise,
or withdraw this standard. Purchasers of American National Standards
may receive current information on all standards by calling or writing the
American National Standards Institute.

Published by

Steel Door Institute

30200 Detroit Road, Cleveland, Ohio 44145-1967

Copyright © 2012 by Steel Door Institute

All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced in any

form, in an electronic retrieval system or otherwise,
without prior written permission of the publisher.

Printed in the United States of America

ANSI/SDI A250.10-1998
Contents
Page
Foreword............................................................................................. ii
1 Scope............................................................................................1
2 Material. . ........................................................................................1
3 Testing...........................................................................................1
3.1 Salt Spray Test.........................................................................1
3.2 Condensation Testing (Humidity).. .............................................1
3.3 Impact Test..............................................................................1
3.4 Film Adhesion Test...................................................................2
4 Acceptance Criteria.. ......................................................................2
4.1 Salt Spray Resistance..............................................................2
4.2 Condensation Resistance.........................................................2
4.3 Impact Test..............................................................................2
4.4 Film Adhesion.. .........................................................................2
5 Report.. ..........................................................................................2
6 General..........................................................................................2
6.1 Testing Laboratory. . ..................................................................2
6.2 Certification. . ............................................................................2
Tables
1 Rust grades...................................................................................3
2 Classification of adhesive test results............................................6
Figures
1 Visual reference for percentage of rust.. .........................................3
2 Blister size #2................................................................................4
3 Blister size #4................................................................................4
4 Blister size #6................................................................................5
5 Blister size #8................................................................................5

i
Foreword (This Foreword is not part of American National Standard A250.10-1998)

The material contained in this document has been developed under the
auspices of the Technical Committee of the Steel Door Institute.
The original standard was issued on July 28, 1980 and was last revised
in 1990. The current edition is a revision of the 1990 document with the
contents being updated to reflect changes and advances that have taken
place in the steel door and frame industry since that time.
Suggestions for improvement gained in the use of this standard will be
welcome. They should be sent to the Steel Door Institute, 30200 Detroit
Road, Cleveland, Ohio 44145-1967.
The organizations that have approved this standard are as follows:
American Institute of Architects
American Iron and Steel Institute
Builders Hardware Manufacturers’ Association
Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers’ Association
Door and Hardware Institute
Factory Mutual Research Corporation
General Services Administration
Hollow Metal Manufacturers’ Association / Division of National Association
of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
Insulated Steel Door Institute
International Conference of Building Officials
Intertek Testing Services
Manufactured Housing Institute
National Association of Home Builders
Steel Door Institute
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
Window and Door Manufacturers’ Association

ii
The Accredited Standards Committee A250 TC-1 developed this standard
and had the following personnel at the time of approval:

Robert M. Berhinig, Chairman

J. Jeffery Wherry, Managing Director
Organization Represented Name of Representative
American Institute of Architects.................................................. Christopher Bushnell
American Iron & Steel Institute.................................................... Robert Wills
Amweld Building Products LLC.................................................. Allan Ashachik
Benchmark Commercial Doors................................................... Randall Barber
Builders Hardware Manufacturers’ Association.......................... Mike Tierney
Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers’ Association...................... Bud Bulley
Ceco Door Products.................................................................... Thomas R. Janicak
Curries Company........................................................................ Stan Horsfall
Deansteel Manufacturing Company............................................ Claus Heide
Door and Hardware Institute....................................................... John Geniesse
Factory Mutual Research Corporation........................................ Mark Tyrol
General Services Administration................................................. Stuart Palmer
Hollow Metal Manufacturers’ Association / Division of
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers........ Russell Tauscher
Ingersoll-Rand............................................................................. Kurt Roeper
International Conference of Building Officials............................. Paul Armstrong
Insulated Steel Door Institute...................................................... Steve Jasperson
Intertek Testing Services............................................................. Nancy Kokesh
The Kewanee Corporation.......................................................... Fred Pipin
Magnatrax Corporation............................................................... Jason Lisewski
Manufactured Housing Institute.................................................. Mark Nunn
Mesker Door Company............................................................... Mike Torres
National Association of Home Builders....................................... Jeff Inks
Pioneer Industries........................................................................ Mitchell Dorf
Security Metal Products Corporation.......................................... Daniel Buffenbarger
Steel Door Institute...................................................................... J. Jeffery Wherry
Underwriters Laboratories Inc..................................................... Robert Keogh
Window & Door Manufacturers’ Association.............................. Rick Perry

iii
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD ANSI/SDI A250.10-1998

American National Standard

Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for —

Prime Painted Steel Surfaces
for Steel Doors and Frames

1 Scope 3 Testing
These methods prescribe the procedures to be 3.1 Salt spray test
followed in the selection of material, chemical
a) Apparatus — The apparatus used for salt
preparation, painting, testing, and evaluation
spray testing shall be of such design as to
of prime painted steel surfaces for steel doors
conform to ASTM B117-03, “Standard Practice
and frames.
for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.”
2 Material b) Test performance — Salt spray testing
shall be conducted as specified in ASTM
2.1 The test specimen shall be the exact type
B117-03, “Standard Practice for Operating
and gauge of steel used in the manufacturing
Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus” for a test period
of the product. It shall be 4" x 10" with a ¼"
of 120 continuous hours. The test specimen(s)
hole at the center of the 4" width, ½" in from
shall be scribed with an "X" per ASTM D1654-
the end. When a specimen greater than 10"
92(2000) “Standard Test Method for Evaluation
in length is used for the coating process, the
of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected
bottom 10" of the specimen shall be used for
to Corrosive Environments,” sections 4.1 and
all subsequent testing.
5.1.
Permanent identification marks shall be added
3.2 Condensation testing (humidity)
to the specimen as required for control pur-
poses. a) Apparatus — The apparatus used for con-
densation (humidity) testing shall be of such
2.2 The specimen(s) shall be hung using a
design as to conform to ASTM D4585-99,
method representative of that used in pro-
“Standard Practice for Testing Water Resis-
duction.
tance of Coatings Using Controlled Conden-
2.3 The specimen(s) shall be cleaned, pre- sation.”
treated and painted in accordance with the
b) Test performance — Condensation (hu-
manufacturer’s normal production method
midity) testing shall be conducted as speci-
and procedure. All coating weights used on
fied in ASTM D4585-99, “Standard Practice for
test specimens shall be documented and
Testing Water Resistance of Coatings Using
representative of the individual manufacturer’s
Controlled Condensation,” for a test period of
normal production material.
240 continuous hours. Exposure temperatures
2.4 A t t h e e n d o f t h e p a i n t c y c l e , t h e shall be maintained at a minimum of 100° Fahr-
specimen(s) shall be removed from the paint enheit. Actual test temperature shall be noted
system with careful handling. The painted sur- in the report.
face of the specimen shall not be handled or
3.3 Impact test
come in contact with other objects to prevent
disruption of the painted surface. The paint shall be tested per ASTM D2794-93
(1999)e1 “Standard Test Method for Resistance
2.5 All specimens shall be aged a minimum of
of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid
72 hours prior to testing.
Deformation (Impact),” with 20 inch pounds

1
ANSI/SDI A250.10-1998

of direct impact using a Gardner Impact Tes- 4.4 Film adhesion

ter with 1/2" diameter ball or punch at room
There shall be no adhesion loss less than a
temperature of 70° – 75° Fahrenheit. After
grade 3B as defined in ASTM D3359-02. This
impact is made, apply 3/4" wide #600 Scotch
grade represents a film removal of between
cellophane tape firmly to the impact area and
5 and 15%. Table 2 on page 8 illustrates the
pull off sharply.
various classifications for adhesion loss.
3.4 Film adhesion test
5 Report
The coating film adhesion shall be tested in
accordance with method “B” of ASTM D3359- 5.1 The report shall cover the date the test was
02, “Standard Test Methods for Measuring Ad- performed and the issue date of the report.
hesion by Tape Test.” A total of (11) parallel
5.2 Identification of the specimen tested,
cuts are made with a sharp instrument, 1 mm
source of supply, manufacturer, model or se-
apart in both a vertical and horizontal direction
ries number, or both, and any other pertinent
forming a grid. One inch wide pressure-sen-
information.
sitive tape is then firmly applied to the scribed
surface and rapidly removed. 5.3 A detailed description of the specimen or
specimens tested shall include the type of
4 Acceptance criteria prime paint, the method of paint application,
the procedure used to cure it, and the dry film
4.1 Salt spray resistance
thickness.
The paint film on the unscored surface of the
5.4 A statement that the test or tests were con-
test specimen shall have a rust grade of no less
ducted in accordance with the methods and
than 6 as defined in ASTM D610-01, “Standard
procedures as specified herein. If deviations
Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Rusting
from these methods and procedures were
on Painted Steel Surfaces.” Table 1 and the
made, they shall be described in the report.
depictions shown on page 5 illustrate the scale
used to evaluate the rust grades. The paint 5.5 When the test is made to check the
film at the scored line shall not be undercut conformance of the unit specimen to test re-
by rust more than 1/8" each side, when tested quirements of a particular specification, the
in accordance with paragraph 3.1. identification or description of the specification
shall be included in the report.
4.2 Condensation resistance
The paint film may have any quantity of #8 6 General
blisters but, shall have no more than a few
6.1 Testing laboratory
#6 blisters as illustrated in ASTM D714-02,
“Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree All tests shall be conducted and/or certified
of Blistering of Paints,” when tested in accor- by a nationally recognized, independent test-
dance with paragraph 3.2. Visual represent- ing laboratory.
ations of the various degrees of blistering are
6.2 Certification
shown on pages 6 and 7.
Reference may be made to this specification.
4.3 Impact test
When reference is made, the following state-
No paint film removal shall occur other than ment shall be used: Prime finish has been
at an area 1/8" in diameter at the center of the tested in conformance with ANSI Standard
impact area, when tested in accordance with A250.10-1998.
paragraph 3.3.

2
 ANSI/SDI A250.10-1998

Table 1 – Rust grades

Rust Grade Maximum % of rusted area

10 00.01
9 00.03
8 00.10
7 00.30
6 01.00
5 03.00
4 10.00
3 16.67
2 33.33
1 50.00
0 100.00

Figure 1 – Visual reference for percentage of rust

3
4
Visual examples illustrating degrees of blistering
ANSI/SDI A250.10-1998

FEW MEDIUM MEDIUM DENSE DENSE

Figure 2 – Blister size #2

FEW MEDIUM MEDIUM DENSE DENSE

Figure 3 – Blister size #4
 Visual examples illustrating degrees of blistering

FEW MEDIUM MEDIUM DENSE DENSE

Figure 4 – Blister size #6

FEW MEDIUM MEDIUM DENSE DENSE

Figure 5 – Blister size #8

5
ANSI/SDI A250.10-1998
ANSI/SDI A250.10-1998

Table 2 – Classification of adhesive test results

Surface of cross-cut areas from

Classification which listing has occurred. (Ex- Rate of adhesion
ample for six parallel cuts.)

The edges of the cuts are

completely smooth; none of
5B None
the squares or the lattice are
detached.

Small flakes of coating are

detached at intersections;
4B
less than 5% of the area is
affected.

Small flakes of coating are

detached along edges and
3B at intersections of cuts. The
area affected is 5 to 15% of
the lattice.

The coating has flaked along

the edges and at parts of the
2B
squares. The affected area is
15 to 35% of the lattice.

The coating has flaked along

the edges of cuts in large rib-
1B bons and entire squares have
detached. The area affected
is 35 to 65% of the lattice.

0B Flaking and detachment in excess of 65%.

6
 MEMBERS OF THE
AVAILABLE PUBLICATIONS STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

Specifications CECO DOOR PRODUCTS

9159 Telecom Drive
ANSI/SDI A250.6 Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcings on Standard Milan, TN 38358
Steel Doors and Frames (731) 686-8345
www.cecodoor.com
ANSI/SDI A250.8 SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors &
Frames CURRIES COMPANY
SDI-108 Recommended Selection & Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors P.O. Box 1648
Mason City, IA 50402-1648
SDI-118 Basic Fire Door, Fire Door Frame, Transom/Sidelight Frame, and (641) 423-1334
Window Frame Requirements www.curries.com
SDI-128 Guidelines for Acoustical Performance of Standard Steel Doors &
Frames DEANSTEEL MANUFACTURING CO.
111 Merchant Street
SDI-129 Hinge & Strike Spacing San Antonio, TX 78204-1496
(210) 226-8271
Test Procedures www.deansteel.com
ANSI/SDI A250.3 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish
DOOR COMPONENTS INC.
Coatings for Steel Doors & Frames
7980 Redwood Avenue
ANSI/SDI A250.4 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Fontana, CA 92336-1638
Steel Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors (909) 770-5700
www.doorcomponents.com
ANSI/SDI A250.10 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel
Surfaces for Steel Doors & Frames MESKER DOOR, INC.
ANSI/SDI A250.13 Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components 3440 Stanwood Boulevard
for Swinging Door Assemblies Huntsville, AL 35811-9021
(256) 851-6670
SDI-113 Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal www.meskerdoor.com
Transmittance of Steel Door & Frame Assemblies
SDI-131 Accelerated Physical Endurance Test Procedure for Steel Doors, METAL PRODUCTS, INC.
319 North Hills Road
Frames and Frame Anchors
Corbin, KY 40701
(606) 523-0173
Construction Details
www.metalproductsinc.com
ANSI/SDI A250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames
PIONEER INDUSTRIES, INC.
SDI-110 Standard Steel Doors & Frames for Modular Masonry Construction 171 South Newman Street
SDI-111 Recommended Details for Standard Details Steel Doors, Frames, Hackensack, NJ 07601
Accessories and Related Components (201) 933-1900
www.pioneerindustries.com
SDI-122 Installation & Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors &
Frames REPUBLIC
SDI-132 Drywall Slip-On Frames 155 Republic Drive
McKenzie, TN 38201-0580
Miscellaneous Documents (731) 352-3383
www.republicdoor.com
ANSI/SDI A250.7 Nomenclature for Standard Steel Doors & Steel Frames
SDI-112 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors & SECURITY METAL PRODUCTS CORP.
Frames 5700 Hannum Avenue, Suite 250
Culver City, CA 90230
SDI-117 Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors & Frames (310) 641-6690
www.secmet.com
SDI-124 Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors & Frames
SDI-127 Industry Alert Series (A-L) STEELCRAFT
SDI-130 Electrified Hinge Preparations Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies
9017 Blue Ash Road
SDI What is The SDI? Cincinnati, OH 45242
(513) 745-6400
AUDIO-VISUAL PROGRAMS ON VHS ALSO AVAILABLE www.steelcraft.com

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
440.899.0010 • FAX 440.892.1404
4/5/2012 www.steeldoor.org
 ANSI/SDI A250.11-2012
Revision of ANSI/SDI A250.11-2001

Recommended
Erection Instructions for Steel Frames
ANSI/SDI A250.11-2012

SPONSOR
Steel Door Institute
Approved January 17, 2012
 ANSI/SDI ®
A250.11-2012
Revision of ANSI/SDI A250.11-2001

American National Standard

Recommended
Erection Instructions
for Steel Frames

Secretariat
Steel Door Institute

Approved June 10, 2011

American National Standards Institute, Inc.
American Approval of an American National Standard requires verification by ANSl
that the requirements for due process, consensus, and other criteria for
National approval have been met by the standards developer.

Standard Consensus is established when, in the judgement of the ANSl Board of

Standards Review, substantial agreement has been reached by directly
and materially affected interests. Substantial agreement means much more
than a simple majority, but not necessarily unanimity. Consensus requires
that all views and objections be considered, and that a concerted effort
be made toward their resolution.
The use of American National Standards is completely voluntary; their exis-
tence does not in any respect preclude anyone, whether they have approved
the standards or not, from manufacturing, marketing, purchasing, or using
products, processes, or procedures not conforming to the standards.
The American National Standards Institute does not develop standards and
will in no circumstances give any interpretation of any American National
Standard. Moreover, no person shall have the right or authority to issue
an interpretation of an American National Standard in the name of the
American National Standards Institute. Requests for interpretations should
be addressed to the secretariat or sponsor whose name appears on the
title page of this standard.
CAUTION NOTICE: This American National Standard may be revised or
withdrawn at any time. The procedures of the American National Stan-
dards Institute require that action be taken periodically to reaffirm, revise,
or withdraw this standard. Purchasers of American National Standards
may receive current information on all standards by calling or writing the
American National Standards Institute.

Published by

Steel Door Institute

30200 Detroit Road, Cleveland, Ohio 44145-1967

Copyright © 2012 by Steel Door Institute

All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced in any

form, in an electronic retrieval system or otherwise,
without prior written permission of the publisher.

Printed in the United States of America

ANSI/SDI A250.11-2012
Contents
Page

1 S cope. . ...........................................................................................1
2 S torage and Preliminary Assembly.. ................................................1
3 P lumbing and bracing frames.........................................................2
4 A ccessories....................................................................................3
5 N ew masonry construction.............................................................4
6 E xisting masonry construction . . .....................................................4
7 S teel stud wall construction, studs erected with frame. . .................5
8 D ouble egress frames in steel stud wall construction.....................6
9 Wood stud construction (studs erected with frame)........................7
10 Wood/steel stud construction (studs erected before frame)..........9
11 S lip-on drywall.. ..........................................................................10
12 B utted or Existing Steel or Wood Stud Wall Construction........... 11

Figures
1 E xamples of the accuracy to be maintained while setting frames...2
2 S preader.. .......................................................................................3
3 P lumbing the frame........................................................................3
4 B racing the frame. . .........................................................................3
5 R ubber silencers.. ...........................................................................4
6 E xtended base anchor....................................................................4
7 N ew masonry construction.............................................................4
8 M asonry anchors............................................................................4
9 E xisting masonry construction........................................................5
10 R ough Opening . . ...........................................................................5
11 E xisting masonry or concrete wall anchors...................................5
12 S teel stud wall construction.. ........................................................5
13 C hannel type steel stud................................................................6
14 E rect frame. . .................................................................................6
15 A nchor jambs...............................................................................7
16 A nchor header..............................................................................7
17 E rect frame. . .................................................................................7
18 Wood stud wall construction.. .......................................................8
19 Weld in strap anchors wood/steel studs.......................................8

i
 Page

20 S
 nap or weld in anchors wood/steel studs...................................8
21 Z
 Type weld in anchors steel studs.. .............................................8
22 R
 ough opening shown in wood stud.. . ..........................................9
23 W
 ood stud wall construction.. .......................................................9
24 W
 eld in strap anchors wood/steel studs.......................................9
25 S
 nap or weld in anchors wood/steel studs................................. 10
26 Z
 Type weld in anchors steel studs.. ...........................................10
27 R ough opening...........................................................................10
28 A
 lign corner gussets...................................................................11
29 L
 evel and square frame..............................................................11
30 A
 nchor adjusting screw..............................................................11
31 F
 asten base anchors to wall stud............................................... 11
32 H
 ole plug mount.........................................................................12
33 C ountersink mount.....................................................................13

Annexes
A Manufacturing Tolerances
for Standard Steel Doors and Frames..........................................14
B Installation Exceptions.................................................................20

ii
Foreword (This Foreword is not part of American National Standard A250.11-2012)

The material contained in this document has been developed under the
auspices of the Technical Committee of the Steel Door Institute.
Suggestions for improvement gained in the use of this standard will be
welcome. They should be sent to the Steel Door Institute, 30200 Detroit
Road, Cleveland, OH 44145-1967.
The organizations that have approved this standard are part of the ANSI
A250 Accredited Standards Committee, formed February 8, 1991, and are
as follows:
American Institute of Architects
Architectural Testing
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association
Cedar Valley Associates
Door and Hardware Institute
FM Approvals
Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association/Division of NAAMM
Intertek Testing Services
Door Control Services
Wind Science & Engineering Research Center
Steel Door Institute
Therma-Tru
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
Vetrotech / Saint Gobain
The Technical Committee of the Steel Door Institute, which developed this
standard, had the following personnel at the time of approval:

Claus D. Heide, Chairman

Mike Torres, 1 st Vice Chairman
Tom R. Janicak, 2 nd Vice Chairman
J. Jeffery Wherry, Manager
Organization Represented Name of Representative
Ceco Door Products.................................................................... Tom R. Janicak
Curries Company........................................................................ Dave Dedic
Deansteel Manufacturing Co....................................................... Claus D. Heide
Door Components Inc................................................................. Tom Popow
Mesker Door Company............................................................... Mike Torres
Metal Products Inc...................................................................... Tom Stone
Pioneer Industries........................................................................ Kamal Sheikh
Republic ..................................................................................... Steven Hugueley
Security Metal Products ............................................................. Terry Simpson
Steelcraft..................................................................................... Karen Bishop
Steel Door Institute...................................................................... J. Jeffery Wherry

iii
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD ANSI A250.11-2012

American National Standard

Recommended Erection Instructions

for Steel Frames

1 Scope HMMA 841-07, Tolerances and Clearances for

Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
1.1 Recommended methods for the installation
of steel frames for swinging doors in a variety of 1.2.1 Further information on wall construction,
wall conditions, commonly used in commercial anchoring, details, manufacturing tolerances
buildings, are covered within this standard. The or installation may be found in the following:
installation of transom/sidelight (or panel) type
SDI 110-2009, Standard Steel Doors and
frames and single or multiple borrowed lights
Frames for Modular Masonry Construction
are not covered in this standard.
SDI 111-2009, Recommended Standard Details
1.1.1 It is not the intention of this document
for Steel Doors, Frames, Accessories and Re-
to obstruct the development of alternative in-
lated Components
stallation methods, nor is it intended to restrict
frame installation solely to the wall types noted SDI 122-2007, Installation and Troubleshooting
herein. Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames
1.1.2 Although this document is commonly SDI 127D-2006, Electric Strikes in Stud
referenced for severe windstorm installations, Walls
critical performance requirements (such as
1.3 Metrication
type, quantity, and location of anchors) shall
be as indicated in the manufacturer’s published 1.3.1 Standard dimensions used in this docu-
Approvals or Listings. ment are in inch-pound units. Metric values,
where applicable, are included in parenthesis
1.2 Reference documents
for reference only. These are “soft conversion”
SDI 127E-2006, Prime Painted Materials approximates.
Alert
2 Storage and Preliminary Assembly
SDI 127F-2010, Butted Frames Rough Open-
(see SDI 127E, and ANSI/SDI A250.8)
ing Sizes
2.1 All frames, including knocked-down, shall
SDI 127J-2010, Back-Coating of Frames
be stored under cover.
SDI 117-2009 Manufacturing Tolerances for
2.1.1 Knocked-down frames shall be placed
Standard Steel Doors and Frames
flat on at least 4˝ (102 mm) wood sills to prevent
NFPA 80-2010, Standard for Fire Doors and the frames from resting on the ground.
Other Opening Protectives (National Fire
2.1.2 Assembled frames shall be stored verti-
Protection Association, 1 Batterymarch Park,
cally. The units shall be placed on at least 4˝
Quincy, MA 02269; www.nfpa.org)
(102 mm) high wood sills or in a manner that
UL10C-2009 Standard for Safety Positive Pres- will prevent rust or damage.
sure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
2.1.3 The use of non-vented plastic or canvas
ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003(R2008) Recommended shelters that can create a humidity chamber
Specifications for Standard Doors and Frames shall be avoided.
HMMA 840-07, Installation and Storage of Hol- 2.1.4 Refer to project specifications for re-
low Metal Doors and Frames quired cleanup and touchup work.

1
ANSI A250.11-2012

2.2 Back-Coating (see SDI 127J for further 2.4 Assembly of frame/anchor provisions
information)
2.4.1 Follow manufacturers’ recommended
2.2.1 When temperature conditions necessi- procedure for assembly of frame and quantity
tate the use of anti-freezing agents in plaster or and spacing of anchors. If not indicated, install
mortar, the inside of the frame shall be coated anchors at hinge levels and directly opposite
at the jobsite with a corrosion resistant coating at strike jamb.
by the contractor responsible for installation. 2.5 Verification
2.3 Grouting of frames (see ANSI/SDI 2.5.1 Prior to installation, jobsite personnel
A250.8 for further information) shall ensure correct swing, size and labeling.
2.3.1 Where grouting is required in masonry 2.6 Installation tolerances
installations, frames shall be braced or fastened 2.6.1 While this document is mainly concerned
in such a way that will prevent the pressure of with tolerances relating to the manufacturing
the grout from deforming the frame members. process, openings will not function properly
if the frame is not installed within recognized
2.3.2 Grout shall be mixed to provide a 4˝ (102
tolerances.
mm) maximum slump consistency, and be hand
troweled into place. Grout mixed to a thinner Figure 1 shows examples of the accuracy to
“pumpable” consistency shall not be used. be maintained while setting frames.

2.3.3 Standard mortar protection in frames is 3 Plumbing and bracing frames

not intended for thin consistency grout. Steel
frames, including fire rated frames, do not re- 3.1 Wood Spreaders (see Figure 2)
quire grouting. Grouting is not recommended The Contractor(s) responsible for installation
for frames installed in drywall. shall have available a sufficient supply of wood
1⁄16˝ (1.58 mm)
Head Level Head Level
Strike 1⁄16˝
Hinge Jamb (1.58 mm)
Jamb

Hinge or Hinge or
Strike Jamb Strike Jamb
1⁄16˝ (1.58 mm)

Strike
Hinge Bottom Bottom
Jamb 1⁄16˝
Jamb (1.58 mm)

Maximum 1⁄16˝ allowable tolerance on total opening.

1b – Plumbness

1a – Squareness

1⁄16˝ (1.58 mm)

1⁄16˝ (1.58 mm)

1c – Alignment 1d – Twist

Figure 1 – Examples of the accuracy to be maintained while setting frames

2
 ANSI A250.11-2012

spreaders for bracing frames. Spreader bars 3.3 Bracing the frame (see Figure 4)
for shipping purposes shall not be used as
3.3.1 Frame bracing shall be as shown or
installation spreaders.
shore to a structure above.
3.1.1 Wood spreaders shall be square and
3.3.2 Bracing shall be perpendicular to the
fabricated from lumber no less than 1˝ (25.4
intended wall.
mm) thick. Correct length is the door opening
width between the jambs at the header (i.e.,
Single Door 3´-0˝ = 36˝= 915 mm). Length
tolerance is +1⁄16˝, -0˝ (+1.6 mm, –0). Cut clear-
ance notches for frame stops. Spreader shall
be nearly as wide as frame jamb depth for
proper installation.

Frame
Depth

Door opening at header

Figure 2 – Spreader

3.2 Equipment for plumbing the frame

(see Figure 3)
3.2.1 The contractor should be equipped with
a carpenter level, square and wood spreaders.
Figure 4 – Bracing the frame
3.2.2 Where welded frames are provided with
spreader bars, they shall be removed with a 3.4 Positioning the frame
suitable saw or chisel and filed flush before 3.4.1 Set the frame in the desired location and
setting frames. level the header. Square jambs to header. Shim
under jambs if necessary. With frame properly
aligned, insert wood spreaders at bottom and
mid-height and fasten jambs to floor through
floor anchors.
Plumb

3.4.2 Plumb and square jambs. Install verti-

cal brace to support header for openings over
Level
4´-0˝ (1219 mm) wide.
Square
4 Accessories
4.1 Install rubber silencers (see Figure 5)
4.1.1 Cut the point from a #6d box or finish-
Section A–A ing nail. Insert nail in hole to elongate rubber
silencers.
A A
Moisten the end and insert rubber silencers in
predrilled holes on frame stop, remove nail. The
Wood spreader thickness of the silencer shall permit latching
between jambs of door with 1⁄16˝ to 3⁄32˝ (1.6 to 2.4 mm) clear-
ance between face of door and stop of frame.
4.1.2 Install rubber silencers before frame
Figure 3 – Plumbing the frame erection to avoid grout filling rubber silencer

3
ANSI A250.11-2012

5.2 Erect, brace, square and plumb frame.

5.2.1 Fasten frame to floor through base
anchors.
5.3 Set second spreader at the mid-height of
the door opening to maintain the door open-
ing size.
5.4 Install anchors (see Figure 8). Grout frame
in the area of the anchors as block courses
Figure 5 – Rubber silencers are laid up.
holes. In some cases rubber silencers are fac-
tory installed.
4.2 Extended base anchor (see Figure 6)
4.2.1 Extended base anchors are supplied
upon request only. (If required for tool attach-
ment.)

5 New masonry construction (see

Figure 7)
5.1 Assemble frame per manufacturer’s in-
structions.
Figure 8 – Masonry anchors

5.4.1 Frames may also be supplied with an-

chors welded in place.
5.5 Continually check plumb and square as
wall progresses.

6 Existing masonry construction

(see Figure 9, Figure 10, and SDI 127F)
6.1 Rough openings for existing wall, structural
steel framing, or retrofit installations utilizing a
Figure 6 – Extended base anchor butted to wall application shall be no less than
3⁄16˝ (4.8 mm) larger the frame on all three sides.
6.1.1 The installer is responsible for any shim-
ming or aligning required. Gaps are normally
90° 90° sealed as part of the installation or caulking/
painting process.
Wood spreader 6.1.2 Refer to Architectural specifications for
between jambs the appropriate sealant material to be used at
fire or smoke control doors.
6.2 Assemble frame per manufacturer’s in-
structions.
6.3 Install snap-in anchors (see Figure 11)
and tap with a hammer to align with pierced
holes in jambs.
6.3.1 Frames may also be supplied with an-
chors welded in place.
Figure 7 – New masonry construction
4
 ANSI A250.11-2012

6.4 Slide frame into wall opening; install wood

spreaders.
90° 90°
6.5 Where possible, one jamb should be butted
tightly to the wall.
6.6 Use tapered shims between anchors and
Wood spreader wall and spreaders to maintain squareness
between jambs
and alignment of frame, and to maintain door
opening sizes.
6.6.1 Drill appropriate size hole (per fastener
manufacturer’s instructions) for one-piece an-
chor bolts. Leave holes “rough” for added grip.
6.6.2 Backer rod or caulking shall be used
where gaps occur between frame and wall.
6.7 Insert anchor bolts and tighten securely,
checking for frame alignment periodically.
6.8 Install plugs to cover bolt heads (if so
Figure 9 – Existing masonry construction
equipped).

7 Steel stud wall construction, studs

erected with frame (see Figure 12)
7.1 Assemble frame per manufacturer’s in-
structions.
7.2 Install snap-in anchors. Position anchors
Rough opening height + 3⁄16"

in frame through the throat and tap in with a

hammer.
7.2.1 Frames may also be supplied with an-
Rough opening width chors welded in place.
+ ⅜"
Ceiling runner Header channel

Jamb
studs
90° 90°

Figure 10 – Rough Opening

Wood spreader
between jambs
Hole plug

Figure 11 – Existing masonry

or concrete wall anchors Figure 12 – Steel stud wall construction
5
ANSI A250.11-2012

7.3 Erect, brace, square and plumb frame as 8 Double egress frames in steel stud
shown. wall construction
7.4 Install wood spreaders. 8.1 Generally, the installation of double egress
frames in steel stud walls follows the same
7.5 Attach jambs to floor through floor anchor
procedure as Section 7.
or floor extension.
8.1.1 If frames are supplied knocked down,
7.6 Install jamb studs to floor, header chan-
assemble per manufacturer’s instructions.
nels, and ceiling runners butted tightly against
frame anchors and properly positioned in frame 8.1.2 Install anchors (if not supplied welded
throat for wallboard. to frame) per manufacturer’s instructions.
7.6.1 Nesting or overlapping stud joints or 8.2 Erect, brace, square and plumb frame as
other wall construction practices that will in- shown (see Figure 14).
crease the overall wall thickness beyond the
intended finished thickness are to be avoided.
Ceiling stud
7.7 Attach jamb studs to anchors with screws
or weld.
7.7.1 If using screws, drill from the back side Angle braces
of the stud, through both the stud and anchor,
then attach with (2) screws per anchor loca-
tion (see Figure 13). Screws shall be #6 x ⅜˝
minimum steel sheet metal or self tapping type.

Frame

Wood spreader
Channel type
between jambs
jamb studs

Figure 14 – Erect frame

8.2.1 Stand frame up in desired location. An-

chor one jamb to floor and set wood spreader
on floor from anchored jamb to loose jamb.

Figure 13 – Channel type steel stud 8.2.2 Install a vertical wood brace at center
of frame.
7.7.2 When attaching header stud to jamb
8.2.3 Position and anchor second jamb to
studs, be sure the stud is above frame header.
floor. Plumb, level and square frame, then install
This will assure ample room for attaching plaster
wood spreaders at mid-height.
lath or drywall and will not interfere with instal-
lation of hardware attached to frame header.
7.7.3 At wrap-around installations in fire rated
walls, drywall shall extend at least ½˝ (12.7
mm) into frame throat. See Section 12 for frame
installations in butted or existing stud walls.

6
 ANSI A250.11-2012

8.5 Anchor header (see Figure 16)

Header anchor requirements will vary. The
manufacturer’s installation requirements should
90° 90° be followed.
8.6 At wrap-around installations in fire rated
walls, drywall shall extend at least ½˝ (12.7
mm) into frame throat. See Section 12 for frame
installations in butted or existing stud walls.
Wood
spreader 9 Wood stud construction (studs
between erected with frame)
jambs
9.1 Assemble frame per manufacturer’s in-
structions.
Figure 15 – Anchor jambs 9.2 Install snap-in anchors. Position anchors
in frame through the throat and tap in with a
8.3 Anchor jambs (see Figure 15) hammer.

8.3.1 Install jamb studs to floor, header chan-

nels, and ceiling runners butted tightly against
frame anchors and properly positioned in frame
throat for wallboard.
Angle
8.3.2 Nesting or overlapping stud joints or braces
other wall construction practices that will in-
crease the overall wall thickness beyond the
intended finished thickness are to be avoided.
8.4 Attach jamb studs to anchors with screws
or weld.
8.4.1 If using screws, drill from the back side
of the stud, through both the stud and anchor,
then attach with (2) screws per anchor loca-
tion (see figure 15). Screws shall be #6 x ⅜˝ Wood spreader
between jambs
minimum steel sheet metal or self tapping type.

Figure 17 – Erect frame

9.2.1 Frames may also be supplied with an-

chors welded in place.
½" long (max.)
screw 9.3 Square, brace and plumb frame as shown
(see Figure 17).
9.4 Install wood spreaders (see Figure 18).
9.5 Attach jambs to floor through floor anchor
or floor extension.
Alt. profile
9.6 Install jamb studs (jack stud and king
Wood stud) butted tightly against anchors and prop-
spreader
Second stud at erly positioned in frame throat for wallboard
between
jambs head and jambs (see Figure 18).
9.6.1 Attach header stud(s) or header assem-
Figure 16 – Anchor header bly between jamb studs making sure they are

7
ANSI A250.11-2012

Ceiling runner Header

Jamb
studs
90° 90°

Double
header and
jamb studs
required

Wood
spreader
Floor between
runner jambs

Figure 20 – Snap or weld in anchors wood/

steel studs
Figure 18 – Wood stud wall construction
9.8 Square and nail top anchor to stud on
ONE JAMB ONLY. Check plumb and square
above the frame head. This will assure ample and continue to nail balance of anchors to
room for attaching plaster lath or drywall and stud. Repeat for opposite jamb. For steel studs
will not interfere with installation of hardware install screws from back of stud into Z anchor
attached to frame head (see Figure 18). (see Figure 21).
9.7 Bend anchor straps around stud leaving 9.8.1 At wrap-around installations in fire rated
sufficient clearance between frame return and walls, drywall shall extend at least ½˝ (12.7
stud for inserting finished wall material (see mm) into frame throat. See Section 12 for frame
Figure 19 and Figure 20). installations in butted or existing stud walls.

Figure 19 – Weld in strap anchors wood/steel

studs
9.7.1 If there is insufficient room for wall finish,
notch jamb studs no more than 1⁄16˝ (1.6 mm)
deep for anchor straps.
Figure 21 – Z Type weld in anchors steel studs

8
 ANSI A250.11-2012

10 Wood/steel stud construction 10.1.1 Assure that rough openings are no less
(studs erected before frame) than those required in SDI 127F.
10.1 Build rough opening (see Figure 22) 10.1.2 It is recommended that double studs
according to dimensions and clearances in be used at jambs and headers.
manufacturer’s installation instructions.
10.2 Assemble frame per manufacturer’s
instructions.
10.3 Install snap-in anchors. Position anchors
in frame through the throat and tap in with a
hammer.
10.3.1 Frames may also be supplied with
anchors welded in place.
10.3.2 If base anchors cannot be used add
one anchor per jamb at bottom.
10.3.3 Install fire rated frames with the an-
Rough
chor quantity and spacing as per the individual
opening manufacturer’s listings and instructions.
demensions
10.4 Slide frame into wall opening.
10.4.1 Install wood spreaders at bottom and
mid-height. Square and level frame. Shim jambs
if necessary (see Figure 23).
10.5 Bend anchor straps around stud leaving
sufficient clearance between frame return and
stud for inserting finished wall material (see
Figure 24 and Figure 25).
Figure 22 – Rough opening shown in wood
stud.

90° 90°

Figure 24 – Weld in strap anchors wood/steel

Wood studs
spreader
between
jambs

Figure 23 – Wood stud wall construction

9
ANSI A250.11-2012

10.6.1 NOTE: At wrap-around installations in

fire rated walls, drywall shall extend at least
½˝ (12.7 mm) into frame throat. See Section
12 for frame installations in butted or existing
stud walls.

11 Slip-on drywall
11.1 Prepare rough opening (see Figure 27)
per frame manufacturer’s recommendations.
11.1.1 Nesting or overlapping stud joints or
other wall construction practices that will in-
crease the overall wall thickness beyond the
intended finished thickness are to be avoided.
11.2 Install base anchors if not factory welded
to jambs or if frame faces are not prepared for
base anchor screws.
Figure 25 – Snap or weld in anchors wood/
steel studs

10.6 Square and nail top anchor to stud on

ONE JAMB ONLY. Check plumb and square
and continue to nail balance of anchors to
stud. Repeat for opposite jamb. For steel studs
install screws from back of stud into Z anchor

Rough opening height

(see Figure 26

Rough opening width

Figure 27 – Rough opening

Figure 26 – Z Type weld in anchors steel studs

10
 ANSI A250.11-2012

11.3 Install jambs and header onto wall per

manufacturer’s instructions, taking care to align
corner gussets (if so equipped). See Figure 28.

Anchor adjusting screw

(Typical both sides)

Figure 30 – Anchor adjusting screw

11.6 Re-check level and square. Adjust using

anchor screws as needed.
11.7 Fasten base anchors to wall stud (see
Figure 31) or fasten to wall studs through pre-
pared holes in face of jambs at bottom.
Figure 28 – Align corner gussets

11.4 Level and square frame (see Figure 29)

11.4.1 Install wood spreaders.
11.5 Turn adjusting screws hand tight (DO NOT
USE SCREW GUN) until compression anchor
contacts jamb studs. See Figure 30.

Level
and
square

Figure 31 – Fasten
base anchors to wall stud

12 Butted or Existing Steel or Wood

Stud Wall Construction
12.1 Historically, frames installed in fire rated
stud walls required frames to wrap around
the wall and drywall must extend at least ½˝
(12.7 mm) into frame throat. Fire testing has
Figure 29 – Level and square frame
11
ANSI A250.11-2012

confirmed that fire door frames will perform 12.2 Assemble knock down frames per manu-
satisfactorily to the acceptance criteria of UL facturer’s instructions.
10C under positive pressure when butted to
new or existing stud and drywall construction 12.3 Anchors are typically welded to frames
(see Figure 32 and Figure 33). and will either be a sleeve aligned with a coun-
tersunk hole or a plate between returns with
12.1.1 This installation has been incorpo-
rated into NFPA 80 as Figure A.6.3.1.3(a) and an access hole and plug.
A.6.3.1.3(b). 12.4 Assure that rough opening or opening
12.1.2 Applicable Building Codes and indi- between walls is plumb, square, and properly
vidual manufacturers’ product listings shall be sized to fit overall frame dimensions and expan-
consulted when these butted frames are used sion capability of intumescent caulk or sealant.
in fire rated walls. (See SDI 127F for further information).
12.1.3 This installation process DOES NOT 12.5 Using a “stud finder” or similar tool, as-
apply to Slip-on Drywall frames in Section 11.
sure that studs will align with frame mounting
12.1.4 Listed fill, void or cavity material shall screws.
be used at the junction of frame faces and
returns with the drywall surface. The bead 12.6 Slide frame into wall opening; install
of fill, void or cavity material shall be no wider wood spreaders at the floor and mid-height
than ½˝ (12.7 mm). of opening.

Intumescent caulk
both sides

25 Gauge
steel stud
Access hole and
snap-in plug

Fire rated
wallboard ¼" x 2" Sheet metal screws
(hex head), 6" max. from
ends and 24" O.C. max.
(provided by installer)

2" Wide x 12 ga. strap. length

equals jamb width minus ¼",
weld to returns

Figure 32 – Hole plug mount

12
 ANSI A250.11-2012

12.7 Use tapered shims between anchors for frame alignment periodically. (Frame profiles
and wall and spreaders to maintain squareness shown are for general details only. Anchors and
and alignment of frame and to maintain door profiles may vary).
opening. Make sure that shims will not inter-
rupt the sealant. 12.9 Insert plugs to cover access holes if so
equipped.
12.8 Insert ¼˝ (6.4 mm) sheet metal screws
of suitable length to engage studs through 12.10 Install Listed intumescent caulk or seal-
countersink or access hole in frame (see Figure ant around perimeter of frame, making sure to
32 and Figure 33) and tighten securely. Check cover any gaps caused by irregularities in walls.

Fire rated
wallboard, Intumescent caulk,
both sides both sides

¾" Dia. conduit

spacer

Jamb punched and

25 Gauge dimpled for screws.
steel studs ¼" S.M.S., 6" max.
from ends, 24" O.C.
max. (Provided by
installer)

2" Wide x 12 ga. strap. length

equals jamb width minus ¼",
weld to returns

Figure 33 – Countersink mount

13
ANSI A250.11-2012

Annex A
(informative)

Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames

I ntroduction
A1   ASTM A653-10 Standard Specification for Steel
Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galva­n ized) or Zinc-Iron
It is the intent of this publication to inform us-
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip
ers of standard steel doors and frames with
Process
definitive information regarding manufacturing
tolerances. It is also intended to inform the ASTM A924-10 Standard Specification for
installation contractor(s) of the tolerances to General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-
be considered to assure proper operation of Coated by the Hot-Dip Process
the complete opening. It is intended for in-plant
NFPA 80-2010 Standard for Fire Doors and
inspections. It may be used for on-site inspec-
Other Opening Protectives, 2007 Edition (Na-
tions where there is no evidence of damage to
tional Fire Protection Association, 1 Battery-
material or improper installation.
march Park, Quincy, MA 02269; www.nfpa.org)
The information contained herein pertains to
SDI 122-07 Installation and Troubleshooting
doors and frames manufactured in accordance
Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames
with ANSI A250.8, Recommended Specifica-
tions for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. It
A3  
M aterials and Finishes
is not intended to have reference to special or
unusual door and frame conditions. A3.1 
S teel Thickness:
Manufacturers no longer order sheet and coil
A2  
Reference Documents: to a specific gage, but rather to a minimum
ANSI/SDI A250.8-2003 (R2008) SDI 100 Rec- decimal thickness. This thickness is the lowest
ommended Specifications for Standard Steel of the range for a specific gage. The steel sup-
Doors & Frames plier is therefore permitted to exceed, but not
be less than the specified decimal thickness.
ANSI/SDI A250.6-2003 (R2009) Recommended
These minimum values meet the stringent re-
Practice for Hardware Reinforcings on Standard
quirements of both Underwriters Laboratories
Steel Doors and Frames
Inc. and ITS/Warnock Hersey. Examples of
ANSI/SDI A250.7-1997 (R2002) Nomenclature minimum allowable steel thickness:
for Standard Steel Doors & Steel Frames
ANSI/SDI A250.3-2007 Test Procedure & Ac-
ceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish Gage (MSG) Minimum
Coatings for Steel Doors & Frames 20 0.032˝
ANSI/SDI A250.10-1998 (R2004) Test Proce- 18 0.042˝
dure & Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted 16 0.053˝
Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors & Frames
14 0.067˝
ANSI/BHMA A156.115-2006 Hardware Prepara- 12 0.093˝
tion in Steel Doors and Steel Frames
10 0.123˝
ANSI/BHMA A156.115-W-2006 Hardware 7 0.167˝
Preparation in Wood Doors with Wood or Steel
Gage (MSG) are for reference purposes only.
Frames
ASTM A568-09 Standard Specification for Steel,
Sheet, Carbon, Structural, and High-Strength,
Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General
Requirements for

14
 ANSI A250.11-2012

A3.2 Steel Coatings A4.2 Frame Opening & Vertical Locations

Thickness of metallic coatings (generally zinc)
are defined by ASTM A924, Standard Specifica-
tion for General Requirements for Steel Sheet,
Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and ±⅓2˝
A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, L Hinge
C
Zinc-Coated (Galva nized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-
Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
The two most commonly used are designations ±⅙4˝
Opening
A40 and A60. Minimum requirements for these Height
designations are: +1⁄16˝ –⅓2˝
±⅙4˝
A40= 0.40 oz/ft 2 total both sides. CL
Strike
A60= 0.60 oz/ft 2 total both sides.
For reference, 1 oz/ft 2 = 1.7 mils thickness.
±⅓2˝
A3.3 Factory Applied Coatings:
Since factory applied coatings (primer, finish
paint, etc.) are subject to performance stan-
dards rather than thickness, the dry film thick-
ness is irrelevant. Such coatings must comply Opening Width
with performance criteria of: +1⁄16˝ –⅓2˝

ANSI/SDI A250.3 – Test Procedure and Ac-

ceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finished Figure B – Opening Tolerances
Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and A4.3 Bow or Twist of Jambs or Header
Frames
Realizing that frames are somewhat “pliable”,
OR and require bracing and alignment during instal-
ANSI/SDI A250.10 – Test Procedure and Accep- lation, allowable deformation (bow, twist, etc.) of
tance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces jambs or header of frame prior to installation
for Steel Doors and Frames. shall not result in a reduction of opening sizes
more than 1⁄16˝ beyond those shown in Figure
A4 Frame Tolerances B when measured at any point.

A4.1 Frame Cross Section Profile A4.4 Horizontal Alignment of Door Within
Rabbet
Permissible tolerances in frame profile surfaces
are as shown in Figure A. Hinge and strike backsets shall allow the hori-
zontal centerline of the door to be in line with
the horizontal centerline of the frame rabbet ±
⅓2˝ prior to installation. Figure C is an example
Face based on a 1 ¾˝ door in a 1 15⁄16˝ rabbet.
±⅓2˝
Stop
±⅓2˝

Rabbet
±⅓2˝

Throat 1˝ or 3⅓2˝ ± ⅓2˝

Frame Opening
Depth ±3⁄32˝
±1⁄16˝
Centerline of door

1 ¾˝ door

Figure A – Profile Tolerances

Figure C – Horizontal Alignment

15
ANSI A250.11-2012

4.5 Frames With Lights or Panels A5.2 Door Squareness

Opening sizes (width or height) for side or When measured diagonally (see Figure F) from
transom lights or panels and for borrowed light corner to corner along the same face, the mea-
frames shall be subject to a tolerance of ± 1⁄16˝ surements shall be within 1⁄16˝ of each other.
for each individual light or panel. These toler-
ances shall be non-accumulative so that the
overall frame opening sizes are not increased
by more than ⅛˝ (see Figure D).

± ⅛˝
± 1⁄16˝ ± 1⁄16˝ ± 1⁄16˝

± 1⁄16˝
Figure F – Squareness
± ⅛˝ A5.3 Door Perimeter Flatness
When a suitable straightedge is laid against the
door face at or within ¼˝ of the top, bottom,
± 1⁄16˝ hinge edge, and lock edge on both faces any
deviation between the face and the straightedge
shall not allow a 0.0625˝ rod or block to pass
(see Figure G). Note: The straightedge shall be
allowed to “rest” naturally on the door surface,
not pulled down at one end to meet the door.
Figure D – Frames with Lights or Panels

A5 Door Tolerances
A5.1 Door Size, Thickness, and Vertical
Locations (see Figure E)
Straightedge

Door Width
±3⁄64˝
Door 1⁄16˝ max
Thickness
±⅓2˝ ±1⁄16˝
CLHinge
1⁄16˝ max
±⅙4˝
Door
Height
±3⁄64˝
CLLock Straightedge
±⅙4˝

Lock Figure G – Flatness

Height
±⅓2˝ A5.4 Door Face Bow or Crown
When a suitable straightedge is laid diagonally
against the door face at least ½˝ from corners
Figure E – Doors any deviation between the face and the straight-
edge shall not allow a 0.125˝ rod or block to
pass (see Figure H). Note: The straightedge

16
 ANSI A250.11-2012

shall be allowed to “rest” naturally on the door inserted between the fixture and the door face
surface, not pulled down at one end to meet at all four corners of the door. Any deviation
the door. between the face and the support blocks shall
not allow a 0.0625˝ rod or block to pass (see
Figure I). Note: The door shall be allowed to
“rest” naturally on the support blocks, not pulled
down at any corner to meet the blocks.
A5.6 Doors With Lights or Panels
Opening sizes (width or height) for lights or
panels cut into doors shall be subject to a toler-
ance of ± 1⁄16˝ for each individual light or panel.

A6 Hardware Preparations
A6.1 Vertical Locations
Straightedge
Tolerances for vertical locations are as noted
in Paragraphs A4.2 and A5.1.
⅛˝ max A6.2 Horizontal Alignment
Tolerances for horizontal alignment of door and
rabbet are as noted in Paragraphs 4.4.
Door
A6.3 Mortise Depth
Figure H – Door face bow or crown The depth of hardware items mortised into
edges of doors (such as hinges, strikes, lock
A5.5 Door Twist
fronts, flushbolts) shall be as defined on manu-
The door is laid onto a suitable, flat fixture or facturer’s templates and/or ANSI A156.115
surface that is free of any warp, bow, or twist. documents subject to an additional tolerance
Support blocks of identical heights shall be of ± ⅙4˝

Flat
Surface
Door Surface

1⁄16˝ max.

Figure I – Door Twist

17
ANSI A250.11-2012

A6.3.1 Cutout Depth at Frame or Door Shims are usually thin strips of ¼˝ wide mate-
Faces rial approximately equal to the hinge height.
In order to allow for field adjustment, usually A7.1.1 Figure J shows how to relocate the
accomplished by shimming, hardware cutouts pivot point toward the jamb.
(such as hinges) that extend from door edges
A7.1.2 Figure K shows how to relocate the pivot
around to faces or from frame rabbet around to
point away from the jamb.
faces are allowed to exceed mortise depth by
1⁄16˝. See Paragraph A7 for examples of com- A7.2 Frame Installation Tolerances
mon hinge shimming procedures.
While this document is mainly concerned
A6.3.2 Depth For Recessed or Concealed with tolerances relating to the manufacturing
Hardware process, openings will not function properly
if the frame is not installed within recognized
The depth for hardware items recessed into
tolerances.
top or bottom of doors or edges of doors (such
as pocket pivots, floor closers, top pivots, Figures L, M, N, and O show examples of the
concealed closers or holders, etc) shall be as accuracy to be maintained while setting frames.
defined on manufacturer’s templates subject to
A7.3 Troubleshooting
an additional tolerance of +1⁄16˝, –0˝. Notches
in door faces shall have similar tolerances. Further information regarding corrective actions
for of door & frame openings may be found in
A7 Frame Installation And Door Ad- SDI-122.
justments
A7.1 Adjusting Pivot Point by Shimming
Providing extra depth along door or frame
faces allows for hinge knuckles to be offset,
thus changing the pivot point of the opening.

C
L Hinge CL Hinge
Barrel Hinge
Barrel Hinge Shim B
Jamb
Jamb Hinge Shim D Hinge
Reinf. Reinf.

Door Door Shim C

Shim A
“X”
“Y”

• Using shim A only, door will be relocated • Using shim C only, door will be relocated in
in the direction of arrow “X”. direction of Arrow “Y”.
• Using shim B only, will move both door • Using D only, both door and centerline of hinge
and centerline of hinge barrel in direction barrel will move in the direction of Arrow “Y”.
of Arrow “X”.
• Using both shims C and D will relocate the door
• Using both shims A and B will relocate the in direction of Arrow “Y” by a greater amount
door in direction of Arrow “X” by a greater than by using either C or D alone. The centerline
amount than by using shim “B” alone. of hinge barrel will be relocated the same as by
using shim D alone.

Figure J – Hinge Bind Figure K – Hinge Bind

18
 ANSI A250.11-2012

1⁄16˝ (1.58 mm)

Strike
Hinge Jamb
Jamb
1⁄16˝ (1.58 mm)

1⁄16˝ (1.58 mm)

Strike
Hinge Jamb
Jamb

Maximum 1⁄16˝ allowable tolerance on total opening.

Figure N – Alignment

Figure L – Squareness

Head Level Head Level

1⁄16˝
(1.58 mm)

Hinge or Hinge or
Strike Jamb Strike Jamb

1⁄16˝ (1.58 mm)

Bottom Bottom
1⁄16˝
(1.58 mm)
Figure O – Twist
Figure M – Plumbness

19
ANSI A250.11-2012

Annex B
(informative)

Installation Exceptions

The installation instructions contained in ANSI A250.11 are intended to apply to most typical frame
installations. There are, however, certain types of frames for which additional wood spreaders are
recommended during the frame installation to ultimately assure the proper door operation.
Three-sided frames with face dimensions of 1-½˝ or less of any opening size, frames for doors
that weigh over 9 lbs. per square foot and/or frames of heights greater than 8'-0˝ are more prone
to variations in installed tolerances. Under most conditions, frames such as these require more
support during the installation process.
For installations such as these, the SDI recommends the use of wood spreaders at the bottom
of frames AND at 36˝ intervals between the top and bottom as indicated in the illustration below.

90° 90°

Wood
36" spreader
between
jambs

36" Wood
spreader
between
jambs

20
 MEMBERS OF THE
AVAILABLE PUBLICATIONS STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

Specifications CECO DOOR PRODUCTS

9159 Telecom Drive
ANSI/SDI A250.6 Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcings on Standard Milan, TN 38358
Steel Doors and Frames (731) 686-8345
www.cecodoor.com
ANSI/SDI A250.8 SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors &
Frames CURRIES COMPANY
SDI-108 Recommended Selection & Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors P.O. Box 1648
Mason City, IA 50402-1648
SDI-118 Basic Fire Door, Fire Door Frame, Transom/Sidelight Frame, and (641) 423-1334
Window Frame Requirements www.curries.com
SDI-128 Guidelines for Acoustical Performance of Standard Steel Doors &
Frames DEANSTEEL MANUFACTURING CO.
111 Merchant Street
SDI-129 Hinge & Strike Spacing San Antonio, TX 78204-1496
(210) 226-8271
Test Procedures www.deansteel.com
ANSI/SDI A250.3 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish
DOOR COMPONENTS INC.
Coatings for Steel Doors & Frames
7980 Redwood Avenue
ANSI/SDI A250.4 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Fontana, CA 92336-1638
Steel Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors (909) 770-5700
www.doorcomponents.com
ANSI/SDI A250.10 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel
Surfaces for Steel Doors & Frames MESKER DOOR, INC.
ANSI/SDI A250.13 Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components 3440 Stanwood Boulevard
for Swinging Door Assemblies Huntsville, AL 35811-9021
(256) 851-6670
SDI-113 Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal www.meskerdoor.com
Transmittance of Steel Door & Frame Assemblies
SDI-131 Accelerated Physical Endurance Test Procedure for Steel Doors, METAL PRODUCTS, INC.
319 North Hills Road
Frames and Frame Anchors
Corbin, KY 40701
(606) 523-0173
Construction Details
www.metalproductsinc.com
ANSI/SDI A250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames
PIONEER INDUSTRIES, INC.
SDI-110 Standard Steel Doors & Frames for Modular Masonry Construction 171 South Newman Street
SDI-111 Recommended Details for Standard Details Steel Doors, Frames, Hackensack, NJ 07601
Accessories and Related Components (201) 933-1900
www.pioneerindustries.com
SDI-122 Installation & Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors &
Frames REPUBLIC
SDI-132 Drywall Slip-On Frames 155 Republic Drive
McKenzie, TN 38201-0580
Miscellaneous Documents (731) 352-3383
www.republicdoor.com
ANSI/SDI A250.7 Nomenclature for Standard Steel Doors & Steel Frames
SDI-112 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors & SECURITY METAL PRODUCTS CORP.
Frames 5700 Hannum Avenue, Suite 250
Culver City, CA 90230
SDI-117 Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors & Frames (310) 641-6690
www.secmet.com
SDI-124 Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors & Frames
SDI-127 Industry Alert Series (A-L) STEELCRAFT
SDI-130 Electrified Hinge Preparations Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies
9017 Blue Ash Road
SDI What is The SDI? Cincinnati, OH 45242
(513) 745-6400
AUDIO-VISUAL PROGRAMS ON VHS ALSO AVAILABLE www.steelcraft.com

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
440.899.0010 • FAX 440.892.1404
4/5/2012 www.steeldoor.org
 ANSI A250.13-2008
Revision of ANSI A250.13-2003

Testing and Rating of —

Severe Windstorm Resistant Components
for Swinging Door Assemblies
ANSI A250.13-2008

SPONSORS
Steel Door Institute and
Builders Hardware Manufacturers’ Association
Approved May 30, 2008
 ANSI ®
B212.7-2007
Revision ANSI B212.7-1993

American National Standard

Testing and Rating of —

Severe Windstorm Resistant Components

for Swinging Door Assemblies

Secretariat
Steel Door Institute

Approved May 30, 2008

American National Standards Institute, Inc.
American Approval of an American National Standard requires verification by ANSl
that the requirements for due process, consensus, and other criteria for
National approval have been met by the standards developer.

Standard Consensus is established when, in the judgement of the ANSl Board of

Standards Review, substantial agreement has been reached by directly
and materially affected interests. Substantial agreement means much more
than a simple majority, but not necessarily unanimity. Consensus requires
that all views and objections be considered, and that a concerted effort
be made toward their resolution.
The use of American National Standards is completely voluntary; their exis-
tence does not in any respect preclude anyone, whether they have approved
the standards or not, from manufacturing, marketing, purchasing, or using
products, processes, or procedures not conforming to the standards.
The American National Standards Institute does not develop standards and
will in no circumstances give any interpretation of any American National
Standard. Moreover, no person shall have the right or authority to issue
an interpretation of an American National Standard in the name of the
American National Standards Institute. Requests for interpretations should
be addressed to the secretariat or sponsor whose name appears on the
title page of this standard.
CAUTION NOTICE: This American National Standard may be revised or
withdrawn at any time. The procedures of the American National Stan-
dards Institute require that action be taken periodically to reaffirm, revise,
or withdraw this standard. Purchasers of American National Standards
may receive current information on all standards by calling or writing the
American National Standards Institute.

Published by

Steel Door Institute

30200 Detroit Road, Cleveland, Ohio 44145-1967

Copyright © 2008 by Steel Door Institute

All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced in any

form, in an electronic retrieval system or otherwise,
without prior written permission of the publisher.

Printed in the United States of America

ANSI A250.13-2008
Contents
Page
Foreword . ......................................................................................... ii
1 Scope............................................................................................1
2 Definitions.. ....................................................................................1
3 General..........................................................................................2
4 Overview........................................................................................3
5 Door Frames..................................................................................3
6 Hinges...........................................................................................7
7 Latching Hardware.........................................................................8
8 Doors...........................................................................................11
9 Door Lite Kits.. .............................................................................13
10 Sidelights and/or Transoms.......................................................... 13
11 Miscellaneous Components.. ........................................................ 14
12 Selection Criteria.........................................................................15

Figures
1 Wall Substrates for Frame Tests.. ...................................................4
2 Door Reinforcement for Frame Tests..............................................5
3 Pendulum Impactor........................................................................6
4 Impact Locations for Frame Tests..................................................6
5 Hinge Structural Load Test Fixture.................................................7
6 Lockset Test Fixture.......................................................................9
7 Impact Locations for Multi-Point Latch Test................................. 10
8 Impact Locations for Center Mullion Test..................................... 14

Tables
1 Stiffness Classification................................................................. 11
2 Example Door Rating Data........................................................... 12

i
Foreword (This Foreword is not part of American National Standard A250.13-2008)
The material contained in this document has been developed under the
auspices of the Technical Committee of the Steel Door Institute.
Suggestions for improvement gained in the use of this standard will be
welcome and should be sent to the Steel Door Institute, 30200 Detroit
Road, Cleveland, Ohio, 44145-1967.
The organizations that have approved this standard are as follows:
American Institute of Architects
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association
Cedar Valley Associates
Door and Hardware Institute
FM Approvals
HMMA/Division of NAAMM
Intertek Testing Services
Manufactured Housing Institute
National Association of Home Builders
Steel Door Institute
Therma-Tru
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
Vetrotech Saint-Gobain
WDMA
The Technical Committee of the Steel Door Institute, which has developed
this Standard had the following personnel at the time of approval:

Allan Ashachik, Chairman

Dave Dedic, 1 st Vice Chairman
Dan Buffenbarger, 2 nd Vice Chairman
Organization Represented Name of Representative
Amweld Building Products Inc.................................................... Allan Ashachik
Ceco Door Products.................................................................... Tom Janicak
Curries Company........................................................................ Dave Dedic
Deansteel Manufacturing Company............................................ Claus Heide
Mesker Door Company............................................................... Mike Torres
Pioneer Industries........................................................................ Kamal Sheikh
Republic...................................................................................... Jason Lisewski
Security Metal Products Corporation.......................................... Dan Buffenbarger
Steelcraft..................................................................................... Kurt Roeper
Steel Door Institute...................................................................... J. Jeffery Wherry

ii
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD ANSI A250.13-2008

American National Standard

Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm

Resistant Components for Swinging Door Assemblies

1 Scope prevent all forms of damage associated with hur-

ricanes and other severe windstorms. It is also as-
1.1 This standard provides procedures for testing
sumed that these assemblies themselves might be
and establishing load ratings (design pressure in
damaged in a severe windstorm to an extent that
pounds per square foot or design load in pounds
would require repair or replacement after such an
force) for components of exterior swinging door
event.
assemblies for purposes of protection of open-
ings during severe windstorm conditions, such as
2 Definitions
a hurricane, that produces sustained wind speeds
or gusts in a range of 110 to 170 miles per hour as Severe Windstorm: A weather event such as a
defined by ASCE 7. It is not intended to simulate hurricane that produces sustained wind speeds or
wind forces generated by tornadoes. gusts in a range of 110 to 170 miles per hour.
1.2 The procedures cover all components nor- Operable: Capable of being opened by the ap-
mally assembled to form an exterior swinging door plication of ordinary levels of applied force to the
system. This includes door frames, hardware mul- latch operator and door assembly.
lions, thresholds, frame anchorage, hinges, lock-
Note: Door assemblies that have been subjected
sets, latches and bolts, doors, sidelights, transoms to the severe conditions of the tests involved in this
and glazing systems. This procedure applies to method are not expected to be undamaged and
both single swing and pair assemblies and also thus will normally not operate with the low force lev-
includes procedures for testing and rating com- els generally required for undamaged assemblies.
The goal is to provide an assembly that will remain
ponents for both in-swing and out-swing installa- closed during the windstorm, but not be damaged
tions. to the extent that it requires the use of tools to be
opened after the event.
1.3 The evaluations required by this standard are
based on the performance tests specified in ASTM Stiffness Classification: A measure of a door’s
E1886, ASTM E1996 and ASTM E330. overall resistance to bending as determined by
a twist test under a prescribed loading condition.
1.4 Evaluations under this procedure are designed Stiffness classifications allow for the evaluation of
to determine the ability of exterior doors to remain exit hardware / door interactions where either the
closed under conditions present in severe wind- bending of the door may tend to cause disengage-
storms, including high, fluctuating wind speeds ment of the latch, or where applied hardware may
and the presence of wind-born debris. Assemblies be capable of reinforcing the door to reduce bend-
meeting these requirements are less likely to open ing under load.
during a storm, preventing potentially large pres-
sure differentials which may cause or contribute to Component: Any of several manufactured items,
major structural damage. This procedure does not classified / listed and labeled, used in the construc-
consider it necessary for the door assembly to be tion and installation of a swinging door assembly.
capable of preventing water intrusion as a result of Components include door frames, doors, hard-
severe windstorm exposure conditions. ware, glazing systems and similar products nor-
mally supplied separately to a job-site where they
It is recognized that products and assemblies are assembled and / or installed to form a complete
meeting these requirements will not necessarily assembly.

1
ANSI A250.13-2008

Design Load: The specified point force applied is the requirement. The primary units are inch-
to a product. Units of measure are pounds force pound. Appendix A contains a table of the Imperial
(lbf). values used in this standard and corresponding SI
Design Pressure: The specified force applied to values.
a specified unit area of product surface. Units of 3.1.2 Unless specifically indicated otherwise, toler-
measure are pounds-force per square foot (psf). ances shall be in accordance with Appendix A.
Impact Energy: The specified dynamic load
3.1.3 Where load ratings are to be applied in units
applied to a product. Units of measure are foot-
of pounds per square foot (psf), these values shall
pounds (ft-lbf).
be expressed in 5-pound-per-square-foot incre-
In-Swing Door: A door with the push side on ments. For components that are rated in terms
the exterior or that swings into the building when of pounds force, values shall be expressed in
opened. Negative pressure acts to close this door 10-pound increments. All rated values shall be
and positive pressure acts to open this door. determined by rounding down from values derived
Out-Swing Door: A door with the pull side on the from tests.
exterior or that swings away from the building when
opened. Negative pressure acts to open this door 3.2 Referenced Standards
and positive pressure acts to close this door. 3.2.1 ANSI/ASCE 7-02, Minimum Design Loads
Labeled: Equipment or materials to which has for Buildings and Other Structures
been attached a label, symbol, or other identifying 3.2.2 ANSI/SDI A250.4-2001, Test Procedure and
mark of an organization that is acceptable to the Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for
Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) and concerned
Steel Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors and Hard-
with product evaluation, that maintains periodic in-
ware Reinforcings
spections of production of labeled equipment or
materials, and by whose labeling the manufacturer 3.2.3 ASTM E330-2002, Standard Test Method
indicates compliance with appropriate standards for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
or performance in a specified manner. Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform
Classified: Products or materials of a specific Static Air Pressure Difference
group category that are constructed, inspected, 3.2.4 ASTM E1886-2005, Standard Test Method
tested and subsequently reinspected in accor-
for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain
dance with an established set of requirements.
Walls, Doors, and Storm Shutters Impacted by
The classification process is performed by an or-
ganization acceptable to the authority having ju- Missile(s) and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differ-
risdiction. entials

Listed: Equipment materials or services included 3.2.5 ASTM E1996-2005, Standard Specifica-
in a list published by an organization that is accept- tion for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain
able to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) and Walls, Doors and Storm Shutters Impacted by
concerned with evaluation of products or services, Windborne Debris in Hurricanes
that maintains periodic evaluation of services and
3.2.6 ASTM F476-84 (2002) Standard Test Meth-
whose listing states that either the equipment, ma-
terial, or service meets identified standards or has ods for Security of Swinging Door Assemblies
been tested and found suitable for a specified pur- 3.2.7 ANSI/BHMA A156.1-2000, Butts and Hing-
pose. es

3 General 3.2.8 ANSI/BHMA A156.16-2002, Auxiliary Hard-

ware
3.1 Units of Measurement
3.3 Undated References
3.1.1 When a value for measurement is followed by
a value in other units in parentheses, the second 3.3.1 References to standards listed above shall
value is only approximate. The first stated value be to the edition indicated.

2
 ANSI A250.13-2008

4 Overview Section 7.2 – Single Point Rim or Mortise Exit De-

vices
4.1 The procedures in this document are de-
signed to evaluate each critical component used Section 7.3 – Multi-point Latches (including flush
in a swinging door assembly for the component’s and surface bolts)
ability to perform its intended function. The evalu-
Section 8 – Doors
ation is conducted under the conditions of stress
and loading the component would be subjected to Section 9 – Door Lite Kits
in the testing of a complete assembly under the
Section 10 – Sidelight and transom frames
assembly test methods commonly specified for
severe windstorm resistance. Section 11 – Miscellaneous Components
4.2 The tests and evaluations required by this pro- Section 11.1 – Hardware Mullions
cedure include both the application of engineering
Section 11.2 – Thresholds
safety factors and worst-case analysis to ensure
that component substitutions in field assemblies
5 Door Frames
will perform to the minimum levels expected.
5.1 Frames are to be evaluated in the largest door
4.3 Components evaluated by this method are
opening sizes, minimum jamb depth and minimum
classified into various strength categories that can
frame material thickness for which a design rat-
be used to determine assembly ratings. A single
ing is to be determined. Frames intended for use
component may have multiple ratings depending
in both single swing and pair assemblies shall be
on various parameters such as size, number and
tested in both configurations. Frames are to be
location of anchors or fasteners, type of surround-
installed following the manufacturer’s written in-
ing construction and other factors. Proper appli-
structions which are to include:
cation of these ratings allows for the determina-
tion of an assembly’s design pressure rating and a) Wall substrate – wood/steel stud, con-
minimum impact energy resistance. These ratings crete, masonry, structural steel.
are intended to be used to determine compliance
b) Anchors – number, size, type and spac-
with code requirements developed for complete
ing of anchors, anchor or bolt embedment,
assemblies.
and number and type of fasteners required
4.3.1 Doors are rated for design pressure in at each anchor location.
pounds per square foot (psf), impact energy in
c) Reinforcements – location and attach-
foot-pounds (ft-lbf) and stiffness classification.
ment.
Stiffness is required in determining the interaction
between the door bending under load, transmis- d) Gasketing – location, type and attach-
sion of impact energy to latching hardware and ment.
frames, and latching engagement. Stiffness class
e) Hinges – number, type, size and loca-
is intended only to establish use of exit hardware
tions.
on doors.
f) Latching Hardware – type and location.
4.4 Proper application of this standard requires a
basic level of understanding of physics, mechan- 5.2 Test Procedure
ics and materials science.
5.2.1 Static Pressure Test
4.5 This procedure provides specific tests and rat-
ing methods for the following components: 5.2.1.1 The frame shall be installed into a test unit
constructed to simulate the wall design specified
Section 5 – Door Frames by the frame manufacturer. The frame installation
Section 6 – Hinges shall be in accordance with the frame manufac-
turer’s written instructions (refer to figure 1 for typi-
Section 7 – Latching Hardware cal details). For wall designs that differ significantly
Section 7.1 – Locksets (Bored, Mortise, Dead- from those shown, the test installation shall simu-
bolts) late actual intended wall design and anchorage.

3
ANSI A250.13-2008

Figure 1 – Wall Substrates for Frame Tests

A flush door rated for not less than the desired conditions and the resulting rating shall specify the
frame design pressure shall be mounted with the latching requirements.
number of hinges specified by the frame manu-
5.2.1.2.1 The flush door used shall be reinforced
facturer. For single-swing frames, a single-point
along the latch or meeting edge by bolting a
simulated latch and a stainless steel strike shall be
1-1/4 inch by 1-1/4 inch by 3/16 inch structural steel
installed between 38" and 42" above the bottom
angle to both faces of the door with 1/4-20 bolts at
of the frame (see figure 2.) The door and latch-
16 (±) 1 inches on center and within 6 (±1) inches
ing hardware shall be of sufficient strength so that
of the corners. The angle shall be placed such
they do not fail at the required test load. Door (s)
that the free leg of the angle is oriented toward the
shall be installed in the direction of swing for the
edge of the door and is located at 3 inches from
desired listing.
the door latch edge (see figure 2).
5.2.1.2 For pair frames, two flush doors rated
5.2.1.3 The frame and door assembly shall be in-
for not less than the desired frame design pres-
stalled in a static pressure test chamber per the
sure shall be installed with a simulated latching
requirements of ASTM E330.
arrangement with a top and bottom bolt on the
inactive door and a single point latch on the ac- 5.2.1.4 The assembly shall be subjected to a static
tive door latching into the inactive door. The doors pressure equal to 1.5 times the design pressure
used are to be reinforced as described in 5.2.1.2.1 rating specified by the frame manufacturer under
and latched as shown in figure 2. both positive and negative pressure. Each pres-
sure cycle shall be applied for a minimum of 30
If the manufacturer specifies other latch/lock lo-
seconds, then released and reduced to zero.
cations, tests shall be conducted under specified

4
 ANSI A250.13-2008

5.2.1.5 At the conclusion of this test, the frame E1996 using a 9 pound 2 x 4 missile impacting
shall not prevent the door (s) from operating after end-on at a velocity of 50 feet per second.
the simulated latch bolt (s) has been retracted and
5.2.2.2 Impacts are to be delivered to the exterior
a 15 pound force is applied at the mid-height of the
side of the door (s) per ASTM E1886. Impact loca-
door, horizontally 1 inch from the lock edge. The
tions as described below and as shown in figure
frame shall remain in the opening.
4).
5.2.2 Impact Test
5.2.2.2.1 Single Frames
5.2.2.1 Upon completion of the static pressure
Five impacts in accordance with Figure 4.
test an identical assembly shall be subjected to
impacts with an impact energy of 350 foot-pounds. 5.2.2.2.2 Pair Frames
The impact energy shall be delivered by one of the
following two methods: Six impacts in accordance with Figure 4.

Method 1 – Deliver impact energy by a 100-pound 5.2.3 At the conclusion of this test, the frame shall
total weight pendulum impactor fitted with a num- not prevent the door (s) from operating after the
ber 2 or better, 12-inch-long Douglas Fir or South- simulated latch bolt (s) has been retracted and a
ern Yellow Pine, nominal 2 by 4 striking face. The 15-pound force is applied at the mid-height of the
pendulum is to be suspended in a manner that as- door, 1 inch horizontally from the lock edge. The
sures a direct normal impact to the door assembly. frame shall remain in the opening.
Refer to ASTM F476 for details of a comparable 5.3 Cycle Test
pendulum impact device (see figure 3)
5.3.1 Upon completion of the impact tests speci-
Method 2 – Deliver the impact energy in accor- fied in 5.2, the same assembly shall be subjected
dance with the impact method defined in ASTM

Figure 2 – Door Reinforcement for Frame Tests

5
ANSI A250.13-2008

Figure 3 – Pendulum Impactor

Figure 4 – Impact Locations for Frame Tests

6
 ANSI A250.13-2008

to the pressure cycling test specified in ASTM 6.1.1 Impact Test

E1886.
6.1.1.1 Hinges shall be mounted for testing in the
5.3.2 At the conclusion of this test, the frame shall test fixture shown in figure 5. Hinges are to be
not prevent the door (s) from operating after the mounted to the simulated frame and door sections
simulated latch bolt (s) has been retracted and a using screws provided by the hinge manufacturer.
15-pound force is applied at the mid-height of the
6.1.1.2 One 125 foot-pound impact shall be de-
door, 1-inch horizontally from the lock edge. The
livered to the simulated door section at a point 6
frame shall remain in the opening.
inches from the hinge centerline using the pendu-
5.4 Frame Ratings lum impactor specified in figure 3. Shearing of any
fastener or deformation of the hinge which renders
5.4.1 Frames that meet the criteria specified in
the hinge inoperable shall constitute a failure. The
this section shall be rated for the design pressure
simulated door section shall be tested as an in-
attained in the evaluation and for impact energy
swinging door.
resistance. Ratings shall be specific to positive
and negative design pressure configuration (sin- NOTE: Impact energy specified delivers approxi-
gle/pair, in-swing/out-swing) and shall apply to all mately twice the energy to the hinge as occurs in
a typical door assembly test using a 9 pound 2 x 4
overall frame sizes (not to exceed either height or missile at 50 feet-per-second.
width of frame tested) equal to or smaller than the
frame tested. 6.1.1.2.1 Exception
Hinges listed only for use in out-swing door as-
6 Hinges semblies do not require an impact test.
6.1 Leaf Hinges 6.1.2 Structural Load Test
Three representative specimens shall be tested. 6.1.2.1 The test assembly described in 6.1.1.1
Ratings shall be based on the lowest load suc- shall be mounted in a testing machine and loaded
cessfully sustained by all three specimens. at a rate of 0.05 inches per minute until failure. The

Simulated Frame

9" x 1-1/4" x 3/16"

Steel Hinge Apply load through
Reinforcements 1/4" x 3" wide steel
bearing plate, placed
on, not welded to door,
and 3/4" roller

1/4" Thick
Structural Steel

Hinge Under Test

Figure 5 – Hinge Structural Load Test Fixture

7
ANSI A250.13-2008

load shall be applied through a 3/4-inch diameter 6.2.4 Cycle Test

roller and 1/4-inch thick by 3-inch wide steel plate in
6.2.4.1 Upon completion of the impact tests, the
a manner that places the attachments in shear on
same assembly shall be cycled per ASTM E1886.
the push side of the simulated door section. The
load at failure shall be recorded. 6.2.5 Throughout the tests described in section
6.2 the door shall remain secured in the frame and
6.1.3 Rating
shall be operable at the conclusion of the tests.
6.1.3.1 Hinges shall be rated for a design load
based on the lowest ultimate load value deter-
6.2.6 Rating
mined in 6.1.2.1, divided by a safety factor of 1.5. 6.2.6.1 Continuous hinges and pivots shall be rat-
ed for the impact energy resistance in foot-pounds
6.2 Continuous Hinges and Pivots
and design pressure in pounds per square foot
6.2.1 Continuous hinges and/or pivots shall be and maximum size, based on the tested assem-
tested in the maximum length with the minimum bly size for which they successfully complete the
number of fasteners supplied by the manufacturer. required testing.
Continuous hinges and/or pivots are to be tested
applied to a simulated door as described in section 7 Latching Hardware
5.2.1.1 and a frame assembly designed to with-
stand the loads required to evaluate the hinge and/ 7.1 Locksets
or pivots to the level required. A simulated frame 7.1.1 Impact Test
constructed from 4-inch to 6-inch wide structural
steel channel and with a solid steel stop 1-inch 7.1.1.1 Locksets shall be mounted in the test fix-
wide by 5/8-inch high is suitable for this purpose. ture described in figure 6. Mounting shall be in
Pivots and continuous hinges shall be tested us- accordance with the lock manufacturer’s instruc-
ing the maximum size of door for which a rating is tions. Locksets are to be in the locked mode for
desired. all tests.

6.2.2 Static Pressure Test 7.1.1.2 Strikes shall be mounted to the simulated
frame section using the screws provided by the
6.2.2.1 Apply a pressure equal to 1.5 times the lock manufacturer.
hinge manufacturer’s specified design pressure
per ASTM E330 in both positive and negative di- 7.1.1.3 One 125 foot-pound impact shall be deliv-
rections. Hold each load for a minimum of 30 sec- ered to the test fixture (push side) at a point 6 inch-
onds, then release. es from the simulated door edge using the pen-
dulum impactor specified in figure 3. If the lockset
6.2.3 Impact Test handle or other parts are in the indicated impact
area, the impact location shall be moved upward
6.2.3.1 Using either the same assembly used for
sufficiently to avoid hitting the parts.
the static pressure test or an identical assembly,
at the manufacturer’s option, conduct three impact NOTE: Impact energy specified delivers approxi-
tests using one of the impact test methods de- mately twice the energy to the latch as occurs in a
typical door assembly test using a 9 pound 2 x 4 mis-
scribed in 5.2.2.1 at the following locations against sile at 50 feet-per-second.
the push side of the door.
7.1.2 Structural Load Test
6.2.3.1.1 Impact 6 inches down from the top and
6 inches horizontally from the hinge edge of the 7.1.2.1 Upon completion of the impact test speci-
door. fied in section 7.1.1, the test fixture and the same
specimen (figure 6) shall be mounted in a testing
6.2.3.1.2 Impact the mid-height of the door 6 inch-
machine. A load shall then be applied equal to 1.5
es from the hinge edge.
times the manufacturers’ designated design load.
6.2.3.1.3 Impact 6 inches up from the door bottom The load shall be applied through a 3/4-inch roller
and 6 inches from the hinge edge. and 1/4-inch by 3-inch steel loading plate of suffi-
cient width to span the simulated door portion of

8
 ANSI A250.13-2008

Aluminum block
machined to fit
Reinforcement notched lockset.
so that latch bolt is
supported only by strike.

Apply load through

1/4" x 3" wide steel 1/4" thick structural
bearing plate, and steel tube
3/4" roller.

Figure 6 – Lockset Test Fixture

the test fixture. This load shall be held for 30 sec- 7.2.2.2 Upon completion of the impact tests the
onds and then released. door shall remain latched and the single point rim
or mortise exit device shall be operable.
7.1.2.2 Upon completion of the structural test the
lockset shall be operable. 7.2.3 Static Pressure Test
7.1.3 Lockset Rating 7.2.3.1 Upon completion of the impact tests speci-
fied in 7.2.2.1, the same assembly shall be mount-
7.1.3.1 The lockset rating shall be the design load
ed in a static pressure test chamber and tested per
and impact energy specified by the manufacturer
ASTM E330.
and verified by acceptable results in the impact
and structural load test described in this section. 7.2.3.1.1 Apply 1.5 times the manufacturer’s spec-
ified design pressure to the push side of the door.
7.2 Single Point Rim and Mortise Exit Hold for a minimum of 30 seconds and release.
Devices
7.2.3.1.2 Upon completion of the test the single
7.2.1 Single point rim and mortise exit devices point rim or mortise exit device shall be operable.
shall be mounted on a door of the stiffness clas-
sification and maximum size for which a rating is 7.2.4 Rating of Single Point Rim and
to be determined. Mounting shall be in accordance Mortise Exit Devices
with the device manufacturer’s instructions.
7.2.4.1 Single point rim or mortise exit devices
7.2.2 Impact Test shall be rated for the design pressure in pounds
per square foot, impact energy resistance in foot-
7.2.2.1 One 350 foot-pound impact shall be deliv- pounds, maximum pair or single door leaf size,
ered to the pull side of the door using one of the and door stiffness classification specified by the
impact test methods described in section 5.2.2.1. device manufacturer and verified by acceptable
If hardware location interferes with the specified results in the impact and structural load test de-
locations for impacts the impact shall be located scribed in this section.
as close to the specified location as possible in a
manner that avoids impact on the hardware.

9
ANSI A250.13-2008

7.3 Multi-Point Latches bottom and 6 inches from the meeting door edge.
The third impact is to be made at the center of the
7.3.1 Multi-point latches shall be mounted on the
door opposite and 5 inches below the push bar.
maximum size pair of the minimum stiffness class
If hardware location interferes with the specified
doors specified by the manufacturer for testing.
locations for impacts the impact shall be located
Note: Since many exterior doors are used as a re- as close to the specified location as possible in a
quired “means of egress”, building codes do not gen- manner that avoids impact on the hardware.
erally allow the use of additional manual bolts and
locks on these doors. That is, it must be possible, 7.3.2.2 When other hardware is being evaluated
under emergency conditions, for these doors to be simultaneously with bolts (surface or flush type) to
opened with a single manual operation. The use of
auxiliary latching devices as a means of increas- increase the overall rating, then a fourth impact is
ing the windstorm resistance rating of an assembly to be made at the centerline of the other hardware
should be verified for acceptability under prevailing and 6 inches from the meeting door edge.
building code requirements.
7.3.2.3 Upon completion of the impact tests the
7.3.2 Impact Test multi-point latch shall be operable.
7.3.2.1 The door containing the device under test 7.3.3 Static Pressure Test
(active leaf) shall be subjected to three 350 foot-
pound impacts using one of the impact test meth- 7.3.3.1 Upon completion of the impact test, the
ods described in Section 5.2.2.1 to the pull side same assembly shall be tested on the impact as-
of the door. One impact is to be made at the up- sembly or mounted in a test chamber and tested
per meeting edge of the door 6 inches below the per ASTM E330 under uniform static pressure.
top edge of the door and 6 inches from the meet- 7.3.3.2 Starting at the design pressure specified
ing edge. The second impact is to be made at the by the manufacturer, apply the pressure in 5 psf
lower meeting edge of the door 6 inches above the

Figure 7 – Impact Locations for Multi-Point Latch Test

10
 ANSI A250.13-2008

increments in both positive and negative direc- sample of the full flush panel (no hardware prepa-
tions until failure occurs. Each pressure increment rations) door construction under investigation.
shall be held for a minimum of 10 seconds in each
8.2.1.1 Mount the door panel in a rigid test frame
direction.
and clamp the bottom two corners and one top
7.3.3.3 After each pressure increment, remove corner securely to the frame.
the pressure and check the hardware for oper-
8.2.1.2 Apply a load of 300 lbf through a 2.5 inch
ability. One pressure increment consists of both a
diameter by 1/4-inch thick steel pad to a point cen-
positive and negative pressure.
tered 3 inches down and 3 inches horizontally from
7.3.3.4 Record mode of failure and pressure in- the free corner of the door per ANSI A250.4.
crement at failure.
8.2.1.3 Measure the door deflection at the free
7.3.4 Multi-Point Latch Rating corner, as described in ANSI A250.4, to the near-
est 0.01 inch.
7.3.4.1 Multi-point latches shall be rated for the im-
pact energy resistance in foot-pounds and design 8.2.2 Classifications
pressure in pounds per square foot as follows:
8.2.2.1 Doors shall be classified for stiffness as
7.3.4.1.1 For pairs of doors with four or more follows in Table 1 based on the results of the twist
points of latching, the design pressure is the maxi- test.
mum test pressure increment that did not result in
failure as determined by 7.3.3.3 divided by a safety Table 1 – Stiffness Classification
factor of 1.5.
Corner Deflection Stiffness Class
7.3.4.1.2 For pairs of doors with single point latch-
ing on the active leaf and multi-point latching on ≤ 0.5 inch I
the inactive leaf as described in 7.3.2.1, the de- > 0.5 inch and ≤ 1.0 inch II
sign pressure is the maximum test pressure incre- > 1.0 inch and ≤ 2.0 inches III
ment that did not result in failure as determined by
> 2.0 inches and ≤ 3.0 inches IV
7.3.3.3 divided by a safety factor of 1.5.
> 3.0 inches V
7.3.4.1.3 For pairs of doors with single point latch-
ing on the active leaf and multi-point latching on
the inactive leaf as described in 7.3.2.2 with sur- 8.3 Assembly Tests
face or flush bolts per ANSI/BHMA A156.16 Aux-
iliary Hardware, mounted on the inactive leaf, the 8.3.1 Doors shall be installed in each assembly
design pressure is the maximum pressure incre- configuration for which a rating is to be deter-
ment that did not result in failure as determined by mined. The following list shall be used to select the
7.3.3.3 divided by a safety factor of 3.0. test configurations.
8.3.1.1 Single-swing with cylindrical single-point
8 Doors latch.
8.1 Doors shall be tested in the largest size (over- 8.3.1.2 Single-swing with mortise single-point
all area, greatest width, greatest height) for which latch.
a design pressure rating is to be applied. Require-
ments for framing systems or other reinforcements 8.3.1.3 Single-swing with rim or mortise exit de-
in doors shall be specified as defined in the man- vice.
ufacturer’s follow-up inspection procedures. All 8.3.1.4 Pairs of doors swinging in the same direc-
doors of the same design with smaller dimensions tion with 4-point latching – surface rods.
shall be given the same rating as the test door (s).
8.3.1.5 Pairs of doors swinging in the same direc-
8.2 Stiffness Classification tion with 4-point latching – concealed rods.
8.2.1 Doors shall be classified for stiffness by per- 8.3.1.6 Pairs of doors swinging in the same direc-
forming the following twist test on a 3'0" by 7'0" tion with 3-point latching – surface rods by cylindri-
cal latch.

11
ANSI A250.13-2008

Table 2 – Example Door Rating Data

Door Model: 1234 Stiffness Class II

Maximum Latch Throw Latch Strength Impact Design Pressure
Configuration
Size Min. (in) Min. (lbf) (ft-lbf) (psf)
Single Out-swing (cylindrical) 4-0 x 8-0 1/2 1600 350 100

Single In-swing (mortise) 4-0 x 8-0 1/2 1600 350 100

Single Out-swing (Rim) 3-0 x 8-0 (1) (1) 350 80

Pair w/ 4-Point (CVR by CVR) 8-0 x 8-0 (1) (1) 350 80

Pair w/ 3-Point 8-0 x 8-0 (1) (1) 350 80

Pair w/ 4-Point (CVR by CVR) 6-0 x 7-0 (1) (1) 350 140

(1) Components are rated in design pressure (psf) not latch strength (lbf)

8.3.1.7 Pairs of doors swinging in the same direc- mum area, height, and width of exposed light) of
tion with 3-point latching – flush bolts or CVR by the lite kit and the minimum sizes of the door pe-
mortise latch. rimeter shall be defined. Requirements for framing
systems or other reinforcements in doors shall be
8.3.1.8 Pairs of doors swinging in the same direc-
specified as defined in the manufacturer’s follow-
tion with 3-point latching-mortise exit device by
up inspection procedures.
surface or concealed exit device.
8.3.4 Doors are to be tested installed in frames
8.3.1.9 Pairs of doors swinging in the same direc-
using latching hardware and hinges with a design
tion with 2-point latching – rim exit device with re-
pressure rating greater than or equal to the speci-
movable mullion.
fied design-pressure rating of the door.
8.3.2 A minimum of 3 assemblies shall be tested
8.3.5 Assemblies which incorporate manual sur-
for single-swing configurations and a minimum of
face bolts or other latching hardware intended only
three assemblies shall be tested for pair configu-
for use in severe storm conditions (hurricanes)
rations. Latching hardware configurations can be
shall be evaluated for design pressure strength per
varied between the individual assemblies to pro-
ASTM E330 with and without the additional hard-
vide coverage per 8.3.1. This includes combining
ware engaged. The ratings for such assemblies
surface and concealed-rod type hardware in one
shall indicate design pressure for the assembly
pair assembly to cover configurations from 8.3.1.4
both with and without the additional hardware.
and 8.3.1.5. The resulting ratings will be deter-
mined separately for pair and single-swing config- 8.4 Test Procedure
urations. When the three assemblies of one swing
type vary, the rating for the door is to be based 8.4.1 Each assembly configuration shall be tested
on the highest design pressure test passed by all to 1.5 times the design pressure, per ASTM E330.
three assemblies. 8.4.2 Each assembly shall be tested based on
8.3.3 Qualifying Doors for Lite Kits – Where doors the design pressure specified by the door manu-
are to be qualified to receive lite kits, at least one facturer per ASTM E1886. Impact and cyclic load
assembly shall be tested with maximum lite kit size tests shall be conducted as specified in ASTM
desired. This assembly shall be an assembly or at E1886. (At the discretion of the test sponsor the
least one of the assemblies from 8.3.2. Multiple same or an identical assembly shall be permitted
lite kit designs and sizes may be tested for mul- for the structural test.) For doors designated by the
tiple ratings. The rating for the door is to be based manufacturer as either in-swing only or out-swing
on the highest design pressure test passed by the only, the impact test shall be conducted only from
glazed assembly, but shall not exceed the rating the outdoor side of the assembly. For doors des-
of the opaque assemblies. The largest size (maxi- ignated as either in-swing or out-swing, the impact

12
 ANSI A250.13-2008

tests shall be conducted from the outside (push 9.2 Test Procedure
side) of in-swinging assemblies on two samples
and from the outside (pull side) of an out-swinging 9.2.1 Static Pressure Test
assembly on the third sample. 9.2.1.1 Each assembly configuration shall be
8.4.3 Assemblies shall remain closed and latched tested to 1.5 times the design pressure, per ASTM
during the tests specified and the active leaf shall E330.
be operable at the conclusion of the tests. 9.2.1.2 Install the glazing system into the type and
size of door specified by the glazing system manu-
8.5 Ratings of Doors
facturer. Three identical assemblies are required.
8.5.1 Ratings of doors shall include the following The doors shall be mounted in frames and bucks
information (see Table 2): as required for the standard door test procedure.
1. Maximum Size; 9.2.2 Impact Test
2. Stiffness Classification for selection of rim 9.2.2.1 Test the assembly per ASTM E1886 with
and mortise exit devices; the impacts required applied to the center and one
3. Design Pressure Rating for each configu- corner of the glazing panel in each assembly.
ration type; (this provides consistency in 9.2.3 Cycle Test
language);
9.2.3.1 Cycle test each assembly per ASTM
4. Impact Energy Resistance Classification; E1886.
5. Minimum Latch Throw for single point lock 9.2.3.2 Upon completion of the impact and cycle
sets; tests there shall be no failure of the glazing sys-
6. Minimum Latch Strength for single point tem as defined in the referenced standard ASTM
lock sets. E1996.
9.3 Glazing System Ratings
9 Door Lite Kits
9.3.1 Glazing systems shall be rated at the design
9.1 Door lite kits shall be evaluated as complete pressure used in the evaluation and shall include
glazing systems designed for installation into spe- minimum door size and maximum glazing dimen-
cific door types. These door types shall have been sions (maximum area, maximum height and maxi-
qualified to receive lite kits in accordance with mum width).
paragraph 8.3.3. Glazing systems shall include
all parts necessary to install the glazing in the 10 Sidelights and/or Transoms
door. This shall normally include at least a glaz-
ing panel, frame, sealant or glazing compound and 10.1 Sidelights and/or transoms shall be tested
fasteners. Requirements for framing systems or with doors, to the largest total size (maximum
other reinforcements in doors shall be specified as area, height and width) to be rated. Testing shall
defined in the manufacturer’s follow-up inspection be performed per ASTM E1886 and ASTM E1996
procedures. with the impacts applied only to the glazed portion
of the assembly. Doors used in the evaluation as-
9.1.1 Glazing systems shall be tested in the larg- sembly shall be rated per this method for at least
est size (maximum area, height, width of exposed the design pressure specified for the sidelight/
light) to be rated in the smallest standard door size transom assembly.
(minimum 3'0" x 7'0") that can accommodate the
glazing system. 10.2 Installation of sidelight and/or transom as-
semblies shall be per manufacturer’s instructions.
9.1.2 Alternately, glazing systems shall be tested Frames for these assemblies shall be evaluated for
as part of door assemblies as defined in paragraph installation in each wall type for which the product
8.3.3. In this case, the largest size (maximum area, is intended. Installation instructions shall include:
height, and width of exposed light) of the lite kit glazing material, sealants or glazing compounds,
and the minimum sizes of the door perimeter shall installation procedures, and details of frame an-
be defined. choring methods.

13
ANSI A250.13-2008

10.3 Ratings for Sidelight and/or Tran- 11.1.2 Static Pressure Test
som Assemblies 11.1.2.1 Load the assembly to 1.5 times design
10.3.1 Sidelight and/or transom assemblies shall pressure in accordance with ASTM E330 in both
be rated for design pressure based on tests in ac- positive and negative directions. Hold the pres-
cordance with ASTM E1886 and ASTM E1996. sure applied for a minimum of 30 seconds, then
release.
11 Miscellaneous Components 11.1.3 Impact Test
11.1 Center Mullions Prepared for Hard- 11.1.3.1 On the same assembly used in the struc-
ware tural test or an identical assembly, at the manu-
11.1.1 Center mullions prepared for hardware facturer’s option, apply four impacts of 350 ft-lbf
shall be tested at the maximum height specified using one of the impact test methods described in
by the manufacturer. Install the mullion in a frame section 5.2.2.1. One impact is to be applied at the
of the maximum width for which a rating is desired meeting edge of the doors 6 inches down from the
following the manufacturer’s instructions. Doors head jamb. The second impact is to be applied at
used for this test shall be stiffened as described the meeting edge of the doors 6 inches up from
in section 5.2.1.2.1, except that surface applied re- the sill and the third impact applied at the center-
inforcements are to be removed in areas required line of the latch and 6 inches horizontally from the
for mounting the latching device. Doors are to be latch edge of the door. Apply a fourth impact at
equipped with rim exit devices or other hardware the center of the other door 5 inches below the
as specified by the manufacturer. latch. Upon completion of the impact tests, con-
duct cycle testing as specified in ASTM E1886. At

Impact Locations

Figure 8 – Impact Locations for Center Mullion Test

14
 ANSI A250.13-2008

the completion of these tests the hardware mullion two-point latching if two impacts are conducted at
shall remain in place and the door assembly shall the same location.
be operable.
11.2.6 Cycle Test
11.1.4 Hardware mullions shall be rated for the
impact energy successfully passed and for the 11.2.6.1 The same assembly used for the impact
design pressure tested in the static pressure and test in 11.2.3 shall be subjected to the cyclic pres-
cycle tests. sure test prescribed by ASTM E1886.
11.2.7 Upon completion of these tests, the door
11.2 Thresholds
assembly shall be operable and the threshold
11.2.1 Thresholds are only evaluated for their abil- shall remain in place.
ity to retain latch bolts and strikes and remain se-
11.2.8 Thresholds shall be rated for the impact
cured to underlying construction when subjected
energy successfully passed and for the latching
to anticipated structural and impact energy loads.
load established in the structural load and cycle
11.2.2 Thresholds are to be tested in conjunction tests. Latching load (lbf) shall be calculated as de-
with hardware mullions as described in section 11.1 sign pressure (psf) times the area (square feet) of
when applicable. Thresholds that are designed for the opening divided by 4 (the equivalent of one-
direct attachment of latching devices shall be test- quarter of the total load).
ed as follows.
11.2.3 Thresholds shall be tested at the maximum 12 Selection Criteria
door opening width to which the resulting rating 12.1 The following process is used to determine
is to be applied. Thresholds shall be installed in a Swinging Door Assembly Ratings for Severe Wind-
test assembly using a frame and stiffened doors storm Resistance from Component Ratings.
(per 5.2.1.2.1) known to be capable of sustaining
the required test pressure. Thresholds shall be at- 12.1.1 The first step in determining if an assembly
tached to a simulated floor using the number, size meets a code requirement for severe windstorm
and locations of fasteners specified by the man- resistance is for the building designer to determine
ufacturer. The set-up shall be for a single-point the required performance level for the opening.
latching on the active leaf and two-point latching This shall include a calculation of the required
on the inactive leaf with the bolt and strike speci- minimum design pressure in pounds per square
fied by the manufacturer. foot and the determination of whether or not im-
pact resistance is required. In most cases ASCE
11.2.4 Static Pressure Test 7 is specified by the applicable building code and
11.2.4.1 The test assembly shall be loaded per requires a thorough analysis of the building design
ASTM E330 to 1.5 times the design pressure and location to determine design pressure for each
specified by the manufacturer in both positive and opening. State and local building codes will gen-
negative directions. The pressure in each direction erally specify when impact resistance is required
shall be maintained for a minimum of 30 seconds, and at what level.
then released. 12.1.2 If impact resistance is required, each com-
11.2.5 Impact Test ponent of the opening shall have an impact rating
equal to or greater than the impact energy required
11.2.5.1 The same assembly or an identical as- for the opening.
sembly which has not been subjected to the 1.5
times design load test shall be used for this test at 12.1.3 Determine the wall construction type for the
the manufacturer’s option. Impacts (350 ft-lb) shall opening (masonry, wood frame, steel, etc.). The
be applied using one of the impact test methods selected frame and anchorage method must meet
described in section 5.2.2.1 to a location on the or exceed the design pressure and impact energy
centerline of any latching device that engages into requirements for the opening. The size at which
the sill at a point 6 inches up from the sill. If the the frame is rated must be equal to or greater than
assembly includes two latching locations, two im- the size requirement for the opening.
pacts are required. If a single latch point is used, 12.1.4 Determine the type of hinge needed for the
the threshold will be considered acceptable for application. Leaf and butt hinges are expressed

15
ANSI A250.13-2008

in lbs force. To select leaf or butt hinges, multiply or exceed the design pressure and impact energy
the design pressure by the tributary area in square requirements for the opening. The required door
feet for each hinge to determine the required hinge size for the opening must be equal to or less than
design load in pounds force (lbf). Select a hinge the door size listed for the selected hardware.
that meets or exceeds the design load and impact
NOTE: Stiffness classifications are only required for
energy requirements for the opening (see exam- rim and mortise exit devices.
ples in Appendix B).
12.1.7 If a light kit is to be installed, select a light
12.1.4.2 Continuous hinges and pivots are rated kit with a design pressure and impact energy rat-
for design pressure, impact energy and door leaf ing equal to or greater than the required values.
size. The design pressure and impact energy rat-
ing for the selected continuous or pivot hinge must 12.1.8 To select a door leaf compare the rated
meet or exceed the requirements for the opening. design pressure, desired hardware configuration,
The required door size for the opening must be impact energy, and size requirements with the
equal to or less than the door size listed for the opening requirements. Obtain the design pres-
hinge. sure rating for the specified hardware configura-
tion by checking the door rating data (see example
12.1.5 To select cylindrical lock or mortise lock in table 2). The rated door panel design pressure
for a door leaf, determine the latch bolt design for the desired hardware configuration, impact en-
load (lbf) required, by multiplying one-half of the ergy, and size must meet or exceed the require-
nominal door leaf area in square feet by the design ments for the opening. If rim exits or mortise exits
pressure. Select a lock with a design load rating are specified, the door panel must meet or exceed
(lbf) equal to or greater than the calculated latch the door stiffness classification for the rim or mor-
design load (see examples in Appendix B). tise exit device being used.
12.1.6 To select a rim exit, mortise exit, hardware 12.1.9 All components must be installed in accor-
mullion, or multi-point latch configuration, compare dance with the component manufacturer’s instruc-
the rated hardware design pressure, impact en- tions. The assembly rating is equal to the lowest
ergy requirement, and door size with the opening design pressure rating of the selected components
requirements. The selected hardware design pres- and must be equal to or greater than the design
sure and impact energy requirements must meet pressure required for the opening.

16
 ANSI A250.13-2008

Appendix A
(normative)

Tolerances and Conversion of Measurements to SI

I-P SI
I-P Value I-P Unit SI Value SI Unit
Tolerance Tolerance
110 MPH NA 49 M/s NA
150 MPH NA 67 M/s NA
5 PSF ±0.5 239 Pa ±24
10 PSF ±0.5 479 Pa ±24
60 in ±0.25 1524 mm ±6
30 in ±0.25 762 mm ±6
40-5/16 in ±1/8 1024 mm ±3
1-1/4 in ±1/8 32 mm ±3
3/16 in ±1/32 4.8 mm ±1
16 in ±1 406 mm ±25
6 in ±1 152 mm ±25
3 in ±1/8 76 mm ±3
15 lbf ±0.5 67 N ±2
1 in ±1/16 25 mm ±2
350 ft-lb ±3.5 475 N-M ±5
100 lb ±1 45.4 Kg ±0.5
12 in ±1/8 305 mm ±3
24 in ±1/8 610 mm ±3
50 ft/sec NA 1.52 M/s NA
0.05 in/min ±0.005 1.3 mm/min ±0.1
300 lbf ±3 1334 N ±13
2.5 in ±0.1 64 mm ±2.5
1/4 in ±0.03 6 mm ±1
0.01 in NA 0.25 mm NA
0.5 in NA 12.7 mm NA
1.0 in NA 25.4 mm NA
2.0 in NA 50.8 mm NA
3.0 in NA 76.2 mm NA

17
ANSI A250.13-2008

Appendix B
(informative)
Example 1

Opening design pressure: per ASCE 7 = 67 psf, requires 350 ft-lb impact energy per local code.
Opening size: 3'0" x 7'0" — Single In-Swing
Wall type: 2 x 6 wood stud 16 in o.c. with 1/2 inch exterior sheathing — design pressure
rating 75 psf.
Frame: 16 ga. pressed steel with 5/8 inch stops.
Frame rating: for 3'0" x 7'0" with 1/4" x 3-1/2" lag screw anchors to wood studs at 24" o.c. = 75
psf. & 350 ft-lb — OK.
Hinges: (ABC Co. Model 1– 500 lbf – 350 ft-lb rating) 3 – 4" x 0.135" centered at 8" from
top, center of door and 8" from bottom.
Latch: (XYZ Co. Model 2 – 1000 lbf – 350 ft-lb rating for class II doors) single point
mortise, 5/8" throw.
Door: 3'0" x 7'0" Hollow Metal — Stiffness class II, 70 psf, 350 ft-lb rating. — OK.

Location Area (ft2) Load @ 70 psf (lbf)

A Top Hinge 3.125 219 < 500 OK.

B Middle Hinge 4.25 298 < 500 OK.
C Bottom Hinge 3.125 219 < 500 OK.
D Latch 10.5 735 < 1000 OK.

Opening Design Pressure Rating = 70 psf based on door.

Qualifies for Impact Energy Rating of 350 ft-lbf.

18
 ANSI A250.13-2008

Example 2

Opening Design Pressure: Per ASCE 7 = 80 pounds per square foot (PSF), requires 350 ft-lbf impact
energy per local code.
Opening Size: 8'0" x 8'0" – Pairs of Doors
Wall Type: Masonry – design pressure rating 90 PSF – OK (Meets opening design pres-
sure requirement)
Frame: 14 ga. Pressed steel with 5/8 inch stops
Frame Rating: For a 8'0" x 8'0" with masonry T anchors is 80 PSF & 350 ft-lbf – OK (Meets
opening design pressure requirement)
Hinges: (ABC Co. Model 1 - 4" x 0.125", 350 lbf, 350 ft-lbf rating): 4 req’d per leaf - cen-
tered at 8" from top of door, centered at 34-2/3" from top of door, centered at
34-2/3" from bottom of door, & centered at 8" from bottom of door.
Latch: (XYZ Co. Model 2 – Surface Vertical rod exit device, 85 PSF, 350 ft-lbf impact
rating, two latchbolts per exit device per door leaf, 3/4" latch throw – OK (Meets
opening design pressure req.)
Door: 4'0" x 8'0" hollow metal – stiffness class I, 80 PSF & 350 ft-lbf Rating – OK
(Meets opening design pressure requirement)

21 1/3" A

26 2/3" B

8 FT E

26 2/3" C

21 1/3" D

24" 24"

4 FT
8 FT

Hinge Location / Area Calculation Load Calc Load vs Rating Pressure vs Criteria
Door Area Rating Met?
Top Hinge / A (21 1/3” x 24”)/144 = 3.555 ft2 80 PSF x 3.555 ft2 = 284 Lbf 284 Lbf < 350 Lbf N/A YES
Middle Upper Hinge / B (26 2/3” x 24”)/144 = 4.444 ft 2
80 PSF x 4.444 ft = 356 Lbf
2
356 Lbf > 350 Lbf N/A NO
Middle Upper Hinge / B (26 2/3” x 24”)/144 = 4.444 ft2 80 PSF x 4.444 ft2 = 356 Lbf 356 Lbf > 350 Lbf N/A NO
Bottom Hinge/ C (21 1/3” x 24”)/144 = 3.555 ft 2
80 PSF x 3.555 ft = 284 Lbf
2
284 Lbf < 350 Lbf N/A YES
Latches / D N/A N/A N/A 80 PSF < 85 PSF YES

Result: Opening does not meet the design pressure requirement due to hinge rating. In
order to meet it, the hinges need to be replaced with higher rated ones (≥ 356
Lbf).

19
 MEMBERS OF THE
AVAILABLE PUBLICATIONS STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE
AMWELD INTERNATIONAL, LLC
301 South Northpoint Drive, Suite 400
Specifications
Coppell, TX 75019
ANSI/SDI A250.6 Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcings on Standard (888) 775-2397
Steel Doors and Frames www.amweld.com
ANSI/SDI A250.8 SDI 100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors & CECO DOOR PRODUCTS
Frames 9159 Telecom Drive
SDI-108 Recommended Selection & Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors Milan, TN 38358
(731) 686-8345
SDI-109 Hardware for Standard Steel Doors & Frames www.cecodoor.com
SDI-118 Basic Fire Door Requirements CURRIES COMPANY
SDI-128 Guidelines for Acoustical Performance of Standard Steel Doors & P.O. Box 1648
Frames Mason City, IA 50402-1648
(641) 423-1334
SDI-129 Hinge & Strike Spacing www.curries.com

Test Procedures DEANSTEEL MANUFACTURING CO.

111 Merchant Street
ANSI/SDI A250.3 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish San Antonio, TX 78204-1496
Coatings for Steel Doors & Frames (210) 226-8271
ANSI/SDI A250.4 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for www.deansteel.com
Steel Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors & Hardware Reinforcings DOOR COMPONENTS INC.
ANSI/SDI A250.10 Test Procedure & Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel 7980 Redwood Avenue
Fontana, CA 92336-1638
Surfaces for Steel Doors & Frames
(909) 770-5700
ANSI/SDI A250.13 Testing and Rating of Severe Windstorm Resistant Components www.doorcomponents.com
for Swinging Door Assemblies
MESKER DOOR, INC.
SDI-113 Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal 3440 Stanwood Boulevard
Transmittance of Steel Door & Frame Assemblies Huntsville, AL 35811-9021
(256) 851-6670
SDI-131 Accelerated Physical Endurance Test Procedure for Steel Doors, www.meskerdoor.com
Frames and Frame Anchors
METAL PRODUCTS, INC.
Construction Details 319 North Hills Road
Corbin, KY 40701
ANSI/SDI A250.11 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames (606) 523-0173
SDI-110 Standard Steel Doors & Frames for Modular Masonry Construction www.metalproductsinc.com
SDI-111 Recommended Details for Standard Details Steel Doors, Frames, PIONEER INDUSTRIES, INC.
Accessories and Related Components 171 South Newman Street
Hackensack, NJ 07601
SDI-122 Installation & Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors &
(201) 933-1900
Frames www.pioneerindustries.com
SDI Drywall Slip-On Frames
REPUBLIC
155 Republic Drive
Miscellaneous Documents McKenzie, TN 38201-0580
ANSI/SDI A250.7 Nomenclature for Standard Steel Doors & Steel Frames (731) 352-3383
www.republicdoor.com
SDI-106 Recommended Standard Door Type Nomenclature
SDI-112 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors & SECURITY METAL PRODUCTS CORP.
5700 Hannum Avenue, Suite 250
Frames
Culver City, CA 90230
SDI-117 Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors & Frames (310) 641-6690
www.secmet.com
SDI-124 Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors & Frames
SDI-127 Industry Alert Series (A-L) STEELCRAFT
Ingersoll Rand Security Technologies
SDI-130 Electrified Hinge Preparations 9017 Blue Ash Road
SDI What is The SDI? Cincinnati, OH 45242
(513) 745-6400
AUDIO-VISUAL PROGRAMS ON VHS ALSO AVAILABLE www.steelcraft.com

STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE

30200 DETROIT ROAD • CLEVELAND, OHIO 44145
440.899.0010 • FAX 440.892.1404
11/9/2009 www.steeldoor.org